JP2023116766A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: Lottery processing of a combination is executed and rotation of a reel is started based on operation of a start lever, and control corresponding to prize winning, such as granting of a game medium and setting of a replay, is executed based on the fact that a stop result corresponds to a result of the lottery processing of a combination when the rotation of a reel is stopped based on operation of a stop button. In this case, continuous lottery processing is executed in each game regardless of a result of the lottery processing of a combination in an ART state. When additional winning occurs directly in the continuous lottery processing, and when the additional winning does not directly occur in the additional lottery processing corresponding to the result of the lottery processing of a combination, the number of additional games with the fact that the additional winning occurs directly in the continuous lottery processing as an opportunity is added to the number of remaining, continued games in the ART state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section. Also, in a pachinko game machine, there is known a configuration in which a display device or a rotator is used to carry out variable display of patterns.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, thereby starting the variable display of the pattern, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the result of stopping the symbols after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides a first control means for managing the progress of a game,
a second control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
Lottery means for executing lottery processing;
a game executing means for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery process;
a first section setting means for setting the game section to the first section;
A second section setting means for setting the game section to a second section;
Predetermined response means for causing a predetermined response situation to occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained based on the predetermined lottery result in the lottery process;
means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section;
means for updating the predetermined reference information stored in the predetermined storage means to the side closer to the predetermined end information based on the fact that the game is executed in the advantageous gaming state and the update opportunity is generated;
a predetermined update means for updating the predetermined reference information to a side away from the predetermined end information when a predetermined grant condition is established in the advantageous gaming state;
a predetermined transmitting means for transmitting predetermined transmission information corresponding to the updated information when the predetermined reference information is updated by the predetermined updating means so as to move away from the predetermined end information;
means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means so as to be closer to the specific end information based on the fact that the game is executed in the second interval and the update trigger is generated;
Section termination means for terminating the second section based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the second section;
means for terminating the advantageous gaming state on the basis that the predetermined reference information becomes the predetermined end information before the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the second section and in the advantageous gaming state; ,
means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the second interval ends based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the advantageous gaming state;
with
The second control means executes a reception response process for executing an effect corresponding to the update of the predetermined reference information to a side away from the predetermined end information based on the reception of the predetermined transmission information. Equipped with means for receiving,
The second interval setting means is configured such that, in the second interval, the continuation criterion information is located between the specific information that the continuation criterion information can reach before reaching the specific end information and the initial information of the continuation criterion information. A section continuation means for continuing the second section after the end of the advantageous gaming state in a situation that is information included in the range,
The reception corresponding means is
notification means for updating the continuation information to be notified in order to allow the player to recognize the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information in the game;
Post-notification means for updating the continuation information to be notified post-notification in order to prevent the player from recognizing the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information in the game;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a power failure performed by main side MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a random number circuit group provided on a main control board; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configurations of first to twelfth shared random number circuits and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for normal mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the winning mode established when the normal mode lottery table is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected; It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for the second RT mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values with different winning probabilities among set values "1" to "6". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an offset table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning data acquisition processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; It is an assembly perspective view of a left reel. (a) is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor, and (b) is a diagram showing drive characteristics of the stepping motor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an excitation order table; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining required drive characteristics; It is an explanatory view for explaining an acceleration table. 4 is a flowchart showing acceleration processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing stepping motor control processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing motor control processing executed by the main MPU; (a) to (f) are time charts showing the flow of reel drive control when the supply of operating power is restarted after being stopped while the reels are rotating. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing re-acceleration processing during a reel effect executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how each reel is re-rotated after reel effects are executed. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for information performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing transition lottery processing for a false portent state executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing transitions to advantageous sections and return to normal sections. It is a flowchart which shows the transition lottery process for chance states performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a chance state process executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for low probability, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for high probability. (a1) to (a4), (b1) to (b4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the handling of numerical information when the lottery process for transition to the ART state is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for normals performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for false portent states performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the false omen effect and the chance effect are executed. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the false omen effect on the image display device; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the chance effect on the image display device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing bonus processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing bonus processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game during a bonus, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a bonus state process executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state process performed by main side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main side RAM, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the effect side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the regular lottery process performed by main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a common addition table, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a direct addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for direct additions performed by main side MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the number of additional games is increased by the regular lottery process and the additional process. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an A-loop lottery table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining various continuation lottery tables, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a B-loop lottery table. . FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing A-loop processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing B-loop processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU; (a) to (h) are time charts for explaining an overview of effects that occur in the ART state. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for extraordinary which is performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for direct addition effects performed by the effect|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for A loop production|presentation performed by the production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the special addition production|presentation performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of special additional effects; It is a flowchart which shows the process for special addition effects performed by the effect|presentation side MPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how an expected effect and a special additional effect are executed when an A loop occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for B loop production|presentation performed by the production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how a special freeze effect is executed when a B loop occurs. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing stock release processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. FIGS. 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the image display device in the ART state; FIGS. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how various release effects are executed. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for ending effects performed by MPU on the effect|presentation side. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in a situation where the ending effect is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending ending production|presentation performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze setting process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the ending effect is executed. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation control processing for advantage maintenance sections performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus winning notification image, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus type notification image. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how the advantageous maintenance section progresses. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how game history management results are displayed using a dual-purpose display unit. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus generation management process executed by the main MPU in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus management process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus start process executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an initial continuous game number table, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a transition condition game number table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game during a pseudo-bonus, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a first addition table; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a second addition table; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pseudo-bonus progression processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the handling of the number of additional games changes according to the state of the ART winning flag in the pseudo-bonus state. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for pseudo bonuses performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how pre-branching effects and branching effects are executed in a pseudo-bonus state. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth addition tables in the third embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an index correspondence table; (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining first to fourth compressed data; It is a flowchart which shows the addition lottery process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for acquiring an added index, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a random number circuit group provided on a main control board in the fifth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for usual performed by the production|presentation side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for false portent states performed by the production|presentation side MPU in 7th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a bonus notification process during the ending executed by the effect-side MPU in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing power failure processing executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing stop operation determination processing executed by the main MPU in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining each history area provided in main side RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing rotation monitoring processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing direct-addition processing executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing direct-addition processing executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing chance state processing executed by the main MPU in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. (a1) to (a5), (b1) to (b5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the handling of numerical information when the lottery process for transition to the ART state is executed.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side of the front door 12 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be viewed through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as an investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the awarding of the game media is established on the activated line. there is

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and two virtual medals are inserted at once. There are provided a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting virtual medals and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the checkout button 51 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key inserting portion 57 operated to change within the range of setting 6” is provided. Note that the setting state of the slot machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and any number of stages may be used.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key inserting portion 57 and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key inserting portion 57 is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 72 of the main controller 70), the setting state of the slot machine 10 can be changed. changeable state. In this state, each time the reset button 56 is pressed once, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is changed by one step in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in ascending order. When the reset button 56 is operated in the state of "setting 6", the state is updated to "setting 1". Further, the setting key insertion portion 57 is turned off by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 57 from the ON operation position in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 57 is turned OFF after the start lever 41 is operated, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played with the set values at that time. In other words, even if the reset button 56 is operated after the changeable state ends, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the slot machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the slot machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (that is, setting The higher the value, the higher the advantage. Specifically, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the bonus state (BB state and RB state), and the higher the probability of winning the small combination that triggers the provision of game media. is set.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R of the main controller 70, which will be described later. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in a state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a specified number of game media bet, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media, Either the benefit of replay or the transition of the game state is provided.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a winning combination is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The small prizes for which game media are awarded include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. There is Specifically, on the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second supplementary prize is won. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the third supplementary prize is won. becomes. If any one of the first to third supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes “1”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. If any one of the first to second bell wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “11”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When one of the first and second watermelon prizes is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the benefit of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, second chance replay winnings, first replay winnings, first replay winnings, and second chance replay winnings. There are 2RT replay wins, first fall replay wins, and second fall replay wins. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, or the main line ML In the above, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the normal replay wins.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay. Win a prize.

On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the 1st replay winning prize becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT replay wins. becomes.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first fall replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second drop replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which the game medium of "3" is betted, the betting of the game medium becomes unnecessary, and the next game is started with the game medium of "3" betted. A game can be started.

Among the above various replay prizes, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first fall replay prize, and the second fall replay prize not only trigger the provision of the replay prize privilege, but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the type of the lottery to be selected and the winning probability of each role differ in the lottery process (FIG. 17). Occurs when the replay winning that triggers the transition to the lottery mode is established. Details of each lottery mode and conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be described later in detail.

As state transition prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are 1BB prize, 2BB prize, 3BB prize, 4BB prize, 1RB prize and 2RB prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the first BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "White 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "White 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "White 7" symbol, 2BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, 3BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, 4BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the first RB Win a prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "WHITE 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "WHITE 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second RB. Win a prize.

When the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize, the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Further, when the first RB prize or the second RB prize is established, the game state shifts to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to the bonus state. The bonus state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.5) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each The first bell prize is established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the net increase expected value of the game media per unit number of games is higher than in the game states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than in other game states, and the number of game media per unit game number in the bonus state may be lower than in the game states other than the bonus state. If the net increase expected value is high, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be larger than in other game states.

Of the bonus states, the BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is met based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or greater than the BB termination reference number (specifically, "350"). is set as It should be noted that the termination condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the BB state reaches the BB termination reference number of games.

Of the bonus states, the RB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game execution. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the end condition is that the total number of game media provided after the RB state is started becomes equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (specifically, "150"). is set as This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the RB state. Note that the termination condition may be established when the number of games executed in the RB state reaches the RB termination reference number of games. In this case, by setting the RB end reference number of games to be smaller than the BB end reference number of games, it is possible to make the BB state more advantageous to the player than the RB state.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the reported contents is performed, and furthermore, the management result of the game history is reported. A dual-use display portion 66 for displaying a display for the purpose and an advantageous section display portion 67 for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is an advantageous section are provided. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and an advantageous section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in a dual-use display section 66, and one light emitting section Advantageous section display section 67 is aggregated.

If any of the small wins corresponding to the provision of game media (1st to 3rd supplemental wins, 1st to 2nd bell wins, 1st to 2nd watermelon wins or cherry wins) is established, that small win At the end of a game in which a winning combination has been established, the number of game media to be given corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66.例文帳に追加Specifically, when any one of the first to third supplementary prizes is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. , it is notified that a game medium of "1" has been provided. When one of the first and second bell wins is established, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, so that the game medium of "11" is displayed. You will be notified that it has been granted. Further, when any one of the first and second watermelon wins is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby displaying "5". ” is provided. Further, when a cherry win is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden, and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby providing the game medium of '2'. is notified. On the other hand, even if a winning such as one of replay winning, one of BB winning and one of RB winning is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not performed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 includes the second RT replay winning data if the winning combination including the first bell winning data is won in the winning lottery process, or if the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data is won. It can be executed when winning a role, when winning a role including the first replay winning data, or when winning a role including the second replay winning data. Specifically, when a winning combination including the first bell winning data is won, the first bell is won when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned stopping orders. holds. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium "11" is provided to the player as already explained.

When a winning combination including the 1st replay winning data is won, the 1st replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time out of the respective stopping orders. Then, when the 1RT replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 1RT mode in which it is easier to win a role including any of the replay winning data than in the normal mode (that is, it is easier to establish any of the replay prizes). . In addition, when a winning combination including the 2nd RT replay winning data is won, the 2nd RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time out of the respective stopping orders. . Then, when the 2nd replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 2nd RT mode where it is easier to win a role containing any replay winning data than in the 1st RT mode (that is, it is easier for any replay prize to be established). do.

When a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, the winning of the first falling replay is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. be. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding establishment of the first fall replay prize, the shift to the normal mode can be avoided. . In addition, when a winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won, the second falling replay winning prize is awarded when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Avoided. To avoid the transition to the first RT mode by avoiding establishment of the second fall replay prize although the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode when the second fall replay prize is established. can be done.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display contents of the stop order on the combined display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the combined display section 66 performs the display corresponding to the awarding of the game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . Also, the dual-use display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are displayed. This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The combined display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , whereas the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The advantageous section display portion 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the advantageous section among the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a stoppage of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The section corresponds to either the section in which the order is reported or the section in which the probability of transition to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section refers to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is won. This is a section in which the order of stopping is not notified, and a section in which the probability of transition to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than that in the advantageous section, or a section in which transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the transition condition to the advantageous section is established in the normal section and the transition to the advantageous section is made, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on to start notification of the advantageous section. Further, when the transition condition to the normal section is satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section is made, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off, thereby ending the notification of the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the section is advantageous. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66, which is collectively provided in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is given and turned off when the next game is started, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are turned on. is displayed on the image display device 63, and is turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 to prevent the player from becoming too conspicuous, the advantageous section display section 67 is displayed in the common display area 68 in the situation of the advantageous section. It is possible to positively create a situation in which only 67 is lit, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the advantageous section display portion 67 for the manager of the game hall.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the advantageous interval display unit 67 during the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display unit 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the advantageous interval. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11 b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83 in a state in which the separation of the case body is prevented by using the part of the joints 83, another joint 83 can be used after that. are connected, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting portion 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting portion 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . Incidentally, the effect control device 90, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, medal insertion A inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the mouth 45; credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49; Settlement detection sensor 51a, payout detection sensor of hopper device 53, reset detection sensor that detects operation of reset button 56 provided on power supply device 54, and setting to detect insertion of a setting key into setting key insertion portion 57 Various sensors such as a key detection sensor are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the advantageous section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. . In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display unit 67 so that the advantageous section is notified when it is an advantageous section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. It monitors the voltage being applied, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes a power failure process by receiving a power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 .

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are respectively the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The start of operation and initial setting of the image display device 63 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 74 is permitted (step S102).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 57 is turned ON (step S103). If the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned ON (step S103: YES), a process for setting the setting values of the slot machine 10 is executed. Specifically, first, all clear processing is executed (step S104). In the all clear processing, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, the main RAM 74 stores an area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 10, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the bonus state is set, and data indicating the total number of given game media in the bonus state. An area storing data indicating the game state, an area storing data for specifying the end condition of the ART state, an area storing data indicating the game interval, and storing the data of the management result of the game history. Each area of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" including the area where the data has been changed. Then, initial setting is performed for each of these areas. As a result, when the all-clear processing is executed, the normal game state and the normal section are set regardless of the state before the power cutoff, and the game progresses with the occurrence of the abnormality in the state before the power cutoff as a trigger. is in a regulated state, the abnormal state is canceled. In step S104, the various registers of the main MPU 72 are also initialized after being cleared to "0". It should be noted that, in the all-clearing process, the area in which the management result data of the gaming history is stored (specifically, the total number-of-games counter 74a and the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b) may be excluded from the "0" clear targets. . Further, even if an operation for changing the setting state of the slot machine 10 is being performed, if the reset button 56 is not pressed, the main side RAM 74 will not be completely cleared and the slot will be reset. The configuration may be such that the all clear processing is executed when an operation for changing the setting state of the machine 10 is being performed and the reset button 56 is being pressed.

After that, set value update processing is executed (step S105). In the set value update process, first, the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . Since the all clearing process (step S104) is executed before the setting value update process is executed, the display corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the credit display section 65 at the start of the setting value update process. . In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value update process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended.

After executing the set value update process, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S106). In the advantageous section initialization processing, processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section is executed. As a result, when the set value update process is executed, the game section becomes the normal section without fail. After executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the normal process (FIG. 13) described later (step S107).

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S103: NO), the power restoration process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power recovery process, first, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S108). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S108: YES), checksum calculation processing is executed (step S109). Any method can be used to calculate the checksum, but for example, there is a method of adding all numerical values in the storage area that is the object of checksum calculation. This checksum calculation method is the same calculation method as the checksum calculation method in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 12), which will be described later, is stored in the main RAM 74. The storage area of the main RAM 74 in which the checksum is stored is the object of calculation when calculating the checksum. excluded from the storage area. In other words, when calculating the checksum, part of the storage area in the main RAM 74 is subject to calculation. In the storage area to be operated, the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, and then the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. This is a storage area in which information is basically not rewritten when power supply such as backup power to the main RAM 74 is continued until the process of step S109 is executed. Therefore, if the information in the main RAM 74 is not changed from when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped to when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is restarted, the main RAM 74 is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. It should be noted that the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum includes an area in the main RAM 74 in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. After that, the checksum calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and stored in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read checksum is It is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S109 matches (step S110).

If the checksums match (step S110: YES), it is determined whether the set value is normal (step S111). If the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

If affirmative determinations are made in all of steps S108, S110 and S111, it means that the power failure process (FIG. 12) at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, on the condition that the reset button 56 is being pressed (step S112: YES), clear processing other than the set values is executed (step S113). In the clearing process, the area other than the area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 10 in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and then the initial setting is performed. Thereafter, the routine proceeds to normal processing (step S107).

On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is not pressed (step S112: NO), the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is transferred to the main RAM 74. By restoring the register of the side MPU 72, the state of the register of the main side MPU 72 is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S114). Also, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S115).

After that, a clearing process for reel control (step S116) and a return address adjusting process (step S117) are executed. The contents of these processes will be described later. After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S118), the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S119).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108, S110 and S111, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S120), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S121), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S122). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S104). The operation prohibition process is not canceled even if the clearing process (step S113) other than the set values is executed. It may be configured to be released when executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process (FIG. 13) described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and the power failure processing is executed. The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 .

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing power failure processing. In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not command transmission has been completed (step S301). Return and finish sending commands. If the command has been transmitted (step S301: YES), the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 (step S302). After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (step S303). After executing the checksum calculation process (step S304), the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S305). The contents of the checksum calculation process are the same as those in step S109 in the main process (FIG. 10). Thereafter, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S306). After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), when the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal.

In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively. In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S401). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S402). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any replay winning has occurred, a replay process of setting the same number of bets as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. When no replay winning has occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and when the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After the completion of the medal return processing or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the insertion of medals or the operation of the insertion of credit buttons 47 to 49 has been performed between the previous start waiting processing and the current start waiting processing. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if both the insertion of medals and the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have not been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After execution of the start waiting process of step S402, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number (specifically, "3") (step S403), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number Then, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S402). If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S404). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S402). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S405). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Thereafter, after the normal lottery process is executed (step S406), the lottery process for the winning combination for the current game is executed (step S407). Then, on condition that the value of the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S408: YES), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponds to the result of the lottery process of the current combination. A reel control process is executed to control the drive in the manner described above (step S409).

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S410). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the game media in the number corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to a credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit stored number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit stored number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game interval corresponding to the result of the current game (step S411). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S412). Also, on the condition that the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S413: YES), reception permission processing is executed (step S414). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

<Configuration for lottery>
Next, prior to the description of the lottery process for the combination in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 72 will be described. 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the random number circuit group 100 provided on the main control board 71. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the random number circuit group 100 includes first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. The random number circuit group 100 is also provided with first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. The random number circuit group 100 includes a shared clock circuit 104 that inputs a clock signal in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. First to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d for individually inputting clock signals are provided.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l each having an 8-bit storage area. The values of the first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l are supplied from a shared clock circuit 104 provided in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l as shown in FIG. 12 are updated by inputting a clock signal to the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. For example, in the case of the first shared random number circuit 101a, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first shared random number circuit 101a, and the random number generation circuit receives the clock signal. 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the first random number counter 106a is updated. For example, in the case of the eighth shared random number circuit 101h, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the eighth shared random number circuit 101h, and the random number generation circuit generates the clock signal. The 8-bit data input to the eighth random number counter 106h from the random number generating circuit is updated by receiving it. A random number generating circuit is provided for each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is branched into 12 on the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is connected to one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. It is connected to the corresponding random number circuit. Therefore, the clock signal is input to each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at the same timing. As a result, the random number update cycle in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l becomes constant at the cycle in which the clock signal is output from the shared clock circuit 104, and the random number update timing also depends on the shared clock circuit 104. It becomes constant at the timing when the clock signal is output.

The 8-bit random numbers are updated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l by generating random numbers "0" to "255" in a predetermined order and generating all of these random numbers once. This is done so that one cycle of updates is complete. Then, this update period is repeated. In this case, the random number update order in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from each other. For example, in the first shared random number circuit 101a, the random number update order is set so that the random numbers increase one by one in ascending order from "0" to "255", and the second shared random number circuit 101b The random number update order is set so that the random numbers are decremented by one in descending order from "255" to "0", and the third shared random number circuit 101c updates all even numbers in ascending order. The random number update order is set so that all odd numbers are updated in ascending order later, and the fourth to twelfth shared random number circuits 101d to 101l are set to update orders different from these update orders and mutually different update orders. It is As a result, even in a configuration in which the random number update cycle and update timing of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are constant as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l It is possible to prevent the random numbers from always being the same at each update timing.

In addition, when the random numbers are updated once in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, a new update cycle is started from an initial value different from the initial value of the update cycle. , the mode of selection of the initial value in relation to the number of update cycles differs among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at each update timing.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are respectively provided with a 13th random number counter 106m and a 14th random number counter 106n each having a 16-bit storage area. The circuit 102c is provided with a fifteenth random number counter 106o having a storage area of 8 bits, and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is provided with a sixteenth random number counter 106p having a storage area of 7 bits. The values of these 13th to 16th random number counters 106m to 106p are, as shown in FIG. It is updated by inputting clock signals from the circuits 105a to 105d to the corresponding first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d.

For example, in the case of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the random number generation circuit generates the clock signal. By receiving it, the 16-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the 13th random number counter 106m is updated. In the case of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is input to a random number generator (not shown) provided in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, and the random number generator generates the clock signal. By receiving this, the 16-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the fourteenth random number counter 106n is updated. In the case of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is input to a random number generator (not shown) provided in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the random number generator generates the clock signal. 8-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the fifteenth random number counter 106o is updated. In the case of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d is input to a random number generator (not shown) provided in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, and the random number generator generates the clock signal. 7-bit data input from the random number generator to the 16th random number counter 106p is updated.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are not individually provided with clock circuits as described above, but are each provided with a common shared clock circuit 104. 12, the random number update cycle and the random number update timing in the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are constant. On the other hand, the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are respectively provided with first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d. Specifically, the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. The path is connected to the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is connected to the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d. is connected to the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d.

The clock signal output periods of the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d are different from each other. This makes it possible to make the random number update period and the random number update timing unique in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. Further, the clock signal output period of each of the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105 a to 105 d is different from the clock signal output period of the shared clock circuit 104 . As a result, the random number update cycle and random number update timing in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d can be made different from the random number update cycle and random number update timing in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. becomes possible.

In the updating of the 16-bit random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, random numbers "0" to "65535" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once. to complete one update cycle. Then, this update period is repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are different from each other. For example, the random number update order is set so that the first dedicated random number circuit 102a updates all even numbers in ascending order and then updates all odd numbers in ascending order, and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b updates all odd numbers in ascending order. The update order of random numbers is set so that even numbers are all updated in ascending order later. As a result, not only the random number update cycle and random number update timing but also the random number update order can be made different between the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. And the uniqueness of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b can be ensured.

The configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and a configuration in which the random number update order is the same between the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b may be employed. Even in this case, when the supply of operating power to the main controller 70 is started, the initial value for starting updating the random number is set to By making them different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number.

In the update of the 8-bit random number in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, random numbers from "0" to "255" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once, so that one cycle of updating is completed. done to completion. Then, this update period is repeated. In the update of the 7-bit random number in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, random numbers from "0" to "127" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once each, so that one update period is done to completion. Then, this update period is repeated.

The random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used to trigger the start of a new game in situations where the game can be started. 41 is operated, the data is written into the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p provided corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the main MPU 72 outputs a latch signal when the start lever 41 is operated as a trigger to start a new game in a situation where it is possible to start a new game. A latch signal output unit 107 is provided for this purpose. The signal path for transmitting the latch signal output from the latch signal output section 107 is branched into 16 lines on the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is connected to one of the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p. Connected to the corresponding register. As a result, when a latch signal is output from the latch signal output unit 107 based on the operation of the start lever 41, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d The generated random numbers are written in latch registers 103a-103p corresponding to random number circuits 101a-101l and 102a-102d, respectively. The random numbers written in the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p are obtained and used as necessary when various lotteries are performed in the main MPU 72. FIG.

Here, the random numbers generated by the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d and written to the 13th to 16th latch registers 103m to 103p are uniquely determined for the type of lottery process to be used. there is Specifically, the 16-bit random number generated in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and written in the thirteenth latch register 103m is used in the winning lottery process described later, and is generated in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b to be used as the winning combination. The 16-bit random number written in the 14th latch register 103n is used in the lottery process for transitioning to the advantageous interval, which will be described later, and the 8-bit random number generated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and written in the 15th latch register 103o is described later. The 7-bit random number generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written in the 16th latch register 103p is used in the lottery process for transition to the ART state, which will be described later. The random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are updated in a unique update cycle and update timing and in a unique update order as already described. In this case, the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in the combination lottery process, the lottery process for transition to the advantageous interval, the constant lottery process, and the lottery process for transition to the ART state. , it is possible to independently perform these lottery processes while not synchronizing them with each other.

In addition, the winning lottery process is performed in each game regardless of the game state, the constant lottery process is performed in each game when in the ART state, and the transition lottery process to the advantageous section is performed in each game in the normal section. frequently used. Further, the lottery process for transition to the ART state is highly likely to be performed in the game in which the lottery process for transition to the advantageous section has been performed, and is a lottery process that determines whether or not there is a transition to the ART state. Under such circumstances, by using the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d in each of these lottery processes, the results of these lottery processes are not synchronized while each It becomes possible to strictly perform the lottery process.

On the other hand, the random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and written into the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are uniquely determined for the type of lottery process to be used. Instead, it will be used in one of a plurality of predetermined lottery processes. The number of types of the predetermined plural types of lottery processes is set to a number greater than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The order of use of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is predetermined, and when it is time to execute a predetermined lottery process among a plurality of types of lottery processes, for example, the first shared random number circuit 101a is used, the random number written in the first latch register 103a is used. For example, when the eighth shared random number circuit 101h is used, the random number written in the eighth latch register 103h is used. Random numbers are used. In other words, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are also used in a plurality of types of lottery processes set to a larger number than the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to reduce the number of random number circuits compared to a configuration in which random number circuits are individually set for each of a plurality of types of lottery processing.

In such a configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in a plurality of types of lottery processes, the random numbers are updated in the same way in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l as described above. It is performed periodically and at the same update timing. The random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. As a result, for example, when executing a predetermined lottery process included in a plurality of types of lottery processes, the random number of the first common random number circuit 101a is acquired at the first lottery timing, and the eighth common random number is acquired at the second lottery timing. Even if the random numbers of the circuit 101h are obtained, they can be treated as being updated in a certain manner. On the other hand, the random number updates of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are performed in different update orders, so that they are not completely synchronized. As a result, when a plurality of lottery processes among the plurality of types of lottery processes are executed in the same game, it is possible to prevent the random numbers obtained in the plurality of lottery processes from becoming the same value. . By the way, the plurality of types of lottery processes include a lottery process for transition to the false omen state, a lottery process for transition to the chance state, a lottery process for the number of additional games, a lottery process for transition to loop A, and a lottery process for transition to loop B, which will be described later. This includes lottery processing.

Next, the random number acquisition process executed by the main MPU 72 to acquire each random number will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The random number acquisition process is executed as a common subroutine process each time the main MPU 72 needs to perform various lottery selections.

When the lottery process to be executed this time is the lottery process for a winning combination, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is used for random numbers (step S501: YES). In this case, the numerical value information of the random number is obtained from the 13th latch register 103m in which the random number of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S502).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is the lottery process for moving to the advantageous section, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is used for random numbers (step S503: YES). In this case, the numerical value information of the random number is obtained from the 14th latch register 103n in which the random number of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S504).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is the regular lottery process, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is used for random numbers (step S505: YES). In this case, the numerical value information of the random number is obtained from the fifteenth latch register 103o in which the random number of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c at the time of operation of the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S506).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is the lottery process for transition to the ART state, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is used for random numbers (step S507: YES). In this case, the numerical value information of the random number is obtained from the 16th latch register 103p in which the random number of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the time of operating the start lever 41 for starting the current game is written (step S508).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is none of the combination lottery process, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section, the constant lottery process, and the lottery process to transition to the ART state, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l A random number is used (step S507: NO). In this case, first, 1 is added to the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 (step S509). The random number pointer is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for the random number. can take When the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a is used for the random number, and when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b is used for the random number, When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is used for random numbers. Target (m is an integer of 0 or more).

When the value of the random number pointer after 1 is added exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S510: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S511). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is used in the lottery process within the numerical range of "0" to "11", and when the maximum value of the numerical range is exceeded, the value is reduced to the minimum value. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a are used according to a predetermined order every time they are used for the lottery process. 101l are sequentially changed, and after the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the last order are used, the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the first order are used again.

If a negative determination is made in step S510, or if the processing of step S511 is executed, the random numbers of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the random number pointer values among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are the current random numbers. Numerical information of the random number is obtained from the latch register written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game (step S512). As a result, even when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in the lottery process for the number of types exceeding the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l It is possible to obtain random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each lottery process within the range of numbers of shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

Further, the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is equal to or less than the number of lottery processes simultaneously occurring in one game among the lottery processes using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. It has become. Thus, even if a plurality of lottery processes among the lottery processes to be used occur simultaneously in one game, random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l can be obtained in the plurality of lottery processes. becomes possible.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S601). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the winning lottery process, the random number written in the thirteenth latch register 103m is obtained from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers from "0" to "65535" are generated in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. , the random number written in the thirteenth latch register 103m by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is acquired at the timing of making an affirmative determination.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S602). In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion part 57, turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. , it is possible to set on which winning probability the lottery process of the winning combination is to be executed. "Setting n+1" is more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". Specifically, since the winning probability of the role that triggers the transition to the BB state is higher in "setting n+1" than in "setting n", the player is more likely to win "setting n+1" than "setting n". be advantageous for In addition, there are three types of lottery modes, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode, in which the main MPU 72 has different lottery tables even if the set values are at the same stage. In addition, as a game state, there is a bonus state (BB state and RB state) apart from the state of each lottery mode. In step S602, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current lottery mode, and the current game state is selected.

Taking the case of "setting 3" as an example, lottery tables corresponding to the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-bonus state will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 18, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and set with a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with the first bell winning data and the first complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is surely generated, and in the other cases, the first compensation winning is surely generated.

In the present slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this phenomenon is also known as "dropout"). say). The first to third supplementary prizes, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which no loss occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, 1st Watermelon Winning, 2nd Watermelon Winning, Cherry Winning, 1BB Winning, 2BB Winning, 3BB Winning, 4BB Winning, 1RB Winning and 2RB Winning are stop buttons 42 for the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a winning mode in which a failure may occur depending on the timing of the stop operation of 1 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 18, the index value IV=2 is set with first bell winning data and second complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is surely established, and in the other cases, the second compensation winning is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 18, the index value IV=3 is set with the first bell winning data and the third complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is surely established, and in the other cases, the third compensating winning is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first bell winning data is set for the index value IV=4. When winning with the index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 19, the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. . As shown in FIG. 18, only the second bell winning data is set for the index value IV=17. When a win is made with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 19, the second bell win is established without fail regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. .

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=5. If a win is made with the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=18. If a win is made with the index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=6. If a win is made with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the 3rd BB winning data is set to the index value IV=7. If a win is made with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 19, the 3BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the third BB winning will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the 4th BB winning data is set to the index value IV=8. If a win is made with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 19, the 4th BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 4th BB prize will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV=9. If a win is made with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 19, the first RB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first RB winning will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV=19. If a win is made with the index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 19, the first BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB winning will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV=20. If a win is made with the index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 19, the second BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44, there is a possibility that the 2nd BB winning will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second RB winning data is set to the index value IV=21. If a win is made with the index value IV=21, as shown in FIG. 19, the second RB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44, there is a possibility that the second RB winning will not be established.

Winning data other than the bonus winning data including the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data are erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established. It is not carried over to the game after the game that became. On the other hand, the above-mentioned bonus winning data is stored and held until the corresponding bonus winning is established even in the game following the winning game, except when the main side RAM 74 is cleared. . In this case, in a game in which bonus winning data is carried over, index values IV corresponding to all bonus winning data are excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent bonus winning data from being newly stored in spite of the fact that the bonus winning data has already been stored, and prevents a plurality of bonus winning data from being accumulated and stored. It becomes possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. When winning with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 19, 1st chance replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=22. When winning with index value IV=22, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. do.

As shown in FIG. 18, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to index values IV=11-16. In this case, when the winning is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the reel for which the second stop command is generated) is the middle reel 32M. , and when the third stop (reel where the last stop command is generated) is the right reel 32R, the 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, otherwise , the normal replay winning is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 1RT replay winning is surely established irrespective of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. 1RT replay winning is surely established irrespective of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 1RT replay winning is surely established irrespective of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 1RT replay winning is surely established irrespective of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 1RT replay winning is surely established irrespective of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the winning when the index value IV=3 is about 1/6.6, respectively. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is about 1/13.1. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are approximately 1/437. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, and the winning when the index value IV=13. , the probability of winning when the index value IV=14, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. is. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/16.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=18 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=20 are approximately 1/437. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=21 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=22 is about 1/655.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, 1RT replay winning data is set as the winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data, as already described. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/41. If a win is made with any of the index values IV=11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is established, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode, which is selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode, will be described. 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, the winning data set to index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are shown in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18). ) is the same as In addition, the winning data and the winning probability of each index value IV set in each of the index values IV=23 to 28 in the first RT mode lottery table are the same as those of the index values IV=17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table. is the same as

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24 are set with combinations that enable the awarding of game media, and the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24 are set respectively. Since the winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV=1 to 6 and 17 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table, the types of wins and their wins that make it possible to award game media. winning probability is the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Also, index values IV=7 to 9 and 25 to 27 in the first RT mode lottery table are set with bonus winning data in the same way as index values IV=7 to 9 and 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table. , the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Chance replay winning data is set to index values IV=10 and 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode in the same way as index values IV=10 and 22 in the lottery table for normal mode. It is the same as the lottery table for That is, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 22 are different from those in the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8.

When winning with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. 2RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the 1st RT mode, any one of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. If so, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as winning data with index values IV=17 to 22, in addition to normal replay winning data, first drop replay winning data is set. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is about 1/10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode wins with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is When it is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is generated according to the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. It definitely happens regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=19, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay wins are each. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=20, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=21, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=22, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning prize is each. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is the normal mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning prize is set for index values IV=10 to 22,28. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning role that enables establishment of a replay prize in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) is about 1/ 4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.7. That is, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode, which is selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode, will be described. 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 22, the winning data set to index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are determined in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18). ) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20). Also, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=18 to 23 in the second RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are the index values IV=17 to 22 and the winning probability of each index value IV in the normal mode lottery table. These are the same as the index values IV=23 to 28 in the 2RT mode lottery table.

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19 are set with combinations that enable the awarding of game media, and the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19 are set respectively. The winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV=1 to 6 and 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV=1 to 6 and 1 in the first RT mode lottery table. 23 and 24, the types of wins for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those wins are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode. It's becoming

The index values IV=7-9 and 20-22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the index values IV=7-9 and 19-21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the index values IV in the lottery table for the first RT mode. =7 to 9, 25 to 27, bonus winning data is set, and the winning probability is the same as in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode. Also, the index values IV=10 and 23 in the second RT mode lottery table have a chance similar to the index values IV=10 and 22 in the normal mode lottery table and the index values IV=10 and 28 in the first RT mode lottery table. Replay winning data is set, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 17 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the second drop replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index values IV=11 to 16. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode wins with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 23, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is generated at the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. It definitely happens regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning prize is each. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=14, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is won. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. When the second falling replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=17. The probability of winning with the index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically about 1/5.5. Then, when winning is achieved with this index value IV=17, normal replay winning is established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning prize is set for index values IV=10 to 17,23. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning role (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that enables establishment of a replay prize in the second RT mode is about 1. /3.0. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7 and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the replay probability is the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, and the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. It is good also as a structure which is the same.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 also contains the lottery table for the winning combination (FIG. 17) when the player is in the BB state or RB state. and an internal lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for a combination when a bonus combination has been won but the corresponding bonus prize has not been established. is stored.

In the bonus lottery table, a winning combination that enables establishment of the first bell prize is won at a rate of about 1/1.5. , 32M and 32R, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the winning of the first bell is established. In addition, on the bonus lottery table, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first watermelon prize is won at about 1/6.6, and the winning combination that enables the establishment of the cherry prize is won at about 1/7.8. These first watermelon winning prize and cherry winning prize are not established depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By setting the bonus lottery table as described above, in the BB state or RB state, basically the first bell win is established in each game, and the game medium of "11" is provided. However, the first watermelon winning prize or the cherry winning prize may be established, and if the first watermelon winning prize is established, the game medium of "5" is awarded, and if the cherry winning prize is established, the game medium of "2" is awarded. Granted. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media given since the BB state started reaches the BB end reference number (for example, "350") or more, and the RB state ends. The game ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start becomes equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (for example, "150"). Therefore, the number of games required to end the BB state and RB state varies depending on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination and whether or not there is any omission. Incidentally, the bonus lottery table is common among set values "1" to "6" for varying the advantage of the slot machine 10. FIG.

In the internal lottery table, winning data corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) are set with the winning probability of those index values IV. , and in addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so as to be the total winning probability of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when the bonus combination is internally won, the combination that allows the award of game media and the probability of winning the combination are the same as in the normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as in the normal mode. A bonus combination is not won, and a combination that triggers a transition to the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode is not won.

Here, in any of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" and " There are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values of 1” to “6”. FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values "1" to "6", and FIG. 24(a) is the normal mode. FIG. 24(b) shows the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, and FIG. 24(c) shows the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV=17 to 22 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6." =1 to 16 is the index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the lottery table for the first RT mode, index values IV=23 to 28 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6." IV=1 to 22 is the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 24(c), in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV=18 to 23 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values “1” to “6”. IV=1 to 17 is the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6".

In other words, in any lottery table, the index value IV with the same winning probability between the setting values "1" to "6" is the index value IV in the front range that is consecutively numbered from the index value IV=1. , and the index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values "1" to "6" are from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. It is summarized in the index value IV of the rear range which is a serial number. In this way, the index values IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" are collected in the front range, and the index values with different winning probabilities among the setting values "1" to "6". Setting the index value IV with the same winning probability and the index value IV with different winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" in the design stage of the slot machine 10 by concentrating the IVs in the rear range. and make corrections easier.

In each lottery table, the set values of "1" to "6" have different winning probabilities, and although the index values IV included in the rear range are different, they are set for each of the index values IV included in the rear range. Winning data and winning probability are common among the lottery tables. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV=17 to 22 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. ), the index values IV=23 to 28 are included in the rear range, and in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV=18 to 23 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. included in In this case, the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table are set winning data and The winning probabilities are the same, and the index value IV=18 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=24 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV=19 in the second RT mode lottery table. The set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV=19 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=25 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table With index value IV=20, the set winning data and winning probability are the same, and index value IV=20 in the normal mode lottery table and index value IV=26 in the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV=21 in the second RT mode lottery table has the same set winning data and winning probability, and the index value IV=21 in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV=27 in the second RT mode lottery table and the index value IV=22 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same set winning data and winning probability, and the index value IV=22 in the normal mode lottery table. and index value IV=28 in the first RT mode lottery table and index value IV=23 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and winning probability. As a result, it is possible to make common the types of wins that have different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6" in each lottery table, and to make the same kind of win in each lottery table. It is possible to make the winning probability for each set value the same.

By the way, an index value with only the 2nd bell winning data set, an index value with only the 2nd watermelon winning data set, an index value with only the 1st BB winning data set, and an index with only the 2nd BB winning data set. , the index value in which only the second RB winning data is set, and the winning probability of the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set. It is set to have a tendency to be high. However, it is not limited to this, and if a larger set value is more advantageous to the player than a smaller set value, a larger set value is more successful than a smaller set value for some index values. The configuration may be set so that the probability tends to be low.

As already explained, in each lottery table, the same winning data is set to the index values IV=1 to 10 included in the front range, and the winning probabilities are also the same. As a result, the winning probabilities of winning combinations having the same winning probability among the set values ``1'' to ``6'' in each lottery table and having the same type of winning data are set to be the same. becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the front side range and the rear side range are set as described above, the front side range includes a combination that allows the awarding of game media, a combination that enables replay winning, and a combination that enables bonus winning. In addition to being set, in the rear range, a combination that allows the awarding of game media, a combination that enables replay winning, and a combination that enables bonus winning are set. In other words, the combinations to which game media can be awarded are mixed in the front range and the back range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the back range. Similarly, the combinations that allow replay winning are mixed in the front range and the back range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the back range. Similarly, the combinations that allow bonus prizes are mixed in the front range and the back range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the back range. In that case, there is a risk that the processing configuration for ascertaining the winning combination in various processes after execution of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17) will become complicated.

In the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index values set in the latter half of the front range include the winning data and Since winning data for changing the replay probability is set, the first index value IV in the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, the index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. Become. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. becomes. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set is "22" in the normal mode lottery table, "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "28" in the second RT mode lottery table. 23”. In this case, if an attempt is made to treat different index values IV in spite of the same winning combination in various processes after execution of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), the index value will be It becomes necessary to grasp the current lottery mode in addition to the IV, which may complicate the processing configuration.

in order to eliminate the inconveniences mentioned above. In the present slot machine 10, the offset table 111 is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 111. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, the offset table 111 contains winning number information. Numerical information from "1" to "41" is set in serial numbers as the winning number information. In the offset table 111, each index value IV for the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV for the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV for the second RT mode lottery table range from "1" to "41". It is associated with any winning number information. This correspondence includes a group of minor wins that allow the award of game media, a group of bonus wins that allow the establishment of a bonus prize, and a group of bonus wins that allow the establishment of a replay prize. Each of the groups of replay hands is formed by winning number information which is a sequential number. Also, this association is performed so that even between lottery modes with different winning combinations in which the same type of winning data is set, the information of the same winning number can be handled.

Specifically, the group of winning number information with consecutive numbers from "1" to "8" will be the small win group, and the group of winning number information with consecutive numbers from "9" to "14" will be the bonus. The offset table 111 is set so that a group of win numbers is formed, and a group of winning number information having consecutive numbers after "15" becomes a group of replay wins. In addition, in the group of replay hands, replay hands for which normal replay winning data is not set are aggregated in the winning number information of "15" and "16", and normal replay winning numbers are in the information of winning numbers after "17". The replay combination for which winning data is set is aggregated.

In each lottery table, the index value IV of "1" is set to the first bell winning data and the first supplemental winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "2" is set to the first bell winning data and the second supplemental winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "3" is set to the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set for the index value IV of "4", but the information of the winning number of "4" is set for the index value IV=4 in any lottery table. It is

The index value IV of "17" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "18" in the second RT mode lottery table are the second bell winning data. is set, but the index value IV is set with the winning number information of "5". As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV of "5", but the information of the winning number of "6" is set to the index value IV=5 in any lottery table. It is

The index value IV of "18" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "24" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "19" in the second RT mode lottery table are the second watermelon winning data. is set, but information of the winning number "7" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV of "6". there is In each lottery table, only the 3rd BB winning data is set to the index value IV of "7", but the information of the winning number of "9" is set to the index value IV=7 in any lottery table. ing. In each lottery table, only the 4th BB winning data is set to the index value IV of "8", but the information of the winning number of "10" is set to the index value IV=8 in any lottery table. ing.

The index value IV of "19" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "20" in the second RT mode lottery table are the first BB winning data only. are set, but the information of the winning number "11" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

The index value IV of "20" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "26" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "21" in the second RT mode lottery table are only the second BB winning data. are set, but the information of the winning number "12" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV of "9", but the information of the winning number of "13" is set to the index value IV=9 in any lottery table. ing.

The index value IV of "21" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "27" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "22" in the second RT mode lottery table are only the second RB winning data. are set, but the information of the winning number "14" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

In each lottery table, only the first chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV of "10", but the index value IV=10 does not include the winning number information of "15" in any lottery table. is set.

The index value IV of "22" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "23" in the second RT mode lottery table win the second chance replay. Although only data is set, information of winning number "16" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

The winning numbers after "17" do not share the index value IV in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the types of winning data set in the index values IV associated with the winning numbers after "17" are not common among the lottery tables. Specifically, for the index values IV=11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the 1RT replay winning data are set in the normal mode lottery table, the winning number information of "17" to "22" are set respectively. ing. In addition, in the lottery table for the 1st RT mode, the index values IV=11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the 2nd RT replay winning data are set are set with winning number information of "23" to "28" respectively. In addition, the index values IV=17 to 22 in which the normal replay winning data and the first drop replay winning data are set are set to winning number information of "29" to "34", respectively. In addition, in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV=11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set are set with winning number information of "35" to "40" respectively. In addition, the index value IV=17, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is set with the winning number information of "41".

Since the offset table 111 is provided as described above, the combination that enables the award of game media, the combination that enables replay winning, and the combination that enables bonus winning are mixed in the front range and the back range. In various processes after the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the winning combination, the winning combination can be handled in a state of being aggregated for each winning combination of the same group. In addition, a combination for which different index values IV are set between the respective lottery tables although the same winning data is set is treated as the same information in various processes after the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). becomes possible. Furthermore, when the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, the information of the winning number may be set in the command for transmitting the result. can be suppressed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also stored in the offset table 111 in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. Each index value IV is associated with the winning number information in common. In the bonus lottery table, there are an index value IV set with only the first bell winning data, an index value IV with only the first watermelon winning data set, and an index value IV with only cherry winning data set. However, the index value IV set only with the first bell winning data is associated with the winning number information of "4", and the index value IV with only the first watermelon winning data is set as " The index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with the winning number information of "8". In the case of the internal lottery table, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV, as already described. In addition, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so as to be the total winning probability of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, the index values IV corresponding to the index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table correspond to the winning number information corresponding to those index values IV in the normal mode lottery table. In the second RT mode lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV for which only the normal replay winning data is set is the same as the index value IV=17 for which only the normal replay winning data is set. information is associated.

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), after selecting the lottery table (step S602), the first round flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S603). In the winning lottery process, the index value IV in the front range has the same winning probability between the set values "1" to "6", and the winning probability differs between the set values "1" to "6". A lottery is performed from the index values IV in the front range out of the index values IV in the rear range. In this case, the first round flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current lottery target is the front range.

After that, the first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S604). The target index counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the type of winning combination targeted for the lottery. Also, the first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=1 to 16 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "16", and in the case of the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV= Since 1 to 22 correspond to the front range, the first reference value is "22", and in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV=1 to 17 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "17". ”.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, only three index values IV are set in the bonus lottery table, and all of these index values IV have a winning probability between set values of "1" to "6". Since they are the same, the first reference value is "3". Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the front range is set as the first reference value.

After that, a judgment value DV used for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is set (step S605). In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV set for the current index value IV to be selected by lottery to the current determination value DV. Note that in the initial determination value setting process, the random number obtained in step S601 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV set to the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to create a new value. is a judgment value DV. For example, since the first reference value is "16" in the normal mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV=16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number obtained in step S601. The resulting value is defined as a judgment value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination that is the current lottery target is determined (step S606). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it does not exceed "65535", after subtracting 1 from the value of the target index counter (step S607), it is determined whether or not the value of the target index counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" ( step S608). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S608: NO), the process returns to step S605 to determine whether the winning combination corresponding to the value of the target index counter after updating is correct.

If the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S608: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the bonus state (step S609). Since the bonus lottery table does not set the index value IV in the rear range, if the current status is the bonus state (step S609: YES), it is assumed that no combination has been won in this game. The process proceeds to step S614 as it is.

If the current status is not the bonus state (step S609: NO), it is determined whether or not the first round flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S610). In other words, it is determined whether or not the group of index values IV for which the determination of whether the winning combination has been completed is in the front range. If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S610: YES), after clearing the first round flag to "0" (step S611), the second reference value is set to the target index counter ( step S612). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, the index values IV=17 to 22 correspond to the rear range for the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV=23 to 28 correspond to the rear range for the lottery table for the first RT mode. However, in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV=18 to 23 corresponds to the rear range, so the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. In the case of the bonus lottery table, the second reference value is not set because there is no index value IV included in the rear range. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S605, and the winning combination corresponding to the second reference value is determined. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S610, it is determined that no combination has been won in this game, and the process proceeds to step S614 as it is.

On the other hand, if it exceeds "65535" in step S606, information on the winning number corresponding to the current lottery role is acquired, and winning data corresponding to the current lottery role is acquired. is executed in the main RAM 74 (step S613). FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining winning data.

First, by determining whether or not the first round flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the hand won this time is the index value IV included in the front range ( step S701). If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main side RAM 74 corresponds to the index value IV that won this time. Execute the process.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time has an index value IV that is included in the rear range. When judging the validity of the index value IV included in the rear range, the second reference value is set in the target index counter, and the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range. Therefore, the index value IV of the combination actually won this time does not match the value of the target index counter. Then, the difference between the index value IV of the combination actually won this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that is the target of the lottery this time. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S701, the first reference value of the lottery table that is the object of this lottery is added to the value of the object index counter (step S702). The first reference value added in this case is "16" for the normal mode lottery table, "22" for the first RT mode lottery table, and "17" for the second RT mode lottery table. becomes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, or if the process of step S702 is executed, the offset table 111 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S703). Then, the type of the lottery table that is the lottery target this time and the winning number information corresponding to the current target index counter value are read from the offset table 111, and the winning number information in the current game is read. is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S704). As a matter of course, the winning number information is not stored in the main side RAM 74 when no winning combination is won.

After that, the winning data information included in the winning combination this time is developed in the main side RAM 74 (step S705). In the main side RAM 74, the same number of winning corresponding areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10 is set. Winning data other than various bonus winning data such as 1st BB winning data, 2nd BB winning data, 3rd BB winning data, 4th BB winning data, 1st RB winning data and 2nd RT winning data , and the winning corresponding area corresponding to the winning data not included in the combination won this time is cleared to "0". The value of the winning corresponding area corresponding to various bonus winning data is set to "1" when winning a combination containing the corresponding winning data, and the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 is not executed until the corresponding winning is established. The state in which "1" is set is maintained for as long as possible. The winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or when the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Note that the winning corresponding area corresponding to the winning data other than various bonus winning data is cleared to "0" even when no winning combination is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

After that, a lottery process for reel effects is executed for determining whether or not reel effects are to be executed at the start of the current game. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not any winning number from "8" to "16" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination (step S706). The winning number of "8" corresponds to the cherry winning data, the winning number of "9" corresponds to the 3rd BB winning data, and the winning number of "10" corresponds to the 4th BB winning data, The winning number "11" corresponds to the 1st BB winning data, the winning number "12" corresponds to the 2nd BB winning data, and the winning number "13" corresponds to the 1st RB winning data. , The winning number "14" corresponds to the second RB winning data, the winning number "15" corresponds to the first chance replay winning data, and the winning number "16" corresponds to the second chance replay winning data. corresponds to Of these, the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data correspond to the winning data that triggers the transition to the bonus state, and the cherry winning data, the 1st chance replay winning data and the 2nd chance replay. Winning data corresponds to winning data that can trigger a transition to the ART state or an opportunity to increase the number of games in the ART state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S706, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S707). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for the reel effect, the random number written from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. to get Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S707 is collated with the reel effect table pre-stored in the main ROM 73 to determine whether or not the reel effect execution has been won (step S708). The reel effect table is set so that the probability of winning the execution of the reel effect is 20% for any of the winning numbers "8" to "16". However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be higher or lower than the winning probability, and furthermore, the probability of winning the execution of the reel effect is different according to the winning number of "8" to "16". It is good also as a structure which carries out.

When reel effect execution wins (step S708: YES), the reel effect win flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S709). The reel effect winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the reel effect should be executed at the start of the current game. In the reel performance, a combination of performance symbols (for example, "BAR ” symbols are displayed in a straight line) on the main line ML, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped. As a result, the fact that any of the winning data as described above has been selected in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current winning combination is indicated by It is possible to notify by using motion.

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), if the determination is affirmative in step S609, if the determination is negative in step S610, or if the process of step S613 is executed, stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S614), the effect content determination process is executed (step S615). In the effect content determination processing, a process for determining the general content of the effect to be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the content of the outline, high expectation content, medium expectation content, and low expectation content are set so that the expectation of the occurrence of the bonus state or the ART state gradually decreases in the normal game state. ing. In the determination processing of the content of the performance, the outline of the content of the performance is determined by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section and the result of the lottery processing of the role.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S616). In the transmission process, information corresponding to the general contents determined in the process of determining the contents of the effect, and if the winning combination is selected in the lottery process (Fig. 17) for the current combination, Information of the corresponding winning number and information corresponding to the current lottery mode and the current game state are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. - 特許庁The game start command is a command for making the effect side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started. This is a command to recognize

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the outline of the effect in the current game from the game start command. Then, the effect-side MPU 92, in a manner corresponding to the grasped outline of the effect, displays the details of the effect, the winning number information set in the game start command, the information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and the current status. It is determined based on the information corresponding to the game state of. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

After that, in step S617, the first control process of the game section is executed, in step S618, bonus processing at the time of game start is executed, in step S619, additional processing is executed, and in step S620, notification control processing is executed. to run. Details of these processes will be described later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S409 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the constant speed flag 74c provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S801). The constant speed flag 74c indicates the state after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started rotating, the acceleration period of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has ended and the constant speed rotation has started. This is a flag for identification by the MPU 72 . Although the details will be described later, when the acceleration period of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate and the constant speed rotation starts, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1". ” is set.

When "1" is not set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S801: NO), that is, when it is the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate, or when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate. If the acceleration period for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has not been completed after the start, an acceleration process is executed (step S802). In the acceleration process, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, a predetermined wait period (for example, 4.1 (seconds) has elapsed, a process for starting the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed. In the acceleration process, after the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have started rotating, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are accelerated toward constant speed rotation.

If the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S803). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S803 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (step S804). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S803, and the process of step S803 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S805). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S806 to S812 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S806). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 164 (see FIG. 28) is input. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S807).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S807, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S808). Then, it is determined whether or not the pattern number of the arrival pattern of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is equal to the pattern number of the stop pattern (step S809), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S810). In the reel stop processing, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped are started to be braked in the motor control processing (FIG. 35) to be described later, and the system waits until the braking is completed. After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S811). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S812), and the process returns to step S803.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting processing executed in step S614 of the winning lottery processing (FIG. 17) and the reel control processing (FIG. 27) executed in step S812. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. . In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. do.

When it is determined in step S811 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the rotating flag 74d provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S813), and the main side RAM 74 The constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" (step S814). As already explained, the constant speed flag 74c is set after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started rotating and the acceleration period of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has ended and the constant speed rotation has started. This is a flag for specifying that the main side MPU 72 exists. The rotating flag 74d specifies in the main MPU 72 that the normal rotation stop processing has not been completed for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started rotating. is a flag for

After that, the winning determination process is executed (step S815). In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data developed in the main side RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed. In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S402) so that the replay setting process is executed.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S816). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

<Details of Driving Control of Reels 32L, 32M, 32R>
Here, details of drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described. FIG. 28 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L. The middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R have the same configuration as the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L includes a cylindrical frame member 161 forming a cylindrical basket, and a belt-like belt (not shown in FIG. 28) wound endlessly around its outer peripheral surface. The belt is attached to the cylindrical frame member 161 via a pair of seal portions formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns as identification information are printed at regular intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the strip-shaped belt. A central portion of the cylindrical frame member 161 is attached to the drive shaft of the stepping motor 162 . Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 162 rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 161 rotates about the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L rotates.

The stepping motor 162 is screw-fixed to the side surface of a motor plate 163 arranged in an upright state within the reel unit 31 . A motor plate 163 is provided with a reel index sensor 164 in which a light emitting element 164a and a light receiving element 164b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a radially extending sensor cut bang 165 is screwed to the cylindrical frame member 161 . A leading end portion 165a of the sensor cut bang 165 is bent substantially at a right angle and positioned so as to pass between the elements 164a and 164b of the reel index sensor 164. As shown in FIG. Each time the left reel 32L rotates once, the reel index sensor 164 detects the passage of the leading end 165a of the sensor cut bang 165, and a detection signal is output to the main side MPU 72 each time it is detected. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 162 is set so as to make one rotation by applying an excitation signal of 504 pulses, for example, and progressing by 504 steps, and the rotational position of the stepping motor 162, that is, the rotational position of the left reel 32L, is controlled by the number of steps. be done. On each belt of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of patterns, specifically 21 patterns are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, it takes 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Based on the number of pulses after the detection signal of the reel index sensor 164 is output, it is possible to recognize which pattern is visible through the display window portion 21L, or to display any pattern through the display window portion 21L. It is possible to perform control to make it visible.

29(a) is a connection diagram showing the driving system of the stepping motor 162, and FIG. 29(b) is a diagram showing the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 162. As shown in FIG.

A hybrid (HB) two-phase stepping motor is used as the stepping motor 162 . Note that the stepping motor 162 is not limited to the hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the hybrid stepping motor 162 includes a rotor 171 arranged in the center and a stator 172 having first to fourth poles 173 to 176 arranged around the rotor 171. and The rotor 171 is composed of a front rotor 171a magnetized to N poles and a back rotor 171b magnetized to S poles. It is attached to the rotary shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the back side rotor 171b are positioned between them. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front side rotor 171a and the back side rotor 171b.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the excitation coil L0 and the excitation coil L2 are bifilar-wound around the first pole 173 and the third pole 175, and the end of the winding of the excitation coil L0 and the beginning of the winding of the excitation coil L2 are connected to each other. is connected, and a predetermined DC power source +B (for example, +24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound around the second pole 174 and the fourth pole 176, and the end of the winding of the excitation coil L1 and the beginning of the winding of the excitation coil L3 are connected to each other. Power supply +B is applied.

A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 173 to excite the first pole 173 to the south pole and excite the third pole 175 to the north pole is defined as an A phase. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of 175 to excite the first pole 173 to N pole and excite the third pole 175 to S pole is called a reverse A phase. Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 174 to excite the second pole 174 to the S pole and excite the fourth pole 176 to the N pole is called the B phase. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 176 to excite the second pole 174 to the N pole and excite the fourth pole 176 to the S pole is called a reverse B phase.

An excitation signal for the stepping motor 162 is applied as excitation data to the motor driver 177 shown in FIG. 29(b). This excitation data is stored in the main-side RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. This excitation data determines an excitation phase for the stepping motor 162, and an excitation signal (current) is supplied to the excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 162 is of a one-phase excitation drive system, the rotor 171 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to the A-phase, B-phase, reverse A-phase, and reverse B-phase. It can be driven to rotate. In other words, for example, when the A phase is energized first, the projection of the first pole 173 which is the S pole and the teeth of the rotor 171a on the front side, and the projection of the third pole 175 which is the N pole and the teeth of the rotor 171b on the back side. are facing each other due to their attractive forces, and when the B-phase is energized next, the projection of the second pole 174 that has become the S pole and the teeth of the rotor 171a on the front side, the projection of the fourth pole 176 that has become the N pole and the rotation on the far side When the teeth of the child 171b face each other due to the attraction force, and then the reverse A phase is energized, the protrusion of the first pole 173 that has become the N pole, the tooth of the inner rotor 171b, and the third pole 175 that has become the S pole. and the teeth of the front rotor 171a face each other due to their attractive forces. The protrusions of the curved fourth pole 176 and the teeth of the front rotor 171a face each other due to the attraction force. By energizing in this order, the rotor 171 rotates clockwise in FIG. 29(a).

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate at constant speed and the constant speed period for maintaining the constant speed rotation, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are applied. A 1-2 phase excitation drive is adopted in which phase excitation is alternately performed. An excitation order table exists as a table referred to by the main MPU 72 in order to perform 1-2 phase excitation driving in these acceleration period and constant speed period. The excitation order table is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 at the manufacturing stage of the slot machine 10 . FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the excitation order table.

In the excitation order table, as shown in FIG. 30, excitation order pointers "0" to "7" are set, and the type of excitation phase is set for each excitation order pointer. The excitation order pointer of "0" is set to 1-phase excitation in which phase A is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "1" is set to 2-phase excitation in which both phases A and B are energized. , 1-phase excitation in which the B phase is energized is set in the excitation order pointer of "2", and 2-phase excitation in which both the B phase and the reverse A phase are energized is set in the excitation order pointer of "3". The excitation order pointer of "4" is set to 1-phase excitation in which the reverse A phase is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "5" is set to 2-phase excitation in which both the reverse A phase and the reverse B phase are energized. Excitation is set, the excitation order pointer of "6" is set to 1-phase excitation in which the reverse B phase is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "7" is energized to both the reverse B phase and the A phase. 2-phase excitation is set. When the acceleration period or the constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is continued in a situation where the excitation order pointer is "7", the excitation order pointer to be controlled returns to "0". Drive control is performed by the excitation order pointer. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated once by 504 pulses of the excitation signal. 0.714°.

When using the stepping motor 162 having the above configuration, driving characteristics as shown in FIG. 31 are required.

This drive characteristic can be roughly divided into an acceleration period Ta from when the start lever 41 is operated until the stepping motor 162 starts rotating and reaches a constant constant speed rotation. It is divided into a maintenance period Tb during which the rotation speed is maintained until the stop button 44 is operated, and a stop period Tc during which the motor stops with a predetermined slippage based on the operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

While there is no restriction on the length of the acceleration period Ta, there is a restriction that the sum of the acceleration period Ta and the maintenance period Tb when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated must be 30 seconds or longer. ing. Regarding the stop period Tc, it is also required that the stepping motor 162 be stopped within a maximum of about 190 msec after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated.

Next, the configuration for drive control of the stepping motor 162 will be described.

As already explained, the stepping motor 162 transitions to a state of constant speed rotation after an acceleration period. It is desirable to make a transition to a state of high speed rotation. To this end, the excitation phase of the stepping motor 162 should be switched quickly, but this may lead to loss of synchronism or unstable rotation.

In particular, in the stepping motor 162, when the teeth of the rotor 171 are attracted to the projections of the poles 173 to 176 during the initial excitation, the rotor 171 is initially shaken (microscopic vibration accompanied by reciprocating motion). Occur. Although it differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, for example, about 5 to 6 reciprocating motions of 30 msec occur. Therefore, it is necessary to set the mode of switching the excitation phase during the acceleration period while taking into account such initial rotational fluctuation.

As a method of accelerating the stepping motor 162 while suppressing the influence of the initial rotation fluctuation, it is possible to maintain the initial excitation state of the two-phase excitation to some extent, and then to change the switching interval between the two-phase excitation and the one-phase excitation. A method of gradually shortening the distance can be considered. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the excitation phase is switched at timings as shown in FIG. In this case, after the state set to 2-phase excitation as the initial excitation is held for 130 interrupts (that is, 130 times of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)), it is switched to 1-phase excitation, and the state is changed to 8 interrupts. It is set so that the excitation phase is switched to the two-phase excitation after the excitation is held for a long period of time, and then the switching interval between the excitation phases is gradually shortened. With this configuration, 193.7 msec (=1.49 msec.times.130 interrupts) is set as the initial excitation period, during which the initial rotation fluctuation can be eliminated.

Next, specific processing contents executed by the main side MPU 72 for controlling the driving of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the acceleration process executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The acceleration process is executed at step S802 in the reel control process (FIG. 27).

In the acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not the start setting completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S901). The start setting completion flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been completed. If "1" is not set in the start setting completion flag (step S901: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not a predetermined wait period (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the game (step S902). The value set in the wait counter is decremented by timer subtraction processing in step S208 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is executed.

If the wait period has not elapsed (step S902: NO), the acceleration process is terminated. If the wait period has passed (step S902: YES), it is determined whether or not the reel effect win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S903). As already explained, the reel effect winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the reel effect should be executed at the start of the current game.

If the reel effect win flag is not set to "1" (step S903: NO), the acceleration counter corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set to "25" (steps S904 to S906). Then, a normal acceleration table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S907).

Each acceleration counter is provided in the main side RAM 74, and the main side MPU 72, based on the numerical information of each acceleration counter, determines the acceleration table when it is time to switch the excitation phase during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. to grasp which excitation sequence data for acceleration should be referred to. Further, the normal acceleration table is a table that defines switching timings of excitation phases for accelerating the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a situation where no reel performance is executed, and types of excitation phases at each switching timings. Specifically, the content is as shown in FIG. For example, if the acceleration counter value is "25", the switching interval and excitation phase type determined as the first excitation order in the normal acceleration table shown in FIG. , the switching interval and the type of excitation phase determined as the 11th excitation order in the normal acceleration table shown in FIG. 32 are used. The reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the same time and simultaneously or Approximately at the same time, the acceleration is completed and the constant speed state is reached.

If the reel effect winning flag is set to "1" (step S903: YES), the acceleration counter corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set to "150" (steps S908 to S910). Then, the performance drive table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S911). The performance drive table is a table that defines the switching timings of the excitation phases for accelerating and stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so as to execute the reel performances, and the types of excitation phases at each switching timing. . The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R simultaneously start rotating and stop by referring to the performance driving table and performing drive control corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a state in which a combination of performance symbols (for example, a combination of symbols in which "BAR" symbols are arranged in a straight line) is stopped and displayed on the main line ML without requiring any operation. .

When the process of step S907 or step S911 is performed, "1" is set to the start setting completed flag of the main RAM 74 (step S912). Also, in order to ensure a minimum wait period from when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating in the current game to when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating in the next game. Then, information of the wait period (for example, 4.1 seconds) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 (step S913). After that, the rotating flag 74d of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S914). When the rotating flag 74d is set to "1", a process for driving and controlling the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed in the stepping motor control process in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). .

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing stepping motor control processing. Note that the stepping motor control process is executed at step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When the rotating flag 74d of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1001: YES), the controlled object counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "3" (step S1002). The controlled object counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R the processes of steps S1003 to S1007 are to be executed. When the value of the controlled object counter is "3", the left reel 32L becomes the controlled object, and when the value of the controlled object counter is "2", the middle reel 32M becomes the controlled object, and the value of the controlled object counter becomes If it is "1", the right reel 32R becomes the control target.

After that, the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the control object counter are grasped based on the detection result of the reel index sensor 164 and the number of times the excitation data is output (step S1003). Also, motor control processing is executed (step S1004). In the motor control process, a process of generating excitation data for controlling the rotation of the stepping motor 162 is performed. Then, the generated excitation data is output in a state of being associated with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the controlled object counter (step S1005). As a result, the excitation data for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the controlled object counter is supplied to the motor driver 177. FIG. As a result, the stepping motors 162 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current values of the counters to be controlled are immediately energized to the excitation phase specified by the excitation data, and the rotor 171 is excited. It will happen. If the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the controlled object counter has already been stopped, no new excitation data is set, and the process of step S1005 is executed. not.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the controlled object counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1006), and it is determined whether or not the value of the controlled object counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1007). If the value of the controlled object counter is not "0" (step S1007: NO), the processing of steps S1003 to S1007 is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the new value of the controlled object counter. do. On the other hand, if the value of the controlled object counter is "0" (step S1007: YES), this stepping motor control process ends.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing motor control processing in step S1004.

First, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time are being braked (step S1101). When the processing of step S810 in the reel control processing (FIG. 27) is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time, and the braking of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not completed. , an affirmative determination is made in step S1101.

When a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled this time is 1 or more (step S1102). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the value of the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled this time is 1 or more on condition that the value of the switching interval counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1103). If the value of the switching interval counter is "0" (step S1104: YES), it means that it is time to switch the excitation phase, so the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, processing for setting a switching interval counter is executed. In the setting process, numerical information is set in the switching interval counter by referring to the currently read acceleration table out of the normal acceleration table and the effect drive table. Specifically for the normal acceleration table, if the value of the acceleration counter is "25", it means that it is the beginning of the acceleration period. In this case, the switching interval counters corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled are set to "130" corresponding to the 130 interrupt, which is the switching interval set in the excitation order for the first acceleration in the normal acceleration table. set. Further, when the value of the acceleration counter is "24", the excitation order for the second acceleration in the normal acceleration table is targeted. In this case, the switching interval counters corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled are set to "8" corresponding to the 8 interrupt, which is the switching interval set in the excitation order for the second acceleration. do.

After that, update processing of the excitation order pointer is executed (step S1106). Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and when the numerical information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of "7" of the excitation order pointer, the numerical information is cleared to "0". do. After that, the excitation data set in the excitation order table (FIG. 30) corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read, and the read excitation data is applied to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled this time. The current excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S1107).

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time (step S1108). As a result, when the excitation phases of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled this time are to be switched next time, switching interval data corresponding to the value of the acceleration counter after this subtraction is set.

When the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled this time is "0" (step S1102: NO), whether or not the constant speed flag 74c of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1109). If the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" (step S1109: YES), it means that it is a constant speed period during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed. (step S1110). In the constant-speed processing, processing is executed to alternately switch between 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation for each interrupt.

After the constant speed process is executed in step S1110, it is determined whether or not it is time to start braking the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled this time (step S1111). Specifically, when the process of step S810 in the reel control process (FIG. 27) is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the current control targets, the braking setting process is performed assuming that it is time to start braking. Execute (step S1112). In the braking setting process, the stop table is read from the main ROM 73, and control according to the stop table is started. Specifically, excitation data for four-phase excitation is stored in the main RAM 74 . By executing the braking setting process, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101 in the next motor control process to be controlled this time, and the braking process is executed (step S1113). As a result, the four-phase excitation is continued for 100 interruptions according to the stop table, and when the four-phase excitation for the 100 interruptions is completed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled are controlled. finish.

Returning to the description of the acceleration process (FIG. 33), if the determination in step S901 is affirmative or if the process in step S914 is executed, the values of the acceleration counters corresponding to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are "0". It is determined whether or not (step S915). When the values of the acceleration counters corresponding to all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are "0", it means that the acceleration period has ended for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, if the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S916: YES), re-acceleration processing during reel effect is executed (step S917). The details of the re-acceleration process will be described later. On the other hand, if the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S916: NO), the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S918), The start setting completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S919).

By setting the constant speed flag 74c to "1", the reel control process (FIG. 27) makes an affirmative determination in step S801 as already described, thereby executing the processes after step S803. That is, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R complete the acceleration period and start rotating at constant speed, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated. Based on the operation of 44, stop control of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. In the situation where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the main MPU 72 has lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command has not yet been issued. is lit to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be issued.

Here, in the main process (FIG. 10) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, as already described, the all clear process (step S104) and the clear process other than the set values (step S113) are performed. is not executed and the state of the main RAM 74 is normal (steps S108, S110 and S111: YES), before returning to the address before power-off, reel control A clearing process (step S116) is executed and a return address adjusting process (step S117) is executed.

In the reel control clearing process (step S116), the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting completed flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0". In the return address adjusting process (step S117), if the return address is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, even if the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped while at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped. When the process is resumed and the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S119), the normal process can be started from the start address of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Since the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting completion flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0", the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped. Even if the timing is after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started according to the normal acceleration table.

FIG. 36 is a time chart showing the flow of drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the supply of operating power is restarted after being stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. . 36(a) shows the period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(b) shows the state of the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74, and FIG. FIG. 36(d) shows the period during which the main processing is executed, FIG. 36(d) shows the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and FIG. (f) indicates the operation effective period of the stop buttons 42-44.

When the game start operation is performed at the timing t1 when operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to accelerate as shown in FIG. By completing the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the timing of t2, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. Constant-speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated at the timing t2.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped. Therefore, at the timing t3, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating as shown in FIG. 36(e). In this case, since the storage state of the information in the main RAM 74 is maintained by the backup power, the state where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. maintained.

After that, at the timing of t4, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed as shown in FIG. 36(a). At the timing of t4, main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36(c). In this case, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(b).

After that, at the timing of t5, the execution of the main process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72 is terminated as shown in FIG. 36(c). In the main process (FIG. 10), neither the all-clearing process (step S104) nor the clearing process (step S113) other than the set values is executed, and the state of the main-side RAM 74 was normal (step S108, steps S110 and S111: YES), the address is returned to the address before the power was cut off. is executed (step S117). Therefore, at the timing t5, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 36(b). Further, at the timing of t5, the normal processing (FIG. 13) is resumed from the start address of the reel control processing (FIG. 27). Therefore, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 36(d), and the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed at the timing t6. ), the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate at a constant speed as shown in FIG. 36(e). Further, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated at the timing of t6.

If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the reel control clearing process (step S116) and the return address adjusting process (step S117) are executed. If not, after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the processing of addresses after the start address in the reel control processing (FIG. 27) is executed, while actually the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A situation occurs in which the rotation of is not performed normally, and the progress of the game is hindered. In particular, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, and the above event occurs, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will rotate normally. The stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is effectively accepted in spite of the fact that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotating normally, and the stop control may be executed. . On the other hand, by executing the reel control clearing process (step S116) and the return address adjustment process (step S117) as described above, the timing at which the supply of the operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped is adjusted. Even after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is invalidated. In this situation, it is possible to start accelerating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the normal acceleration table.

<Regarding re-acceleration processing during reel production>
Next, the re-accelerating process at the time of the reel effect executed in step S917 of the accelerating process (FIG. 33) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the re-acceleration process at the time of the reel effect is performed when the reel effect winning flag is set to "1" and the constant speed flag is not set to "1", and the value of all the acceleration counters is "0". ' is executed if the situation is Therefore, even if the reel effect winning flag is set to "1" and the constant speed flag is not set to "1", if any one acceleration counter value is 1 or more, the reel The re-accelerating process during the performance is not executed, and when the values of all the acceleration counters become "0" after that, the re-accelerating process during the reel performance is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the start target counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1201). The start target counter determines whether or not there are any reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which execution of the re-acceleration process during the reel presentation is not completed, and whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be subjected to the re-acceleration process during the reel presentation exist. is a counter for specifying the type of the main MPU 72 . If the value of the counter to be started is "0" (step S1201: NO), the counter to be started is set to "3" (step S1202).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, or if the process of step S1202 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203). In the reel performance, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and displayed on the main line ML without requiring a stop operation after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. rotation is stopped. After the end of the reel effect, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in order to enable normal game play by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in response to the stop operation of the stop buttons 42-44. start again. In this case, when restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate one by one in a predetermined order (specifically, the order of the left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R). is started, and after the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and the rotation speed is constant, the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started to rotate. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a waiting period when the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R ends, and if the waiting period is generated, how long the waiting period should be. A lottery process for this is executed, and when it is determined that a waiting period will occur, the rotation of the next reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started when the determined waiting period has passed. By adopting a configuration in which a waiting period can occur in this manner, it is possible to prevent deviation from occurring in the rotation positions of symbols when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated again after execution of the reel performance. Become. The standby counter is a counter for measuring the standby period, and is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the measurement of the standby period is in progress.

If the value of the standby counter is "0" (step S1203: NO), lottery processing for the standby period after step S1204 is executed. Specifically, first, the standby period table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1204). 0 seconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.3 seconds, 0.4 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 0.6 seconds and 0.7 seconds are set in the waiting period table. have the same probability of winning. In this case, 0 seconds corresponds to non-occurrence of the waiting period, and 0.1 seconds to 0.7 seconds correspond to the occurrence of the waiting period.

Thereafter, acquisition processing from the random number counter is executed (step S1205). In the acquisition process, the random number is acquired not from the random number circuit group 100 but from the random number counter provided in the main RAM 74 . The random number counter is configured such that the numerical value is updated at relatively short intervals, and when the updated numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is updated to the minimum value. Specifically, the numerical value is updated each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed. Also, the time required for one cycle of updating the random number of the random number counter is equivalent to 160 interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). This time is shorter than the acceleration period when one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is accelerated using a normal acceleration table (FIG. 32).

Thereafter, the random number obtained in step S1205 is collated with the waiting period table read out in step S1204 to determine whether or not the waiting period has occurred (step S1206). If the waiting period does not occur, that is, if 0 second is selected in the waiting period lottery process (step S1206: NO), the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, In order to start the acceleration of 32R, the processing after step S1210 is executed. If the waiting period is selected (step S1206: YES), the waiting period selected in the waiting period lottery process is set in the waiting counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1207). As a result, the measurement of the waiting period for waiting for the start of acceleration of one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for starting re-rotation is started.

When the value of the standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203: YES), the value of the standby counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1208). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1209). When the value of the standby counter is 1 or more (step S1209: YES), the re-acceleration process at the time of this reel effect is terminated as it is.

If the value of the standby counter is "0" and an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, or if 0 second is selected in the waiting period lottery process (step S1206: NO), the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, "25" is set in the acceleration counter corresponding to one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are to start re-rotation. Then, a normal acceleration table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1211). If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets for starting re-rotation this time are second or later in the order of starting re-rotation, the left reel 32L that is the target for starting re-rotation first is Since the normal acceleration table has already been read at the start of re-rotation, the normal acceleration table is not read again. The normal acceleration table is the same as the normal acceleration table read in step S907 in the acceleration process (FIG. 33), and specifically has the table contents shown in FIG.

By executing the processes of steps S1210 and S1211, the process of step S917 is not executed by making a negative determination in step S915 in the next acceleration process (FIG. 33). In addition, in the motor control processing (FIG. 35) of step S1004 in the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 34), when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to start re-rotation this time become the control targets, the process proceeds to step S1102. By making an affirmative determination with , a process for accelerating according to a normal acceleration table is executed. As a result, the one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the object to start re-rotation this time, is accelerated according to the normal acceleration table.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the start target counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the start target counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1213). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, it means that the processing for starting the re-rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been completed, so the reel effect winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". (Step S1214).

Next, how the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are re-rotated after the reel effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38(a) shows the timing of the random number update in the random number counter of the main side RAM 74, FIG. 38(b) shows the execution period of the reel effect, and FIG. 38(c) shows the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. FIG. 38(d) shows the acceleration period of the left reel 32L when re-rotation is performed, and FIG. 38(e) shows the acceleration period after the re-rotation is completed. shows a constant speed period in which the left reel 32L rotates at a constant speed, FIG. 38(f) shows an acceleration period of the middle reel 32M when re-rotation is performed, and FIG. 38(g) shows the end of the acceleration period in re-rotation FIG. 38(h) shows the acceleration period of the right reel 32R when re-rotation is performed, and FIG. 38(i) shows the acceleration period in re-rotation. , the constant speed period in which the right reel 32R rotates at a constant speed after the end of .

As shown in FIG. 38(b), a reel effect is executed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the timing of t1. Then, at the timing of t2, the reel effect ends and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped.

At the timing t2, the left reel 32L becomes a target to start re-spin, but the lottery process for the waiting period wins the occurrence of the waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the start of re-rotation of the left reel 32L is awaited from timing t2 to timing t3. Then, at the timing of t3, the left reel 32L starts to rotate again as shown in FIG. 32(d). In other words, the rotation of the left reel 32L is started and accelerated using a normal acceleration table.

After that, when the acceleration period of the left reel 32L ends as shown in FIG. 32(d) at a timing t4, the left reel 32L starts rotating at a constant speed as shown in FIG. 32(e). Since the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are not rotating at a constant speed at this timing, the constant speed flag 74c of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1", and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. not.

At the timing of t4, the middle reel 32M becomes an object to start re-spin, but the lottery process for the waiting period results in a win for the waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the start of re-rotation of the middle reel 32M is awaited from timing t4 to timing t5. Then, at the timing of t5, the middle reel 32M starts to rotate again as shown in FIG. 32(f). That is, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is started and accelerated using a normal acceleration table.

After that, at timing t6, the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M ends as shown in FIG. 32(f), and the middle reel 32M starts rotating at a constant speed as shown in FIG. 32(g). Since the right reel 32R is not rotating at a constant speed at this timing, the constant speed flag 74c of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not validated.

At the timing of t6, the right reel 32R becomes a target to start re-spin, but the lottery process for the waiting period results in a win for the waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the start of re-rotation of the right reel 32R is awaited from timing t6 to timing t7. Then, at the timing of t7, the right reel 32R starts to rotate again as shown in FIG. 32(h). That is, the rotation of the right reel 32R is started and accelerated using a normal acceleration table.

After that, when the acceleration period of the right reel 32R ends as shown in FIG. 32(h) at the timing t8, the right reel 32R starts rotating at a constant speed as shown in FIG. 32(i). At this timing, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at a constant speed, so the constant speed flag 74c of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. .

Here, in the period T required for the random number counter used in the lottery process in the standby period to update the random number once, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated using a normal acceleration table. This period is shorter than the acceleration period (timing t3 to timing t4, timing t5 to timing t6, timing t7 to timing t8). Specifically, the period required for the random number counter to update the random number once is 160 interrupts in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). The acceleration period during which acceleration is performed using a normal acceleration table is 213 interrupts. As a result, in a configuration in which one random number counter of the main side RAM 74 is also used to determine the waiting period for starting the re-rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R After obtaining a random number from the random number counter to determine the waiting period for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the next order, the random number in the random number counter is updated one or more times. Therefore, it is possible to independently perform lottery processing during the standby period for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals that exist in the slot machine 10. FIG.

In this slot machine 10, the game states are the normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, false portent state ST5, main portent state ST6, chance state ST7, and preparation state. ST8 and ART state ST9 exist. These game states ST1 to ST9 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is stayed by executing the process of clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S104) or the process of clearing the values other than the set values (step S113). Further, when the transition to the ready state ST8 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, when the transition to the ready state ST8 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, and when the false precursor state ST5 ends, chance If the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the state ST7 ends, or if the ART state ST9 ends without being triggered by the transition to the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4, the game state changes to the normal game state ST1. becomes. The normal game state ST1 is a game state with a lower advantage than the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, ready state ST8 and ART state ST9 in terms of the expected value of the game medium given in one game. The advantages are substantially the same as those of the portent state ST5, the main portent state ST6, and the chance state ST7. Also, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. When the processing for clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S104) or the processing for clearing the values other than the set values (step S113) is executed, the normal game state ST1 is established and the normal mode is entered.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a game state in which the game stays when a bonus winning corresponding to any bonus winning data is not established in a game in which any bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data. It is a game state that ends when is established. In the internal bonus state ST2, the internal lottery table is referenced in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) as already described. In this case, since the internal lottery table does not set a combination (that is, index value IV) for shifting the lottery mode, the lottery mode does not shift in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is referred to, it can be said that the bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained in the normal mode. In addition, without being limited to this, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be configured to be higher than in the normal mode, for example, may be configured to be the same as the replay probability in the first RT mode, or in the second RT mode. The configuration may be the same as the replay probability, the configuration may be the replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, the configuration may be the replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, A configuration may be adopted in which the replay probability is higher than in the second RT mode. Also, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than in the normal mode.

The contents of the BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 have already been explained. In the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4, no transition to the lottery mode occurs.

The false portent state ST5 stays in the normal game state ST1 by winning a transfer lottery process to the false portent state ST5. The number of games to be continued in the false portent state ST5 is determined by lottery within the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability of the short continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of the long continuous game number. The false portent state ST5 continues for the determined number of continuous games unless a bonus combination is won, a transition to the main portent state ST6, and a transition to the chance state ST7 are not performed on the way.

In the false portent state ST5, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high degree of expectation for the transition to the ART state ST9 is likely to be executed. Also, in the false portent state ST5, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game in the false portent state ST5, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect is displayed to make the player recognize that the transition to the ART state ST9 will not occur in the final game. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, and the false portent state ST5 can stay in any of these lottery modes.

This portent state ST6 stays in the normal game state ST1 or the false portent state ST5 by winning in the transition lottery process to the main portent state ST6, and when the present portent state ST6 ends, the ART state ST9 is entered. It shifts to the preparatory state ST8, which is the state prior to transition. In addition, when a bonus combination is won in the course of this precursor state ST6, this precursor state ST6 is terminated, but after the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is terminated, the game shifts to a preparation state ST8. The number of games to be continued in this precursor state ST6 is determined by lottery within the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability of the long continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of the short continuous game number. Further, the expected value of the number of continuous games selected in the genuine precursor state ST6 is the number of games longer than the expected value of the number of continuous games selected in the false precursor state ST5.

In this portent state ST6, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is likely to be executed. The effect executed in this case is a effect that can be executed even in the false portent state ST5, but the effect with a higher degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed in the present portent state ST6 than in the false portent state ST5. easy. In addition, in this portent state ST6, a flashier effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of this precursor state ST6, an effect in which the same character is displayed in a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect is displayed for making the player aware that the transition to the ART state ST9 will occur in the final game. Since the false portent state ST5 and the main portent state ST6 exist as described above, when portent effects corresponding to these portent states ST5 and ST6 are executed, the player shifts to the ART state ST9. will be expected. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but in the present precursor state ST6, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. It should be noted that the number of games to be continued in this portent state ST6 may be fixed to a predetermined number of games, such as ten games.

The chance state ST7 stays by winning a transition lottery process to the chance state ST7 in the normal game state ST1 or the false portent state ST5. Chance state ST7 is a game state that continues over 5 games, and if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for a role is a predetermined lottery result, the winning probability corresponding to the lottery result is used to move to ART state ST9. Execute the transfer lottery process. Then, transition to the ART state ST9 When winning is made, the game shifts to the preparation state ST8, which is the state prior to the transition to the ART state ST9. In this case, in the event that transition is won in the lottery process for transition to ART state ST9, even if the number of continuing games in chance state ST7 is not all consumed, the game next to the game in which transition is won is prepared. A transition to state ST8 occurs. Further, when the winning of the bonus combination occurs during the chance state ST7, the chance state ST7 ends.

In the chance state ST7, an effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is executed as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63. FIG. Then, in the game in which the transition lottery is won in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, an effect indicating that the transition is won is executed. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the chance state ST7 can stay in any of these lottery modes. It should be noted that the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 may be determined by lottery from a plurality of types of game numbers.

The preparation state ST8 is a game state in which the player stays before shifting to the ART state ST9, and can shift from the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, main precursor state ST6, and chance state ST7. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but in the preparation state ST8, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In the preparation state ST8, when winning numbers of "1" to "3" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium of "11" is provided. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the preparation state ST8. In addition, in the preparation state ST8, when winning numbers of "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the 1st replay winning prize is notified, and "23" to When the winning number "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the 2nd replay prize is notified, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning prize is notified. In the preparation state ST8, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, whereby the game state shifts to the ART state ST9. Although the lottery mode may shift to the preparation state ST8 in a situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, in this case the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode, and then shifts to the second RT mode. If so, it shifts to ART state ST9.

The ART state ST9 is a game state that is shifted to when the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST8 as described above. The ART state ST9 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 becomes "0". In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Further, when a bonus win is won in the middle of ART state ST9, the game moves to bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3 or RB state ST4. In this case, after the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 ends, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8, and finally returns to the ART state ST9.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the ART state ST9. In the ART state ST9, when winning numbers "1" to "3" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium of "11" is provided. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART state ST9, when winning numbers of "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the 1RT replay winning prize is notified, and "23" to When the winning number "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the 2nd replay prize is notified, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid establishment of the first fall replay prize is notified, and if the winning numbers "35" to "40" are set, the second fall replay prize is set. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of . As a result, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode in the ART state ST9. The second RT mode is a mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. That is, the ART state ST9 is a game state in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified, and basically a game state in which the replay probability is maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net addition of game media in the ART state ST9. Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST9, the ART state ST9 is maintained and the ART state is not the second RT mode. The number of remaining continuous games in ST9 is subtracted.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST9 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST9. A normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the setting values "1" to "6", the lottery modes of the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode, various game states ST1 to ST9, and There are game sections of normal section SC1 and advantageous section SC2.

The normal section SC1 refers to reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established differs according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stop order is not reported, and the probability that the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST9, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is met is lower than in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST9 are not satisfied in the normal section SC1. When the processing for clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S104) or the processing for clearing values other than the set values (step S113) is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are set to the normal section SC1. Further, when the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed in the advantageous section SC2, it becomes the normal section SC1.

The advantageous section SC2 is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is won. This section corresponds to at least one of the section in which the stop order is notified and the section in which the probability of transition to the ART state ST9, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enable the establishment of the winning with the largest number of game media among the types of winnings included in the combinations with different winnings to be established according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is reliably continued until the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R is executed at least once. Specifically, in the advantageous section SC2, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set with winning numbers "1" to "3" in the lottery process (Fig. 17) for the winning combination, and enable establishment of the first bell prize. is reliably continued until the notification of the stop order of is executed at least once. In addition, the minimum termination condition is satisfied when the notification of the stop order is executed at least once, and the minimum termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether the first bell win is actually established. do. Then, when the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous interval SC2 is set to the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous interval SC2 is set, and the number of continuous games of the advantageous interval SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. It continues until one of the conditions of reaching is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 39, the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4 can be stayed in both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the false precursor state ST5, the actual precursor state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 do not stay in the normal section SC1, but stay only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables setting of the game states ST1 to ST9 and the game sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The first control process for the game section is executed at step S617 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). The process of step S617 is executed after the determination of whether the winning combination is correct or not at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the internal bonus state ST2, the bonus states ST3, ST4, the ready state ST8, or the ART state ST9 (step S1301). If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the processing from step S1302 is executed.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The advantageous section flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the advantageous section SC2. The normal section SC1 is when the section flag value is "0".

If the game section is the normal section SC1 (step S1302: NO), any winning number of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this combination. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S1303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, a lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the advantage transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S1304). In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the advantageous section SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is common regardless of the setting values "1" to "6". The fact that the table is common regardless of the setting value applies to all the lottery processes other than the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). Also, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S1305). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for transition to the advantageous section SC2, the random number written in the fourteenth latch register 103n is obtained from the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers from "0" to "65535" are generated in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. , the random number written in the fourteenth latch register 103n by the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is acquired at the timing of making an affirmative determination. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S1305 with the advantageous transition table read out in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the transition to the advantageous section SC2 has been won (step S1306).

If the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won (step S1306: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the advantageous continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Then, the unnotified flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1307). The advantageous continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games continuously played in the advantageous section SC2. The unreported flag is the reel 32L on which winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) after shifting to the advantageous section SC2, and which enables establishment of the first bell winning. This is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R has already occurred.

As already explained, the first control process for the game section is executed at the start of the game. In this case, when the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 results in winning, the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control processing of the game section. As a result, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs at the start of the game in which the player wins the transition to the advantageous section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the next game of the game in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won, and the game in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won. A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the game two or more games later.

After setting the transition to the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S1308). As a result, the advantageous section display section 67 starts to notify that it is the advantageous section SC2.

The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified by the advantageous section SC2. Here, the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41 . Note that the notification control process is executed at step S620 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). The processing of this step S620 is executed after the determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In a situation where the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), a winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). If so (step S1402: YES), either the condition that the game state is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 or that the non-notification flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" is established. If so (step S1403 or step S1404: YES), a process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is executed.

Specifically, first, stop order recognition processing for the first bell winning is executed (step S1405). In the stop order grasping process, the stop order information of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the combined display section 66 so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the combined display section 66 (step S1406). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. After that, a bell winning command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1407). Information is set in the bell winning command so that the production side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning in this game.

After that, the unnotified flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1408). In this case, if the value of the non-notification flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the non-notification flag is "1", it is changed to "0". As a result, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to specify that the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the first bell winning, has already been announced in the current advantageous section SC2.

In the notification control process, if any winning number of "17" to "28" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S1409: YES), the game state is the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (step S1410: YES), a process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is executed.

Specifically, first, stop order grasping processing for promotion replay is executed (step S1411). In the stop order grasping process, the stop order information of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the combined display section 66 so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the combined display section 66 (step S1412). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. After that, a promotion replay command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1413). Information is set in the promotion replay command so that the MPU 92 on the production side can specify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the 1st replay winning prize or the 2nd RT replay winning prize in this game. be done.

In the notification control process, when any winning number from "29" to "40" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S1414: YES), it is notified that the game state is the ART state ST9. As a condition (step S1415: YES), a process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of the first falling replay winning prize or the second falling replay winning prize is executed.

Specifically, first, stop order grasping processing for avoiding fall replay is executed (step S1416). In the stopping order grasping process, information on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid establishment of the first falling replay winning prize or the second falling replay winning prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the combined display section 66 so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the combined display section 66 (step S1417). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. After that, a fall replay avoidance command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1418). The fall replay avoidance command allows the MPU 92 on the production side to specify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize in this game. information is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, if any winning number of "29" to "34" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) in the case where the game state is the preparation state ST8, the first A process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of a falling replay prize is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the preparation state ST8, even if any winning number from "35" to "40" is set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), the establishment of the second fall replay winning prize. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that allows avoidance is not reported. Since the condition for shifting from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 is that the second RT replay prize is established, when the transition to the preparation state ST8 occurs in the second RT mode, establishment of the second fall replay prize is not avoided. By doing so, it is possible to provide an opportunity to once fall to the first RT mode and establish a second RT replay winning prize.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect-side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

When a bell winning command, promotion replay command, or fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1501: YES), an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop order command received this time. is set on the image display device 63 (step S1502). However, at this timing, the image display device 63 does not display the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set to the counter for measurement provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1503). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate to constant speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 milliseconds, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started.

In the notification processing, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect-side RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1504: YES), notification start processing is executed (step S1505). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1502. As a result, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a). This display on the image display device 63 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the current game.

In the case of the above configuration, after the timing at which notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the shared display unit 66 whose display is directly controlled by the main side MPU 72, directly by the effect side MPU 92 A notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the image display device 63 whose display is controlled. As a result, when the image display device 63 is performing the notification regarding the winning combination, the combination display unit 66 is assuredly performing the notification regarding the winning combination, and the reels being performed on the image display device 63. When confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is due to fraud by using the display contents of the combined display section 66, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing. It becomes possible.

The notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, it is not limited to this, and after the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 is completed, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 may be configured such that the notification corresponding to is terminated, or this order may be reversed.

Returning to the description of the first control process for the game section (FIG. 40), if the advantageous section flag is set to "1" in the game prior to the current game (step S1302: YES), or if the current game When the advantageous interval flag is set to "1" (step S1307), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the chance state ST7 (step S1309). If it is the chance state ST7 (step S1309: YES), the chance state processing is executed (step S1310). The chance state processing will be described later.

If it is not the chance state ST7 (step S1309: NO), is any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for this winning combination? It is determined whether or not (step S1311). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, on condition that the current gaming state is not the main precursor state ST6 (step S1312: NO), the transition lottery process for the main precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the At least one transition lottery process among the transition lottery processes for the false portent state is executed.

In detail, first, the transition lottery process for this precursor state will be described. In the transition lottery process, first, the precursor transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1313). In this case, this portent transition table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of being selected to transition to the main portent state ST6. Also, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S1314). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In this precursor state transition lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S1314 is collated with the main portent transition table read out in step S1313 to determine whether or not the transition to the main portent state ST6 has been won (step S1315).

Transition to the main portent state ST6 When winning is made (step S1315: YES), the main porter winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1316). This omen winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the main omen state ST6 has been won at the start of the current game, and "1" is set to this omen winning flag. If so, a process for transitioning to this precursor state ST6 is executed at the end of the game. In other words, the game state is shifted to the present precursor state ST6 in the next game of the game in which the player wins the transition to the present precursor state ST6.

If the transition to the present portent state ST6 is not won (step S1315: NO), a lottery process for transition to the chance state is executed (step S1317). Details of the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described later. After that, it is determined whether or not the current game has been won to shift to the chance state ST7, or whether or not the current game state is the false portent state ST5 (step S1318). If a negative determination is made in step S1318, a transition lottery process for the false portent state is executed (step S1319).

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the transition lottery process for false portent conditions. In the transition lottery process, first, the false portent transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1601). In this case, the false portent transition table is set so that a winning number with a higher winning probability has a higher probability of winning a transition to the false portent state ST5. Also, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S1602). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the false portent state ST5, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is changed to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the written random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number acquired in step S1602 is collated with the false portent transition table read out in step S1601 to determine whether or not the transition to the false portent state ST5 has been won (step S1603).

Transition to false portent state ST5 If the winning is made (step S1603: YES), the false portent winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1604). The false omen winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the false omen state ST5 has been won at the start of the current game, and "1" is set in the false omen winning flag. If so, a process for transitioning to the false portent state ST5 is executed at the end of the game. In other words, the game state shifts to the false portent state ST5 in the next game of the game in which the winning game is shifted to the false portent state ST5.

By executing each of the transition lottery processes as described above, in the case of the actual portent state ST6 or the chance state ST7, the transition lottery process for the false portent state, the transition lottery process for the actual portent state, and the transition lottery process for the chance state. None of the transition lottery processes are executed. This makes it possible to prevent the false portent state ST5, the actual portent state ST6, or the chance state ST7 from being newly set in a situation where the actual portent state ST6 or the chance state ST7 has already started.

On the other hand, even if it is the false portent state ST5, the shift lottery processing for this portent state and the transition lottery processing for the chance state are executed. As a result, it becomes possible to give priority to the new transition to the true precursor state ST6 or the chance state ST7 leading to the transition to the ART state ST9 over the execution of the false precursor state ST5 which does not lead to the transition to the ART state ST9. .

If the false portent state ST5 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false portent state is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a new false portent state ST5 from being redundantly executed despite the fact that the false portent state ST5 has already been executed.

If none of the false portent state ST5, the actual portent state ST6, and the chance state ST7 is present, the transition lottery processing for the actual portent state has the highest execution priority, and the transition lottery processing for the chance state has the highest execution priority. It is the next highest, and the transition lottery process for the false portent state is set the lowest. Further, in the case of the false portent state ST5, the transition lottery process for this portent state is set to have a higher execution priority than the transition lottery process for the chance state. As a result, the highest priority is given to the transition to the precursor state ST6, in which the transition to the ART state ST9 will certainly occur, and the priority of the chance state ST7, in which the transition to the ART state ST9 can occur, is given to the ART state ST9. can be set higher than the priority of the false portent state ST5 in which no transition occurs.

In the game in which any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are set, if the transition lottery process for this precursor state does not result in a transition lottery, the chance state A transition lottery process is executed, and when the transition lottery process for the chance state does not win the transition lottery process, the transition lottery process for the false portent state is executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which any one of the false portent state ST5, the actual portent state ST6, and the chance state ST7 is set.

Here, the lottery process for transition to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when any winning number of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17). be done. All of the combinations corresponding to these winning numbers have the same winning probability within the set values "1" to "6". In other words, the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when a winning combination in which there is no set difference in the winning probability is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set values of "1" to "6" from being advantageous or disadvantageous with respect to the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2.

On the other hand, the transition lottery process for this portent state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false portent state are "4" to "8", "15", Executed when any winning number of "16" is set. Of these winning numbers, "4", "6", "8", and "15" are the combinations in which the winning probability is the same among the set values of "1" to "6" as described above. These winning numbers are the same as the winning numbers that trigger the execution of the lottery process for transition to the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is the same as at least one transition lottery process among the transition lottery process for the present portent state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false portent state. It can be run in games.

Of the winning numbers, "5", "7", and "16" are combinations with different winning probabilities between set values of "1" to "6". That is, the transition lottery process for the present omen state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false omen state are executed when a winning combination in which there is no set difference in the winning probability is won. It is executed when a winning combination with a set difference in probability is won. As a result, the probability of transition to the false portent state ST5, the probability of transition to the actual portent state ST6, and the probability of transition to the chance state ST7 can be advantageous or disadvantageous among the set values "1" to "6". It becomes possible to

However, the transition lottery process for the present portent state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false portent state are executed on the condition that the game section is the advantageous section SC2. That is, under the condition that the game is already started in the situation of the advantageous section SC2 or the game wins the transition to the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the present sign state and the transition lottery process for the chance state are performed. And the transition lottery process for the false portent state is executed. Therefore, regarding the transition to the advantageous interval SC2, which is a preliminary stage for causing the transition to the false portent state ST5, the actual portent state ST6, or the chance state ST7, the set value of "1" to "6" is advantageous or After transitioning to the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the false portent state ST5, the actual portent state ST6, or the chance state ST7 is advantageous or disadvantageous between the setting values "1" to "6" while avoiding any disadvantage. It is possible to make it possible.

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 44, a description will be given of the handling process at the end of the game executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. Incidentally, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed in step S411 in the normal process (FIG. 13). Since the process of step S411 is executed after the reel control process (step S409), it is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

First, a bonus process is executed for performing transition control and progress control for the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S1701). The bonus processing will be described later in detail. After that, on the condition that none of the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 (step S1702: NO), control processing of the lottery mode is executed (step S1703). In the control process of the lottery mode, when the 1st replay winning is established in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and when the 2nd replay winning is established in the current game, the second RT mode is entered. The 1RT mode is shifted to the 2nd RT mode, and if the first fall replay win is established in this game, the first RT mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the second fall replay win is established in this game. If so, the second RT mode is changed to the first RT mode.

After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S1704). Specifically, when the game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the false portent state ST5, the main portent state ST6 and the chance state ST7, the normal processing is executed (step S1705), and the game state is the ready state. If it is ST8, the ready state process is executed (step S1706), and if the game state is the ART state ST9, the ART state process is executed (step S1707). Also, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1702, or when one of the processes of steps S1705 to S1707 is executed, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S1708). In the second control process for the game section, a process for shifting the game section to the normal section SC1 is executed when the condition for shifting from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 is satisfied.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the second control process for the game section. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all rotations of

In steps S1801 to S1811, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, a process for ending the advantageous section SC2 is executed. Details of these processes will be described later.

If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S1803: YES) and a negative determination is made in step S1806, the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the value of the advantage maintenance counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step S1812). When the ART state ST9 ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the advantage maintenance counter maintains the advantageous section SC2 over the number of games to maintain the advantage even after shifting to the normal game state ST1. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games remaining in the number of games to maintain the advantage.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, it is determined whether or not the value of the unnotified flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1813). As already explained, the unreported flag is set to a winning number from "1" to "3" in the role lottery process (Fig. 17) after the shift to the advantageous section SC2, enabling establishment of the first bell winning. This is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has already occurred. Then, when the notification of the stop order has already occurred, the value of the non-notification flag is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1813, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1814). In the advantageous interval initialization processing, the advantageous interval flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous interval, even if the player stays in any of the false portent state ST5, the main portent state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8 and the ART state ST9, the game states ST5 to ST9 are continued. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST5 to ST9 including the counter for storing the number of games. Since the process of step S1814 is executed under the condition that the game state is the normal game state ST1, the process of clearing the advantageous section flag to "0" is executed without executing the process of clearing the various data. After that, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1815). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section in the advantageous section display section 67 ends.

As already explained, when a transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs, a transition to the false portent state ST5, the actual portent state ST6, or the chance state ST7 can occur. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is terminated on the condition that it is in the normal game state ST1, it is possible to establish the first bell winning in the case of the false omen state ST5, the real omen state ST6, or the chance state ST7. The advantageous section SC2 is maintained even after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified.

Although the details will be described later, when the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 starts in the advantageous section SC2, it is easier to shift to the ART state ST9 than when the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 starts in the normal section SC1. In this case, if it is the false portent state ST5 as described above, it is maintained in the advantageous section SC2. In addition to the state, it is possible to create a state in which the degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the false portent state ST5.

Also, even in the case of the normal game state ST1, if the unnotified flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is not terminated. As a result, even if the false sign state ST5 ends or the chance state ST7 ends without transition to the ART state ST9, the first bell winning is established after the advantageous section SC2 starts. The advantageous section SC2 continues until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified once. If the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 starts while this advantageous section SC2 continues, the degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 increases. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize in the false omen state ST5 or the chance state ST7 is notified, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to plan

The processing of steps S1816 to S1822 in the second control processing of the game section is executed in a predetermined bonus internal state ST2. The processing will be described later in detail.

Here, how the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the return to the normal section SC1 are performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 46(a) shows the period of the normal section SC1, FIG. 46(b) shows the period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 46(c) shows no setting difference in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). FIG. 46(d) shows the timing of winning the winning combination that triggers the execution of the various transition lottery processes, and FIG. FIG. 46(e) shows the execution period of this precursor state ST6, and FIG. 46(f) shows the execution period of the false precursor state ST5.

First, a description will be given of a case where a transition to the present precursor state ST6 also occurs in a game in which the game section has transitioned to the advantageous section SC2.

At the timing of t1, which is the normal section SC1 as shown in FIG. 46(a), "4", "6", " 8" or "15" (hereinafter also referred to as a chance winning number with no set difference) is set, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and the transition is won. As a result, at the timing t1, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b). Also, at the timing of t1, with the setting of the trigger winning number without the set difference as a trigger, the transition lottery process for this precursor state is executed and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, the game state shifts to the present precursor state ST6 as shown in FIG. 46(e). That is, in the game in which the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the present precursor state ST6 also occurs. Then, when the state is changed to the present precursor state ST6, the state is finally changed to the ART state ST9.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the transition to the false portent state ST5 occurs in a game subsequent to the game in which the game segment transitioned to the advantageous segment SC2, and the advantageous segment SC2 ends when the false portent state ST5 ends. .

At the timing of t2, which is the normal section SC1 as shown in FIG. 46(a), "5", "7", " 16” (hereinafter also referred to as chance winning number with set difference). In this case, even if the normal section SC1 and a chance winning number with a set difference are set, the lottery process for transition to the advantageous section SC2 is not executed. Lottery processing is not executed. In addition, the transition lottery process for the chance state is not executed either.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 46(c), in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), an opportunity winning number with no set difference is set, and the lottery process to shift to the advantageous section SC2 is executed accordingly. , the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b). However, at the timing of t3, the transition lottery process for the false portent state and the transition lottery process for the real portent state are executed, but the transition lottery process does not result in winning in any of the transition lottery processes.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 46(d), the opportunity winning number with a setting difference is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false portent state and the transition lottery process for the real portent state are executed. Then, by winning transition in the transition lottery process for the false portent state, the game transitions to the false portent state ST5 as shown in FIG. 46(f).

After that, at the timing of t5, the number of remaining games to be played in the false portent state ST5 becomes "0", and the conditions for ending the false portent state ST5 are satisfied. After finishing, the game returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, by the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the winning number information of any one of "1" to "3" has already been set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), and the first bell winning has been established. Since the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been notified, the unnotified flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the termination condition of the false portent state ST5 is satisfied at the timing of t5, the termination condition of the advantageous section SC2 is also satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), the game section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing t5.

Next, a case where the transition to the false portent state ST5 occurs in the game in which the game segment transitions to the advantageous segment SC2, and the advantageous segment SC2 ends in the game after the game in which the false portent state ST5 ends will be described. .

At the timing of t6, which is the normal section SC1 as shown in FIG. 46(a), an opportunity winning number with no set difference is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) as shown in FIG. 46(c). By doing so, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and the transition is won. As a result, at the timing t6, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b). Also, at the timing of t6, with the setting of the opportunity winning number without the set difference as a trigger, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, the game state shifts to the false portent state ST5 as shown in FIG. 46(f). In other words, a transition to the false portent state ST5 also occurs in the game in which the game section has transitioned to the advantageous section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t7, the number of remaining games to be played in the false portent state ST5 becomes "0", and the condition for ending the false portent state ST5 is satisfied, thereby causing the false portent state ST5 to enter as shown in FIG. 46(f). After finishing, the game returns to the normal game state ST1. However, it is possible to win the 1st bell since none of the winning numbers "1" to "3" information has already been set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17) between the timing of t6 and the timing of t7. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has not been notified, and the unnotified flag of the main side RAM 74 remains set to "1". Therefore, even if the termination condition of the false portent state ST5 is satisfied at the timing t7, the termination condition of the advantageous section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the advantageous section SC2 is maintained at the timing of t7.

After that, at the timing of t8, the winning number information of any one of "1" to "3" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), and the reels 32L and 32M that enable the establishment of the first bell winning. , 32R, the unnotified flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing t8, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b).

As described above, the advantageous section SC2 ends together in the game when the false precursor state ST5 ends, depending on the timing at which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is announced. In some cases, it may end in a game after the game in which the false portent state ST5 ended. As a result, it is possible to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2, and to make the player expect that the advantageous section SC2 will be maintained even if the false portent state ST5 ends. Become. Note that the advantageous interval SC2 does not end before the false portent state ST5 ends. As for the chance state ST7, the advantageous section SC2 may end together in the game in which the chance state ST7 ends, or the advantageous section SC2 may end in the game after the game in which the chance state ST7 ends. be.

Next, a case where a transition to the false precursor state ST5 occurs in a game in which the game section transitions to the advantageous section SC2, and a transition to the main precursor state ST6 occurs in the middle of the false precursor state ST5 will be described.

At the timing of t9, which is the normal section SC1 as shown in FIG. 46(a), an opportunity winning number with no set difference is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) as shown in FIG. 46(c). By doing so, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the transition is won. As a result, at the timing t9, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b). Also, at the timing of t9, with the setting of the opportunity winning number without the set difference as a trigger, the transition lottery process for the false portent state is executed and the transition winning is achieved. As a result, the game state shifts to the false portent state ST5 as shown in FIG. 46(f). In other words, a transition to the false portent state ST5 also occurs in the game in which the game section has transitioned to the advantageous section SC2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(f), at the timing of t10 in which the false portent state ST5 continues, there is a set difference in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) as shown in FIG. 46(d). 's opportunity winning number is set. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 has already been set and the state is the false portent state ST5, the transition lottery process for the present portent state is executed. Then, by winning the transition in the transition lottery process for this precursor state, as shown in FIGS. is started at When it shifts to this precursor state ST6, it finally shifts to ART state ST9.

As described above, even in the middle of the false portent state ST5, if a chance winning number with a setting difference is set, a shift to the actual portent state ST6 occurs, so the performance corresponding to the portent states ST5 and ST6 is executed. The player expects to win the combination corresponding to the opportunity winning number with a set difference even in the middle of the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player in the situation where the effects corresponding to the portent states ST5 and ST6 are being executed.

<Regarding the execution control of the effects of the precursor states ST5 and ST6 and the chance state ST7>
Next, the execution control of the effects of the portent states ST5 and ST6 and the chance state ST7 will be described. First, the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Incidentally, the transition lottery process for the chance state is executed in step S1317 in the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section. Since the first control process of the game section is executed after the judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game, the shift lottery process for the chance state is also executed after the judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game. .

First, the chance transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S1901). In this case, the chance transition table is set so that a winning number with a low winning probability has a higher probability of winning a transition to the chance state ST7. In addition, the chance state ST7 has a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of winning a transition to the ART state ST9 is relatively high or low. In the chance transition table, a random number range for the chance state ST7, which is a high-probability mode, and a random number range for the chance state ST7, which is a low-probability mode, are separately set as random number ranges for transition to the chance state ST7. ing. In this case, the chance transition table is set so that a winning number with a low winning probability has a higher probability of winning a transition to the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S1902). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the chance state transition lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S1902 is collated with the chance transition table read out in step S1901 to determine whether or not the player has won the transition to the chance state ST7 (step S1903).

Shift to chance state ST7 When winning is achieved (step S1903: YES), the chance winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1904). The chance win flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won at the start of the current game. is executed to shift to the chance state ST7 at the end of the game. In other words, the game state is shifted to the chance state ST7 in the next game of the game in which the winning game is shifted to the chance state ST7. Also, if the player wins the transition to the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode (step S1905: YES), the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main-side MPU 72 is in the high-probability mode in the chance state ST7.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the normal process is executed at step S1705 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the normal processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

If the chance winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2001: YES), it means that the player has won a transition to the chance state ST7 at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process for the chance state ST7 is executed. Specifically, "5" is set in the chance state counter provided in the main RAM 74 as the information on the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 (step S2002). The chance state counter is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the chance state ST7 and the remaining number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. It should be noted that the chance win flag is cleared to "0" when affirmative determination is made in step S2001.

After that, a chance start command indicating that the chance state ST7 is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2003). By receiving the chance start command, the effect side MPU 92 starts the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the false precursor counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2004). The false portent counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the fact that the game is in the false portent state ST5 and the number of remaining games to be continued in the false portent state ST5. If the value of the false portent counter is 1 or more (step S2004: YES), termination processing of the false portent state ST5 is executed to terminate the false portent state ST5 (step S2005). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". That is, the chance state ST7 may be started even in the middle of the false portent state ST5, and if the chance state ST7 is started in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent state ST5 is interrupted. Instead, it is terminated even if it is in the middle.

In the case of shifting to the chance state ST7, an affirmative determination is made in step S1309 in the first control process (FIG. 40) of the game section, which is executed after the completion of the determination of the winning combination at the start of one game, and the chance state is reached. processing is executed (step S1310).

<Regarding Chance Status Processing>
Here, the chance state processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the chance state processing.

First, by determining whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the current chance state ST7 is the high probability mode or the low probability mode (step S2101). . If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the lottery table 112 for low probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2102). On the other hand, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the lottery table 113 for high probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2103).

FIG. 50(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table 112 for low probability, and FIG. 50(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table 113 for high probability.

In both the low-probability lottery table 112 and the high-probability lottery table 113, the lottery value information is set corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the combination. Each of these lottery value information has a data capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In both the low-probability lottery table 112 and the high-probability lottery table 113, for winning numbers "9" to "14" corresponding to bonus winning data, transition to ART state ST9 winning is confirmed. The lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers is set so that the lottery numbers are selected. In addition, regarding other winning numbers, in either the low-probability lottery table 112 or the high-probability lottery table 113, the lottery number with the lower probability of winning in the role lottery process (FIG. 17). The lottery value information corresponding to those winning numbers is set so that the probability of winning a transition to the ART state ST9 is high. In this case, when the same winning number is compared, the lottery table 113 for high probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 than the lottery table 112 for low probability. is set. In particular, for the winning numbers "15" and "16", the lottery value information is set so that there is a possibility that the lottery table 112 for low probability does not result in a transition to the ART state ST9. In the high-probability lottery table 113, the lottery value information is set so that the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined.

If the processing of step S2102 or step S2103 has been executed, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2104). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. More specifically, as already explained, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d updates the 7-bit random number, so it generates a random number from "0" to "127", confirms the operation of the start lever 41, and performs normal processing. The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 (FIG. 13). The acquired random number is stored in an acquired random number counter 74 e provided in the main RAM 74 .

Thereafter, the lottery value information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the combination in the current game is obtained from the lottery tables 112 and 113 read in step S2102 or S2103 (step S2105). For example, in the low-probability mode, when the winning number "15" is selected in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), "80" in decimal and "01010000" in binary are acquired as lottery value information. do. In addition, when the winning number "15" is selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode, the lottery value information is "255" in decimal and "11111111" in binary. get.

Thereafter, subtraction processing is executed (step S2106). In the subtraction process, the lottery value information acquired from the low probability lottery table 112 or the high probability lottery table 113 in step S2105 is subtracted from the random number acquired in the acquisition random number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 in step S2104. Performs computations to produce results. In the arithmetic processing, the lottery value information may be actually subtracted from the random number acquired by the acquired random number counter 74e. By adding, the same result as when actually subtracting the lottery value information from the random number acquired by the acquired random number counter 74e may be derived.

In the case of a configuration in which the lottery value information is actually subtracted, further subtraction is performed from the state in which the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e are all zero in the process of subtraction, and the state in which the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e are all "1". When it becomes, that is, when the numerical information of the obtained random number counter 74e is updated from the minimum value to the maximum value, the carry flag 114 provided in the main side MPU 72 is set to "1", and the minimum value is updated to the maximum value. is not performed, the state in which the carry flag 114 is set to "0" is maintained. Then, when the carry flag 114 is set to "1", it is determined that the result of the subtraction is less than all zeros and that a carry-down has occurred.

On the other hand, in the case of the configuration in which the 2's complement of the lottery value information is added, the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further added from the state where all 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are "1" in the process of addition, and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e become When the state is all zero, that is, when the numerical information of the obtained random number counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, the carry flag 114 provided in the main side MPU 72 is set to "1", and the maximum value is changed to the minimum value. If the value is not updated, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Then, when the carry flag 114 is set to "0", it is determined that the result of the subtraction is less than all zeros and that a carry-down has occurred.

If the result of the subtraction process is less than all zeros and there is a carry-down (step S2107: YES), it is assumed that a transition to the ART state ST9 has occurred, and the ART winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". ” is set (step S2108). The ART winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that a transition to the ART state ST9 has been won at the start of the current game. is executed to shift to the preparation state ST8 at the end of the game. In other words, in the next game after the winning game, the game state shifts to the preparation state ST8, which is the previous stage to the ART state ST9.

The handling of numerical information when the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. A case where the lottery value information is actually subtracted from the random number of the obtained random number counter 74e in the subtraction process of step S2106 will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 51(a1) to 51(a4), the case where the result of the subtraction process does not fall below all zeros will be described.

In the random number acquisition process (step S2104), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 51(a1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 51(a2). After that, since the low-probability mode is selected this time and the winning number "15" is selected in the role lottery process (FIG. 17), the lottery value information from the low-probability lottery table 112 is shown in FIG. , the information "01010000" is obtained. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After that, by subtracting the lottery value information shown in FIG. 51(a3) from the obtained random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. 51(a2), the obtained random number counter 74e becomes as shown in FIG. becomes "00010000". In this case, the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e are subtracted further from the state of all zeros, and the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e become all "1". to the maximum value, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

Next, the case where the result of the subtraction process is less than all zeros will be described with reference to FIGS. 51(b1) to 51(b4).

In the random number acquisition process (step S2104), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 51(b1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 51(b2). After that, since the winning number "15" is selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode this time, the lottery value information from the lottery table 113 for high probability is shown in FIG. , the information of "11111111" is obtained. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 51(b3) is subtracted from the acquired random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. becomes "01100001". In this case, the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e are subtracted further from the state of all zeros, and the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e become all "1". The carry flag 114 is set to "1" because an event occurs in which the value is updated from 1 to the maximum value. Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

As described above, the random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the bit number of 1 byte. As a result, while using a common program as the lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9, a 1-byte lottery is generated in any situation in which a 100% winning situation and a situation that may result in a loss are caused. Value information can be used.

If the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the bit number of 1 byte, and the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for creating a 100% winning situation is 1 byte, all zeros after subtraction. Unless such a situation is treated as a winning result, even if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% is used, the winning will not be 100%. On the other hand, if a situation in which all zeros are obtained after subtraction is treated as a winning result, it will be necessary to eliminate the acquisition of all zeros as random numbers. Therefore, if the random number to be used is 8 bits, which is the same as the bit number of 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to at least 100% as a number of bits larger than the bit number of 1 byte. put away. On the other hand, as described above, the random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the bit number of 1 byte, so the lottery value corresponding to 100% 1-byte lottery value information can be used as information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the lottery value information.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 48), when the value of the chance state counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more and the game state is the chance state ST7 (step S2006: YES), the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 It is determined whether or not "1" is set (step S2007). If the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S2007: YES), a preparation state setting process is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". Also, the information of the main side RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2009). The effect side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command so that the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is started.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S2007: NO), the value of the chance state counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2010). Then, when the value of the chance state counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2011: YES), the chance state ST7 ends and the game returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, the chance end command indicating that the chance state ST7 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2012). By receiving the chance end command, the effect side MPU 92 starts the effect corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1.

When a negative determination is made in step S2006, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the main omen winning flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2013). If "1" is set in the main omen winning flag, it means that the transition to the main omen state ST6 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process for this precursor state ST6 is executed. Specifically, this precursor counter setting process is executed (step S2014). This portent counter is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify that it is the present portent state ST6 and the remaining number of continuous games in the present portent state ST6. In the process of setting the precursor counter, the number of games to be continued in the precursor state ST6 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit specified by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuous games selected by this lottery is any one of 5 to 10 games, and the winning probability of a long continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of a short continuous game number. It should be noted that, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2013, this omen winning flag is cleared to "0".

After that, a main precursor start command indicating that the main precursor state ST6 has started is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S2015). Information about the number of games to be continued in the present precursor state ST6 to be started this time is set in the main precursor start command. The effect side MPU 92 receives the present precursor start command so that the effect corresponding to the present precursor state ST6 is started.

After that, on condition that the value of the false portent counter is 1 or more (step S2016: YES), termination processing of the false portent state ST5 is executed to end the false portent state ST5 (step S2017). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In other words, the actual portent state ST6 may be started even in the middle of the false portent state ST5, and when the actual portent state ST6 is started in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent state ST5 is interrupted. It is terminated even if it is in the middle.

If a negative determination is made in step S2013, on condition that the value of the main precursor counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2018: YES), the value of the main precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2019). Then, if the value of this precursor counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2020: YES), a preparation state setting process is executed (step S2021). In the setting process, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" as already described, and the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). The information of the main side RAM 74 is set so as to be set. After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2022). The effect side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command so that the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S2018, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the false omen winning flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S2023). If the false omen winning flag is set to "1", it means that the transition to the false omen state ST5 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process for the false portent state ST5 is executed. Specifically, a process of setting a false portent counter is executed (step S2024). The false portent counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the fact that the game is in the false portent state ST5 and the number of remaining games to be continued in the false portent state ST5. In the setting processing of the false portent counter, the number of continuous games of the false portent state ST5 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit specified by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuous games selected by this lottery is any one of 5 to 10 games, and the winning probability of a short continuous game number is set higher than the winning probability of a long continuous game number. It should be noted that the false omen winning flag is cleared to "0" when the affirmative determination is made in step S2023.

After that, a false portent start command indicating that the false portent state ST5 has started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2025). Information on the number of continuous games of the false portent state ST5 to be started this time is set in the false portent start command. The effect side MPU 92 receives the false portent start command so that the effect corresponding to the false portent state ST5 is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2023, on condition that the value of the false portent counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2026: YES), the value of the false portent counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2027). When the value of the false portent counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 specifies that the game state is the false portent state ST5, and when the value of the false portent counter becomes "0" after subtracting 1, the false portent Specifies that state ST5 has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2026, on condition that the value of the advantage maintenance counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2028: YES), the value of the advantage maintenance counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2029). As already explained, when the ART state ST9 ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the advantage maintenance counter maintains the advantage section SC2 over the number of games to maintain the advantage even after the transition to the normal game state ST1. This is a counter for specifying the number of games remaining in the number of games to maintain the advantage when the main side MPU 72 determines the number of games remaining. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 specifies that it is an advantage maintenance section, and when the value of the advantage maintenance counter becomes "0" after subtracting 1, the advantage maintenance section ends. Identify things.

Next, normal effect control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal effect control process is repeated at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the effect side MPU 92 when the game state is the normal game state ST1, the false portent state ST5, the main portent state ST6, or the chance state ST7. executed.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the main indication effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2201). The present portent effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the present portent state ST6 is being executed. When the value of the present portent effect flag is "0" (step S2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the present portent start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2202). If this portent start command has been received (step S2202: YES), it is determined whether or not the false portent effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2203). The false portent effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the false portent state ST5 is being executed.

When the false portent effect flag is not set to "1" (step S2203: NO), the main portent effect start setting process is executed (step S2204). In the start setting processing of the present portent effect, information on the number of continuous games of the present portent state ST6 set in the present portant start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table of the main sign effect corresponding to the information of the number of continuous games is read out, and the content of the series of the main sign effect in the present main sign state ST6 is determined by lottery using the determination table of the main sign effect. , the main indication performance table corresponding to the determination result is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. - 特許庁The execution of the presentation is controlled by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the main indication presentation table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the presentation presentation.

Although details will be described later, in the main MPU 72, although the game state is not the chance state ST7, the chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 may be executed. Under such circumstances, when the main sign start command is received from the main MPU 72, the main sign effect start setting process in step S2204 is executed, thereby ending the chance effect and starting the main sign effect. . In this case, the chance effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

If the false portent effect flag is set to "1" (step S2203: YES), it means that the main portent state ST6 has started in the middle of the false portent state ST5. In this case, adjustment processing of the portent effect is executed (step S2205). In the process of adjusting the portent effect, the main portent effect table for executing the main portent effect having the continuity of effect with respect to the content of the false portent effect at that time is read from the effect side ROM 93 and read from the effect side RAM 94. be memorized. In this case, the present portent effect table corresponds to the information of the number of continuous games in the present portent state ST6 set in the present portent start command received this time. Execution control of the performance is performed by the performance-side MPU 92 according to the present portent performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed with the content having continuity with the content of the false portent performance that has been executed so far. This precursor effect is executed on the display device 63 . In addition, when the main sign effect is started in the middle of the false sign effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 show the number of games of the false sign effect executed so far and the number of the real sign effect to be executed from now on. The number of games and the number of games, and the total number of games, will be executed.

When the processing of step S2204 or step S2205 is executed, the real portent effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the value of the false portent effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S2206).

When "1" is set to the present indication effect flag (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2207). Receipt of the preparation start command means that this precursor state ST6 has ended and the state has shifted to the preparation state ST8. In this case, a preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S2208). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table enabling execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The preparation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by performing execution control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparation effect table. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the game is in the preparation state ST8. After that, the value of the main indication effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2209).

If the preparation start command has not been received (step S2207: NO), update setting processing for this precursor effect is executed (step S2210). In the update setting process, if the update timing of the present sign effect has come due to the execution of a new game, the range to be referred to in the present sign effect table, which is the current reference target, is set to one game. Execute the process that changes according to the new start. As a result, the content of execution of the present sign effect changes according to the number of games in which the present sign effect continues.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is determined whether or not the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2211). The chance effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. If the value of the chance effect flag is "0" (step S2211: NO), it is determined whether or not a chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2212). If the chance start command has been received (step S2212: YES), it is determined whether or not the false portent effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2213).

If the false portent effect flag is not set to "1" (step S2213: NO), a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S2214). In the chance production start setting process, a chance production table enabling the execution of the chance production corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94.例文帳に追加As already explained, the chance state ST7 continues over 5 games unless a win is made during the transition to the ART state ST9. Therefore, the chance effect table is set with data corresponding to the effect that continues over five games. The chance production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the production in the production side MPU 92 according to the chance production table. Then, the player can recognize that the chance state ST7 is reached by confirming the effect. After that, the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2215).

On the other hand, when "1" is set to the false portent effect flag (step S2213: YES), "1" is set to the chance waiting flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2216). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the start of the chance effect is waiting because the false portent effect corresponding to the false portent state ST5 is being executed. Here, in the main side MPU 72, when a transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent state ST5 is ended in the middle and the state is shifted to the chance state ST7. On the other hand, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs during the false portent effect, the effect side MPU 92 does not terminate the false portent effect in the middle, and the main side MPU 72 performs control corresponding to the chance state ST7. To continue the false portent presentation even if it is being executed. As a result, as a game state, the transition to the chance state ST7 is prioritized over the continuation of the false portent state ST5, thereby ensuring the profit of the player due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7, and the false portent performance as the performance. By continuing, it is possible to prevent the content of the production from giving a sense of incongruity.

If the chance effect flag is set to "1" (step S2211: YES), it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2217). Receipt of the preparation start command means that transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 has been won and the state has shifted to the preparation state ST8. In this case, a preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S2218). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table enabling execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The preparation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by performing execution control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparation effect table. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the game is in the preparation state ST8.

When the preparation start command is not received (step S2217: NO), it is determined whether or not the information to be referred to in the chance effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance effect. Thus, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the chance effect (step S2219). When the number of continuous games is completed in the chance state ST7, a chance end command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72, but the effect side MPU 92 determines whether or not the chance end command is received when grasping the end timing of the chance effect. do not specify Furthermore, even if a chance end command is received from the main side MPU 72, if the information to be referred to in the chance effect table is not the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance effect, it is not judged to be the end timing of the chance effect. . As a result, although the details will be described later, when the execution of the chance performance is delayed for the reason that the false portent performance is being executed, the chance performance is executed over 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. becomes possible.

If it is time to finish the chance production (step S2219: YES), the process of setting the end of the chance production is executed (step S2220). In the end setting processing of the chance production, the normal return production table corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal production table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the production side ROM 93 and produced. stored in the side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 end the chance state ST7 and return to the normal game state ST1. After the normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. By confirming the effect, the player can understand that the chance state ST7 has ended and the normal game state ST1 has returned.

When the process of step S2218 or step S2220 is executed, the value of the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2221). Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2219, a chance effect update setting process is executed (step S2222). In the update setting process, if it is time to update the chance effect by executing a new game, the range to be referred to in the chance effect table currently being referred to is changed to the new one game. Execute the process that changes depending on the start. As a result, the execution content of the chance presentation changes according to the number of games in which the chance presentation continues.

When negative determination is made in step S2212, or when the processing of step S2216 is executed, the effect control processing for the false portent state is executed (step S2223). FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for the false portent state.

When "1" is not set to the false portent effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2301: NO), it is determined whether or not a false portent start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2302). If the false portent start command has been received (step S2302: YES), a false portent effect start setting process is executed (step S2303). In the false portent effect start setting process, information on the number of continuous games in the false portent state ST5 set in the currently received false portent start command is read. Then, the determination table of the false portent effect corresponding to the information of the number of continuous games is read, and the details of the series of false portent effects in the current false portent state ST5 are determined by lottery using the determination table of the false portent effect. , a false omen effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . The effect execution is controlled by the effect side MPU 92 according to the false portent effect table, and the false portent effect is executed by the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . After that, "1" is set to the false portent effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2304).

When the false portent effect flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), the information to be referred to in the false portent effect table stored in the effect-side RAM 94 is the end timing of the false portent effect. By determining whether or not it is corresponding information, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the false portent effect (step S2305). If it is time to end the false omen effect (step S2305: YES), it is determined whether or not the chance waiting flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1", thereby waiting for the start of the chance effect. (step S2306).

If the chance standby flag is set to "1" (step S2306: YES), a chance production start setting process is executed (step S2307). In the chance production start setting process, a chance production table enabling the execution of the chance production corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The chance production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the production in the production side MPU 92 according to the chance production table. Then, the player can recognize that the chance state ST7 is reached by confirming the effect.

Even if the chance presentation start setting process is triggered by the chance standby flag being set to "1", the chance presentation start setting is executed immediately when the chance start command is received from the main side MPU 72. As in the processing, a chance effect table is used in which data corresponding to the chance effect that continues over five games, which is the number of games to be continued in the chance state ST7, is set. As already explained, in the situation where the chance effect is being executed, the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72 unless the information to be referred to in the chance effect table is the information corresponding to the end timing of the chance effect. However, the chance production is not finished. As a result, the chance state ST7 is reached while the false portent effect is being executed, and the chance effect is on standby until the false portent effect is completed, and the chance effect is started after the false portent effect is completed. However, the chance effect is executed over 5 games, which is the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the chance state ST7 will continue over five games.

After that, the chance standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the false sign effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2308).

When it is the end timing of the false portent effect and the chance waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2305: YES, step S2306: NO), whether a false portent start command has been received from the main side MPU 72? It is determined whether or not (step S2309). As already explained, in the master side MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent state ST5 is terminated and the chance state ST7 is started. The MPU 92 continues the false portent effect. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the first false omen state ST5 will continue over 10 games, the chance state ST7 is entered after one game, and furthermore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7. When the side MPU 92 executes the seventh game of the false portent effect, the game state of the main side MPU 72 is neither the false portent state ST5 nor the chance state ST7, but the normal game state ST1. Then, when the master side MPU 72 decides to shift to the false portent state ST5 under this situation, the effect side MPU 92 newly receives the false portent start command while the false portent effect is being executed. .

If the false portent start command has not been received (step S2309: NO), a false portent effect end setting process is executed (step S2310). In the end setting processing of the false portent effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false portent effect and returning to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect-side ROM 93. is stored in the performance-side RAM 94. Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 end the false sign state ST5 and return to the normal game state ST1. After the corresponding normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the premonitory effect has ended and the normal game state ST1 has been restored.

If the false portent start command has been received (step S2309: YES), a false portent effect adjustment process is executed (step S2311). In the adjustment processing of the false portent effect, a false portent effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 for executing a false portent effect having continuity of effect with respect to the content of the false portent effect at that point in time. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false portent effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false portent state ST5 set in the false portent start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effects in the effect side MPU 92 according to the false portent effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image are displayed with the content having continuity with the content of the false portent effect executed so far. A false portent effect is executed on the display device 63 . When the false portent effect is started in the middle of the false portent effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false portent effect executed so far and the number of games of the false portent effect to be executed from now on. The number of games and the number of games, and the total number of games, will be executed.

If it is not the end timing of the false omen effect (step S2305: NO), it is determined whether or not the chance waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312). If the chance waiting flag is set to "1" (step S2312: YES), it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2313). As already explained, even when the effect-side MPU 92 is executing the control for executing the false portent effect, the game state of the main-side MPU 72 may be the chance state ST7. In such a situation, the main MPU 72 wins the transition lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7. A preparation start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 .

If the preparation start command has been received (step S2313: YES), a preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S2314). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . The preparation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparation effect table. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the game is in the preparation state ST8. In addition, if the preparation effect start setting process is executed in a situation where the false omen effect is being executed, it corresponds to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST9 was won in such a way as to interrupt the series of stories of the false omen effect. A production is executed. Thereafter, the false portent effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" and the chance standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2315).

If the chance standby flag is set to "1" and the preparation start command is not received from the main MPU 72 (step S2312: YES, step S2313: NO), the chance end command is received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not (step S2316). When the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 controlled by the main MPU 72 is exhausted while the false omen effect is being executed, the main MPU 72 will Receive a chance end command. If the chance end command has been received (step S2316: YES), the chance standby flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2317).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2312, or if a negative determination is made in step S2316, it is determined whether or not a false portent start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2318). As already explained, in the master side MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent state ST5 is terminated and the chance state ST7 is started. The MPU 92 continues the false portent effect. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the first false omen state ST5 will continue over 10 games, the chance state ST7 is entered after one game, and furthermore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7. When the side MPU 92 executes the seventh game of the false portent effect, the game state of the main side MPU 72 is neither the false portent state ST5 nor the chance state ST7, but the normal game state ST1. Then, when the master side MPU 72 decides to shift to the false portent state ST5 under this situation, the effect side MPU 92 newly receives the false portent start command while the false portent effect is being executed. .

If the false portent effect start command has not been received (step S2318: NO), update setting processing of the false portent effect is executed (step S2319). In the update setting process, if it is time to update the false portent effect by executing a new game, the range to be referred to in the false portent effect table currently being referred to is set to one game. Execute the process that changes according to the new start. As a result, the execution content of the false portent effect changes according to the number of games in which the false portent effect continues.

When the false portent effect command has been received (step S2318: YES), adjustment processing of the false portent effect is executed (step S2320). In the adjustment processing of the false portent effect, a false portent effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 for executing a false portent effect having continuity of effect with respect to the content of the false portent effect at that point in time. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false portent effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false portent state ST5 set in the false portent start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the presentation by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the false portent presentation table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image are displayed with the content having continuity with the content of the false portent presentation which has been executed until then. A false portent effect is executed on the display device 63 . When the false portent effect is started in the middle of the false portent effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false portent effect executed so far and the number of games of the false portent effect to be executed from now on. The number of games and the number of games, and the total number of games, will be executed.

Next, how the false omen effect and the chance effect are executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 54(a) shows the period of staying in the false portent state ST5, FIG. 54(b) shows the period of staying in the chance state ST7, and FIG. 54(c) shows the period of staying in the preparation state ST8. FIG. 54(d) shows the period during which the false portent effect is executed, FIG. 54(e) shows the period during which the chance effect is executed, and FIG. 54(f) shows the ART state ST9. It shows the period during which the effect indicating that you have won is being executed.

First, a case will be described where the chance state ST7 is shifted to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false portent state ST5 but the chance state ST7 ends before the false portent effect ends.

At the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 54(a), the false portent state ST5 is started under the control of the main side MPU 72, and the false portent effect is performed under the control of the effect side MPU 92 as shown in FIG. 54(d). be started. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the game state shifts from the false portent state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. FIG. However, even if the shift to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect is not started as shown in FIG. 54(e), and the false portent effect continues as shown in FIG. 54(d). be done.

After that, at the timing of t3 when the false portent effect is executed as shown in FIG. 54(d), the number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 54(b). The chance state ST7 ends under the control of the main MPU 72. FIG. Even in this case, the number of continuous games of the false portent effect set at the timing of the transition to the false portent state ST5 at the timing of t1 has not been completed. The omen production continues. After that, at the timing of t4, the number of continuous games of the false portent effect is consumed, and the false portent effect is ended as shown in FIG. 54(d).

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the game shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false portent state ST5 and transitions to the ART state ST9 while the false portent effect is being executed, and winning is won.

At timing t5 as shown in FIG. 54(a), the false portent state ST5 is started under the control of the main side MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. be started. After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the game state shifts from the false portent state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. FIG. However, even if the shift to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect is not started as shown in FIG. 54(e), and the false portent effect continues as shown in FIG. 54(d). be done.

After that, at the timing of t7, a transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed in the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72, and the transition lottery process wins the transition lottery process. Therefore, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 54(b) and 54(c), the game state shifts from the chance state ST7 to the preparation state ST8 under the control of the main side MPU 72. FIG. Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 54(d) and 54(f), the false portent effect is terminated, and an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has been won is started. Then, the effect is executed until the timing of t8.

As described above, it is possible to give surprise to the player by suddenly executing an effect indicating that the player has won the ART state ST9 during the false portent effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the game shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false portent state ST5 and the chance performance is continuously started due to the chance state ST7 even at the timing when the false portent performance ends.

At the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 54(a), the false portent state ST5 is started under the control of the main side MPU 72, and the false portent effect is performed under the control of the effect side MPU 92 as shown in FIG. 54(d). be started. After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the game state shifts from the false portent state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main side MPU 72. FIG. However, even if the shift to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance effect is not started as shown in FIG. 54(e), and the false portent effect continues as shown in FIG. 54(d). be done.

After that, at the timing of t11 in which the chance state ST7 is maintained under the control of the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. Chance production starts like this. In this case, since the predetermined number of games have already been played after shifting to the chance state ST7 at the timing of t11, the remaining number of continuous games in the chance state ST7 is 5 games, which is the standard number of games to end the chance state ST7. The number of games is also small. However, the number of continuous games of the chance effect started at the timing of t11 is set to 5 games, which is the reference number of games for ending the chance state ST7.

After that, at the timing of t12, the chance state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 54(b). However, at the timing of t12, the chance effect is continued as shown in FIG. 54(e) because the number of games in which the chance effect is continued still remains. Therefore, after timing t12, the chance effect is executed even though the game state is not the chance state ST7. After that, at the timing of t13, the chance effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 54(e).

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 before and after the timing t11 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b). FIG. 55(a) shows how an image corresponding to the false portent effect is displayed on the image display device 63 before timing t11, and FIG. 55(b) shows an image after timing t11. It shows how the display device 63 starts to display an image corresponding to the chance effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are displayed on the image display device 63 in the false portent effect. A moving image is displayed as if they are facing each other. It should be noted that such moving image display as if they are confronting each other is also executed in this precursor effect. In addition, when the sign effect is finished without winning the transition to the ART state ST9, a moving image display is performed such that the first character image G4 is finally defeated by the second character image G5, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is performed. When the transition win is made and the sign effect ends, a moving image display is performed such that the first character image G4 finally wins over the second character image G5.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the chance effect, the image display device 63 displays a suggestive image G6 indicating that the chance state ST7 is in effect, and a game number image G7 indicating the remaining number of continuous games of the chance effect. is displayed. In this case, when the chance effect is started at the timing of transition to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72, and when the false sign effect ends in the situation of the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72, the false In any case where the chance effect is started following the portent effect, an image showing 5 games, which is the standard number of games to end the chance state ST7, is displayed as the game number image G7. As a result, since the game in the chance state ST7 has already been completed while the false portent effect is being executed, the number of remaining games in the chance state ST7 remains at the timing when the chance effect is started following the false portent effect. Even if the number of games is less than the end reference number of games, it is possible for the player to expect to win the transition to the ART state ST9 over the end reference number of games.

Further, in the chance state ST7, each game gives an opportunity to execute a lottery process to shift to the ART state ST9. A transition to the ready state ST8 occurs. Therefore, when the chance effect is executed following the false portent effect, if the number of continuous games of the chance effect is greater than the number of the remaining continuous games of the chance state ST7, even before the chance state ST7 ends. For example, the transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur while the chance production is being executed, and in a situation where the chance production is being executed after the chance production is completed, the chance production is changed to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7. It is possible to make the player recognize that the transfer winning has not been achieved.

<Regarding bonus status processing>
Next, the processing relating to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the bonus process is executed in step S1701 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the bonus processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

When the BB prize corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S2401: YES), the BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2402). The BB flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that it is in the BB state ST3.

If the BB winning achieved this time is the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning (step S2403: YES), the specific bonus flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2404). The 3BB winning data that enables establishment of the 3BB winning prize is any of the normal mode lottery table (Fig. 18), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Fig. 20) and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Fig. 22). is set to the index value IV=7, and the 4th BB winning data that enables establishment of the 4th BB prize is set to the index value IV=8 in any of these lottery tables. These index values IV=7 and 8 are set as a combination with the same winning probability between the setting values "1" to "6". In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus winning with no set difference in winning probability has been established. Although the details will be described later, when a bonus winning with a set difference in the winning probability is established, the game section is not set to shift from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state. Then, when a bonus prize is won in which there is no set difference in the winning probability, the game section is set to shift from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, when the RB prize corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S2405: YES), the RB flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2406). The RB flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the RB state ST4.

Also, if the RB winning achieved this time is the first RB winning (step S2407: YES), the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2408). The 1st RB winning data that enables establishment of the 1st RB winning prize is any of the normal mode lottery table (Fig. 18), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Fig. 20) and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Fig. 22). is also set to the index value IV=9. The index value IV=9 is set as a combination with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order for the main MPU 72 to specify that the current RB win corresponds to the establishment of a bonus win in which there is no set difference in the winning probability, the specific bonus flag is set to "1" in step S2408. set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, if the process of step S2404 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2407, or if the process of step S2408 is executed, a bonus combination corresponding to this bonus prize is won. It is determined whether or not the game state at the time of playing is the main precursor state ST6 (step S2409). The present portent state ST6 is a game state in which the transition to the preparation state ST8 is confirmed when the number of continuous games of the present portent state ST6 is completed. Therefore, if it is the present precursor state ST6 (step S2409: YES), the ART winning process is executed in order to shift to the ready state ST8 after the bonus state ends this time (step S2410). In the ART winning process, the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The ART winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is necessary to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the bonus state ends. In addition, in the ART winning process, an ART winning command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 to indicate that the player has won a transition to the ART state ST9. By receiving the ART winning command, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the player enters the ART state ST9 after the bonus state of this time ends, at the start of the bonus state of this time.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409, or when the process of step S2410 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2411). The total payout counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of game media awarded to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 determines whether or not the condition for ending the bonus state is satisfied based on the value of the total payout counter.

After that, a bonus start command indicating that the bonus state is to be started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2412). Information indicating whether the bonus state to be started this time is the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is set in the bonus start command. By receiving the bonus start command, the effect side MPU 92 starts the effect corresponding to the bonus state of the type to be started this time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2413). The main ending effect flag, which will be described in detail later, is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the ending effect is being executed when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games. be. If a negative determination is made in step S2413, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S2414).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state, thereby shifting to the bonus state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that a has occurred, and to give satisfaction to the player by emphasizing the transition to the bonus state. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

When the BB flag or RB flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2415: YES), the bonus state processing is executed (step S2416). The progress of the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is controlled by the bonus state processing.

Next, the bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S618 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). The processing of this step S618 is executed after the determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

If the current game is the start game of the bonus state, which is the first game to be executed after the transition to the bonus state (step S2501: YES), the process for the start game of the bonus state shown in steps S2502 to S2520 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the current bonus state was started in the advantageous section SC2. (Step S2502). If the advantageous interval flag is set to "1" (step S2502: YES), the process for giving the player the profit related to the ART state ST9 is executed after step S2506. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of starting the bonus state in the advantageous section SC2.

As already explained, when the false portent state ST5 occurs, the false portent effect is executed, but the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the false portent state ST5 ends. However, in the case of the false portent state ST5, the advantageous interval SC2 is maintained. In this case, if the bonus state is started in the situation of the advantageous section SC2 as described above, the profit related to the ART state ST9 can be given to the player. As a result, the false portent state ST5 functions not only as a game state for making the player expect that it is the real portent state ST6, but also as a game state that is advantageous to the player by starting the bonus state. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the portent effect.

Even if the advantageous section flag is not set to "1" (step S2502: NO), if the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2503: YES), the main side The advantageous interval flag in the RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2504), and the advantageous interval display section 67 is switched from off to on (step S2505). When the specific bonus flag is set to "1", as already explained, the current bonus state is triggered by a bonus combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability. That is, in the case of a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability, the game in which the bonus state is started even if the game section before the bonus state is the normal section SC1. is set to the advantageous section SC2. Then, by setting the advantageous section SC2 in the game in which the bonus state is started, the processing for providing the player with the profit related to the ART state ST9 after step S2506 is executed. Therefore, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which there is no set difference in the winning probability may be a more advantageous bonus state than the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which there is a set difference in the winning probability. It becomes possible.

Here, as a bonus combination in which there is no set difference in the winning probability, a combination with the 3rd BB winning data set (index value IV=7) and a combination with the 4th BB winning data set (index value IV=8). However, when the bonus internal state ST2 in which the 3rd BB winning data or the 4th BB winning data is set in the advantageous section SC2, an opportunity to shift from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 is given. be done. Since the advantageous interval SC2 is forcibly terminated when the number of continuous games reaches the upper limit, the number of games played in situations other than the ART state ST9 should not be counted as the number of continuous games of the advantageous interval SC2 as much as possible. preferable. In this case, when the bonus state is entered, in the case where the advantage section SC2 is surely set in the start game, the normal section SC1 is temporarily shifted to before the bonus state is started. For example, when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which there is no set difference in the winning probability is started in the false portent state ST5, the situation is the false portent state ST5 and the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to temporarily clear the number of games played in , and then to newly shift to the advantageous section SC2.

A processing configuration for producing the effect will be described. In the second control process of the game section (FIG. 45), if the bonus internal state ST2 in which the 3rd BB winning data or the 4th BB winning data is set (step S1816: YES), the game state in which the winning data is set is any one of this precursor state ST6, preparation state ST8 and ART state ST9 (step S1817). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1817, the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is not executed. In the case of shifting to the normal section SC1, the initialization processing of the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the right to execute the ART state ST9 is also lost. In order to prevent loss of the right, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1817, it is determined whether or not the winning number information of any one of "1" to "3" has been set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S1818). These winning numbers are winning numbers that establish the first bell winning when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the correct stopping order. In the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified even if the information of the winning number is set even if it is the advantageous section SC2.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1818, it is determined whether or not the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game is the order of stopping corresponding to falls (step S1819). The stop order corresponding to falling is the stop order in which the winning of the first bell is not established, and is set as the stop order different for each winning number "1" to "3". Further, the order of stopping for coping with falling is the order of stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the first stop, second stop and third stop. Since the order of stopping corresponding to fall is set in this way, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed when the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R by the player happens to coincide with the order of stopping corresponding to falling. It is possible to In addition, the stop order for coping with falling is not limited to the stop order of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop. The configuration may be determined only by the types of 32M and 32R. In addition, an effect that suggests to the player that the advantageous section SC2 is once finished due to the stop order corresponding to falling is not executed, but the effect may be executed.

If the stop order is for falling (step S1819: YES), on condition that the value of the unnotified flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1820: YES), the advantageous section SC2 is initialized. At the same time (step S1821), the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1822). As a result, the game section temporarily shifts to the normal section SC1. Further, even if the normal section SC1 is temporarily shifted to in this way, when the third BB prize or the fourth BB prize is established and the shift is made to the BB state ST3, the game section is certainly advantageous in the first game of the BB state ST3. Along with the transition to the section SC2, the profit generated by being in the advantageous section SC2 is also given.

It should be noted that the player may be notified of the order of stopping in response to falling. In this case, it is possible to positively cause the transition to the normal section SC1 in the situation described above.

Returning to the description of the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 57), when the affirmative determination is made in step S2502 or when the processing of step S2505 is executed, the bonus state of this time is in the normal game state ST1 and in the advantage maintenance section. (step S2506). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2507). That is, in the normal game state ST1, when a bonus win is established in the advantageous maintenance interval, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus win is terminated on condition that the start game in the bonus state is executed in the advantageous interval SC2. After that, it shifts to the preparation state ST8. As a result, the player expects that a bonus prize will be won in the advantage maintenance section. After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2508). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect side MPU 92 executes in the start game in the bonus state an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the bonus state of this time ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S2506 or if the processing of step S2508 is executed, the condition is that the gaming state at the timing when the bonus hand that triggered the bonus state this time is won is the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (step S2509: YES), or on the condition that the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2510: YES), to add the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Execute the process. As processing for the addition, first, the addition table at the start of the bonus is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2511). The addition table at the start of the bonus is common regardless of the type of the bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of winning the addition and the expected number of games to be added differs according to the type of the bonus state. may be configured. In addition, the add-on table at the start of the bonus is common between the set values "1" to "6", but at least one of the add-on winning probability and the add-on expected number of games differs depending on the set value. It is good also as the structure which has.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2512). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process at the start of the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number acquired in step S2512 is collated with the addition table at the start of the bonus read out in step S2511 to determine whether or not an addition win has been made (step S2513). Specifically, in the bonus table at the start of the bonus, a lottery result indicating that the number of games to be added is "0" is set, and there are multiple types of lottery results for the number of games to be added that are one or more. is set. In step S2513, it is determined whether or not any of the lottery results for the number of additional games equal to or greater than one game has been selected.

If the addition wins (step S2513: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2514). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 . After that, a bonus addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2515). Information about the number of added games that have occurred this time is set in the added command. By receiving the add-on command during the bonus, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded.

On the other hand, when the game state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is neither the ready state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". (Steps S2509 and S2510: NO), a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9, first, the ART direct hit table is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2516). Although the ART direct hit table is common regardless of the type of the bonus state this time, it may be configured such that the probability of winning a transition to the ART state ST9 differs according to the type of the bonus state. In addition, although the table for ART direct hit is common among the setting values "1" to "6", it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 is different according to the setting value. good.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2517). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers from "0" to "255" are generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. , the random number written in the sixteenth latch register 103p is obtained by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing of making an affirmative determination. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2517 with the ART direct hit table read out in step S2516, it is determined whether or not a transition to ART state ST9 has been won (step S2518).

Shift to ART state ST9 When winning is made (step S2518: YES), the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2519). After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2520). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect side MPU 92 executes in the start game in the bonus state an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the bonus state of this time ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, if a negative determination is made in step S2503, if a negative determination is made in step S2513, if the process of step S2515 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2518, or When the process of step S2520 is executed, the process at the start of the game during the bonus is executed (step S2521). That is, in the game in which the bonus state is started, even if the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the lottery processing for shifting to the ART state ST9, or the processing for shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed, the bonus The game start time processing in the middle is executed. Then, in the process at the start of the game during the bonus, the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 or the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game during a bonus. In the game start processing during the bonus, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", that is, whether or not the game section is the advantageous section SC2 (step S2601). If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not the player wins the lottery opportunity in the current game (step S2602). Specifically, it is determined that the lottery trigger combination has been won when the winning combination enables the first watermelon winning or the cherry winning combination.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, on the condition that the gaming state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is won is the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2603: YES), or On the condition that the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2604: YES), the processing for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for adding the bonus, first, the bonus table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2605). The addition table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of the bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of winning additional winning and the expected number of games to be added differs depending on the type of bonus state. may be In addition, the addition table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time, but the probability of being added to the winning and the addition expectation game according to the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time A configuration in which at least one of the numbers is different may be adopted. In addition, the add-on table in the bonus is common between the set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the add-on winning probability and the add-on expected number of games differs depending on the set value. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which

Here, the add-on table during the bonus is set to have a lower probability of winning an add-on win than the add-on table read from the main ROM 73 at step S2511 in the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 57). In addition, the number of games for which the additional expected number of games is small. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state is started, compared to the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the odds of winning additional prizes and the expected number of games to be added may be the same or substantially the same between the additional table during the bonus and the additional table at the start of the bonus.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2606). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the additional lottery process during the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number acquired in step S2606 is checked against the bonus table read out in step S2605 to determine whether or not an additional win has been made (step S2607). Specifically, in the add-on table in the bonus, a lottery result indicating that the number of add-on games is "0" is set, and multiple types of lottery results for the number of add-on games that are one or more are set. It is In step S2607, it is determined whether or not any of the lottery results for the number of additional games equal to or greater than one game has been selected.

If an additional win is made (step S2607: YES), an additional setting process is executed (step S2608). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 . The number-of-ART-games counter 121 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9. After that, a bonus addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2609). Information on the number of added games that have occurred this time is set in the add-on command. By receiving the add-on command during the bonus, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded.

On the other hand, when the game state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is neither the ready state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". (Steps S2603 and S2604: NO), a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state ST9, first, the mid-bonus transition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2610). The mid-bonus transition table is common irrespective of the type of the bonus state this time, but it may be configured such that the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 differs according to the type of the bonus state. In addition, the mid-bonus transition table is common regardless of the type of the lottery opportunity winning this time, but the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 depends on the type of the lottery opportunity winning this time. may be different. In addition, although the mid-bonus transition table is common between the set values of "1" to "6", the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may differ depending on the set value. good.

Here, the transition table during the bonus has a lower probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 than the ART direct hit table read from the main side ROM 73 at step S2516 in the bonus processing (FIG. 57) at the start of the game. is set. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state is started, compared to the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be the same or substantially the same between the mid-bonus transition table and the ART direct hit table.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2611). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers from "0" to "255" are generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. , the random number written in the sixteenth latch register 103p is obtained by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing of making an affirmative determination. Then, the random number acquired in step S2611 is collated with the bonus transition table read out in step S2610 to determine whether or not the transition to ART state ST9 has been won (step S2612).

Shift to ART state ST9 When winning is made (step S2612: YES), the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2613). After that, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2614). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect side MPU 92 executes in the current game an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the bonus state of this time ends.

Next, the bonus state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus state processing is executed in step S2416 in the bonus processing (FIG. 56). Since the bonus processing is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the bonus state processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. be.

If game media have been given in the current game (step S2701: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state (step S2703). Specifically, when the current bonus state is the BB state ST3, it is determined whether or not the BB end reference number (for example, "350") is exceeded, and when the current bonus state is the RB state ST4, is greater than or equal to the RB termination reference number (for example, "150").

If affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the condition is that the gaming state at the timing when the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is won is the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2704: YES). Alternatively, on the condition that the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2705: YES), the ready state setting process is executed (step S2706). In the setting process, the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, the information of the main side RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state after the end of the bonus state this time becomes the preparation state ST8.

When a negative determination is made in step S2705, or when the processing of step S2706 is executed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state is ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2707). Information indicating which of the normal game state ST1 and the preparation state ST8 the game state after the bonus state ends is set in the bonus end command. Upon receiving the bonus end command, the effect-side MPU 92 starts an effect indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the end of the effect, an effect corresponding to the game state after the bonus state ends. let it start.

After that, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2708). The main ending effect flag, which will be described in detail later, is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the ending effect is being executed when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games. be. If a negative determination is made in step S2708, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S2709).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state, thereby ending the bonus state. can be clearly recognized by the player. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

<Regarding ART state ST9>
Next, the ART state ST9 will be explained. First, the preparation state processing executed in the preparation state ST8 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The preparation state process is executed at step S1706 in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the preparation state processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

First, it is determined whether or not any winning number of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination (step S2801). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the direct addition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S2802). In this case, the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the winning number and the number of games with a larger expected number of winning games is set. In addition, the top-up table is common between set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the top-up winning probability and the number of top-up expected games differs depending on the set value. It is good also as a structure with.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2803). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the direct addition lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is transferred from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S2803 is collated with the add-on table read out in step S2802 to determine whether or not the add-on win has been made (step S2804). Specifically, in the direct addition table, a lottery result indicating that the number of games to be added is "0" is set, and a plurality of lottery results for the number of games to be added that is one game or more are set. there is In step S2804, it is determined whether or not any of the lottery results for the number of additional games equal to or greater than one game has been selected.

If the direct addition is won (step S2804: YES), the addition setting process is executed (step S2805). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 . After that, in the preparation state ST8, an addition command in preparation indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2806). Information about the number of added games that have occurred this time is set in the added command. By receiving the addition command being prepared, the effect side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of additional games selected this time has been awarded.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, if a negative determination is made in step S2804, or if the process of step S2806 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning has been established in this game (step S2807). ). If the 2nd RT replay winning has been established (step S2807: YES), it means that an opportunity to shift from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 has occurred, so ART start processing is executed (step S2808). In the ART start process, information is set in the master side RAM 74 so that the ART state process of step S1707 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state becomes ART state ST9.

In addition, in the ART start processing, if the game state before the preparation state ST8 is started is the bonus state and the game state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST9, it means that the game state has returned to the ART state ST9. Therefore, a setting is made to return to the game state in the ART state ST9 immediately before shifting to the bonus state. However, if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added in the bonus state, the state in which the number of games to be continued is added is returned to the ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART start processing, when the present preparation state ST8 is triggered by winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, this precursor state ST6, or chance state ST7, , the information of 50 games, which is the number of games started in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 74 . In this case, if the game state before the preparation state ST8 is the bonus state and in addition to the winning for the transition to the ART state ST9 in the bonus state, the additional winning for the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has occurred. , the ART state ST9 is started in a state in which the number of continuous games given to the additional winning is added. Further, in the preparation state ST8, when the additional winning of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 occurs, the number of continuous games given to the additional winning is added to the ART state ST9. will be started.

After that, an ART start command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2809). The ART start command is set with information indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 this time corresponds to a return to the ART state ST9. Information indicating that 50 games have been awarded is set as the number of games to be started in ST9. By receiving the ART start command, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has started, and after the effect ends, the effect corresponding to the ART state ST9 is executed. make it Further, when the ART state ST9 is returned, the effect-side MPU 92 resumes the execution state of the effect at the timing when the ART state ST9 ended in the middle of the previous time.

<Regarding the addition in ART state ST9>
Next, the addition in the ART state ST9 will be explained.

FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 61(a), the main RAM 74 is provided with an ART game number counter 121, a B loop continuation counter 122, and a provisional setting flag 123. FIG. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games in which the B-loop, which will be described later, continues in which the number of games continued in the ART state ST9 is added to each game. The provisionally set flag 123 mainly indicates whether or not the winning is directly added in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) when one game is started in the ART state ST9. This is a flag for identification by the side MPU 72 .

FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the effect side RAM 94 used by the effect side MPU 92 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 61(b), the effect side RAM 94 is provided with an ART subtraction target counter 125, a display counter 126, a stock game number counter 127, and a stock area 128 for special addition effect.

The ART subtraction target counter 125 is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the effect-side MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. When the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 becomes "0", an effect indicating whether or not the ART state ST9 ends is executed.

The display counter 126 is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the effect side MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST9, similarly to the ART subtraction target counter 125 . In the ART state ST9, the value set in the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

The number-of-stock-games counter 127 is a counter in which the difference between the actual remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 is set. In other words, the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is a counter for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9, which the player has not been notified of but has actually acquired.

A stock area 128 for the special addition effect contains information indicating that a special addition effect, which is an effect as if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added over a plurality of games, should be executed, and the type of the special addition effect. This is an area for storing information about

Next, the addition processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The addition process is executed in step S619 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). The processing of this step S619 is executed after the determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not it is in the ART state ST9 (step S2901). If it is not in the ART state ST9, the processing after step S2902 is not executed. As a result, the processing after step S2902 is not executed in game states other than the ART state ST9.

Here, for example, either BB winning data or RB winning data may be set in the middle of the ART state ST9, but in the bonus internal state ST2 in which these bonus winning data are set, the processing after step S2902 is executed. not. Even if the bonus internal state ST2 is reached in the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained unless the conditions for shifting to the normal section SC1 as described above are satisfied, and the advantageous section SC2 remains in the bonus state thereafter. maintained. Further, if the transition to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 occurs in the middle of the ART state ST9, the processing after step S2902 is not executed regardless of whether or not the transition has passed through the bonus internal state ST2. In this case, after the bonus state ends, the state returns to the ART state ST9 via the preparation state ST8. It will be the situation just before it is done. For example, if the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of the A loop, which will be described later, the A loop is resumed after returning to the ART state ST9, and if the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of the B loop, which will be described later, the ART After returning to state ST9, the B loop is restarted. This is the same for the effect in the effect side MPU 92 .

If it is in the ART state ST9 (step S2901: YES) and the processing of steps S2902 to S2905 has been executed, the processing from step S2906 onwards is executed. In the processing after step S2906, as processing for determining whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, generation lottery processing for direct addition, generation lottery processing for A loop, and generation lottery processing for B loop. and The direct addition is an addition mode in which an addition is generated only in a game that is won in a direct addition lottery process, and the number of the additional games is notified to the player. On the other hand, in loops A and B, a fixed number of additional games (specifically, 50 games) is given to each game while the continuous lottery process continues to win. However, even if the number of additional games is given in loop A and loop B, the number of additional games is not immediately notified to the player, and the number of additional games is notified to the player when the notification condition is met. be done. In addition, the A loop and the B loop differ in the conditions for transition to these additional states, and also in the mode of informing the player of the number of additional games.

In step S2906, a process for direct addition is executed. In the direct addition process, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 to the current game, and if an addition is to be generated, the number of games to be added is determined. In the direct addition processing, the number of additional games may be determined based on the processing result of the regular lottery processing executed in step S406 of the normal processing (FIG. 13). Therefore, first, the regular lottery process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing regular lottery processing.

First, it is determined whether or not it is in the ART state ST9 (step S3001). If it is not in the ART state ST9 (step S3001: NO), the normal lottery process is terminated as it is. As a result, when the game state is other than the ART state ST9, the processing after step S3002 is not executed.

If it is in the ART state ST9 (step S3001: YES), the common addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3002). FIG. 64(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the common addition table. A random number corresponding to winning is set in the common addition table so that the probability of winning the direct addition is 5%. In addition, only one type of additional game number is set in the case of a direct addition winning, and specifically, it is 10 games. Here, the regular lottery process is executed before the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 13). Therefore, the lottery process is always executed regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17). In other words, the lottery process is always executed in the same manner regardless of whether any role is won or any role is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 17), The lottery process is always executed in the same manner regardless of the type of winning combination in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S3003). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the constant lottery process, the random number written in the fifteenth latch register 103o is acquired from the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers from "0" to "255" are generated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. The random number written in the fifteenth latch register 103o is acquired by the third dedicated random number circuit 102c at the timing of making an affirmative determination.

After that, the random number acquired in step S3003 is collated with the common addition table read out in step S3002 to determine whether or not a direct addition win has been made (step S3004). As already explained, since the common addition table is set with the random numbers corresponding to winning that are directly added to the winning table, in step S3004, the random number obtained in step S3003 is set to any of the random numbers corresponding to winning set in the common addition table. It is determined whether or not they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S3005).

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 65, the process for direct addition will be described. Direct addition processing is executed in step S2906 of the addition processing (FIG. 62).

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not any winning number of "4", "6", "8" and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination. If the affirmative determination is made in step S3101, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S3102 to S3107 is executed, and if the negative determination is made in step S3101, step The processing of steps S3102 to S3107 is not executed.

Winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV that give the same winning probability among set values "1" to "6". That is, in the lottery process of the role (FIG. 17), if the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" is won, the lottery of the role shown in steps S3102 to S3107 is performed. Execute the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the process (Fig. 17), and if the combination lottery process (Fig. 17) results in a loss or the winning probability is between the set values "1" to "6" If a different index value IV is won, the additional lottery process is not executed. In this way, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), step S3102 to step S3107 are performed under the condition that the winning index value IV has the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". Predict the set value based on the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process by executing the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 17). However, it is possible to make it impossible.

In the addition lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), first, the direct addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3102). FIG. 64(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the direct addition table. In the direct addition table, the winning probability and the range of the number of games to be added in the case of winning are set corresponding to the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15".

Specifically, for the winning number "4", a random number corresponding to winning is set so that the winning probability is 10%, and 15 to 30 games are set as the number of additional games. The numbers of games to be added to the 15th to 30th games are 15 games, 20 games, 25 games, and 30 games. A random number corresponding to winning is set so that the winning number "6" has a winning probability of 25%, and the number of additional games is set to 20 to 40 games. The number of additional games of 20 games to 40 games is 20 games, 25 games, 30 games, 35 games, and 40 games, and the random number corresponding to winning directly added is associated with one of these additional game numbers. . For the winning number "8", a random number corresponding to winning is set so that the winning probability is 60%, and 25 to 50 games are set as the number of additional games. The number of games to be added to the 25th to 50th games is 25 games, 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games, and the random number corresponding to winning directly to be won is associated with one of these numbers of games to be added. A random number corresponding to winning is set so that the winning number "15" has a winning probability of 100%, and the number of additional games is set to 50 to 100 games. The number of games to be added to the 50th to 100th games is 50 games and 100 games, and the random number corresponding to winning directly to be won is associated with one of these numbers of games to be added.

When the add-on lottery process is executed using the add-on table as described above, the probability of winning the add-on lottery is the same as when the add-on lottery process is executed using the common add-on table in the regular lottery process (Fig. 63). It is a higher probability than the probability of winning directly. In addition, the number of additional games selected by winning a direct addition is more likely to be determined by using the common addition table in the constant lottery processing (FIG. 63) when the additional lottery process is executed using the direct addition table. The number of games is larger than when the additional lottery process is executed. This makes it possible to make the advantage of executing the additional lottery process using the direct addition table higher than the advantage of always executing the lottery process.

In addition, in order to make the advantage of executing the additional lottery process using the direct addition table higher than the advantage of constantly executing the lottery process, the additional lottery process using the direct addition table is required. A configuration in which the expected value of the number of added games selected when executed is higher than the expected value of the number of added games selected when the added lottery processing is executed using a common addition table in the constant lottery processing. may be In this case, the number of add-on games selected when the add-on lottery process is executed using the direct add-on table is less than the number of add-on games selected when the add-on lottery process is executed using the common add-on table. A configuration in which a smaller number of games is set may also be used.

After executing the processing of step S3102, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S3103). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the direct addition process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is transferred from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

After that, the random number acquired in step S3103 is collated with the add-on table read out in step S3102 to determine whether or not the add-on win has been made (step S3104). If it corresponds to any of the additional game numbers (step S3104: YES), an additional setting process is executed (step S3105). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 . Thereafter, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3106). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded.

After that, the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As already explained, the provisional setting flag 123 is set to "1" by winning directly in the lottery process (FIG. 63). In this case, by setting the provisional setting flag 123 to be cleared to "0" in step S3107, even if it is directly added in the regular lottery process (Fig. 63), the role lottery process (Fig. 17) In the case that the direct addition lottery process corresponding to the result of (1) is won, the result of the direct addition winning in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the additional number of games from being awarded in duplicate, and it is possible to target the number of additional games on the side where the player has a higher degree of advantage.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101 or if a negative determination is made in step S3104, it is determined whether or not the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3108). In other words, it is determined whether or not the direct winning is achieved in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3108, an addition setting process is executed (step S3109). Specifically, the number of ART games counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 is added to the value of "10", which is the fixed number of additional games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3110). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded. After that, the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3111).

FIG. 66 is a time chart showing how the number of additional games is increased by the constant lottery processing (FIG. 63) and the additional processing (FIG. 65). FIG. 66(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 66(b) shows the timing at which the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed, and FIG. 66(c) shows the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). FIG. 66(d) shows the timing of execution of the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), and FIG. 66(e) shows the number of ART games in the main RAM 74. It shows the timing at which the number of additional games is added to the counter 121 .

First, the case where both the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) and the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) are executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), one game is newly started at the timing of t1, and the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. , and at the subsequent timing t2, the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed as shown in FIG. 66(c). In this case, one of winning numbers "4", "6", "8" and "15" is selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, at the timing t3 after that, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed.

In this case, if the player wins directly in the extra lottery process, the number of extra games selected in the extra lottery process is stored in the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66(e). is added. On the other hand, even if the additional lottery process does not result in an additional game, if the previous regular lottery process (Fig. 63) results in an additional game, a fixed additional game number is determined. is added to the number-of-ART-games counter 121 of the main side RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66(e).

Next, a description will be given of a case where the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed but the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), one game is newly started at timing t4, and as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t5, the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed as shown in FIG. 66(c). In this case, none of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8" and "15" are selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, in the current game, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) is not executed.

However, in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) executed at the timing of t4, the winning is directly added. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the fixed additional game number is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66(e).

As described above, the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed regardless of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). As a result, it is possible to provide the additional number of games in the ART state ST9 regardless of the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect an additional number of games to be awarded in each game in the ART state ST9.

When the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the combination is a predetermined result, the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the combination is executed. Then, in the case where the player wins directly in the additional lottery process, the number of games selected in the additional lottery process is awarded regardless of the result of the regular lottery process (FIG. 63). As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which an additional number of games is awarded in a mode corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17).

Returning to the explanation of the process for adding (FIG. 62), after executing the process for adding directly (step S2906), "4" to "8", "15", "16" in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is set (step S2907). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2907, by determining whether or not "1" is set to either the A loop flag or the B loop flag of the main RAM 74, the current state is during the A loop and the B loop. (step S2908). When a negative determination is made in step S2908, generation lottery processing of A loop is executed. Specifically, first, the A-loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2909). The A-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the generation lottery process for the current A-loop, and the set values of "1" to "6" are common. ing.

FIG. 67(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A-loop lottery table. The A-loop lottery table contains, as the lottery results, the result of losing, the selection result of the first continuation lottery table, the selection result of the second continuation lottery table, the selection result of the third continuation lottery table, and the result of the fourth continuation lottery table. There is a selection result. When any one of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is selected in the generation lottery process of the A loop, the generation lottery of the A loop is won. Further, in the A-loop lottery table, the selection rates of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables are the same, but the selection rate may be different from each other without being limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop differs according to the type of the winning number that triggered the execution of the occurrence lottery process of the A loop. For example, the A-loop lottery table may be set so that a winning number with a low winning probability has a higher probability of winning an A-loop. Also, although the A-loop lottery table is common among the set values "1" to "6", the probability of winning the A-loop may differ depending on the set value.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the first to fourth continuation lottery tables are set with data that determine the continuation rate of the A loop according to the number of games in which the A loop continues. In this case, the continuation rates are set differently depending on the types of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables. Specifically, the continuation rate of the first game is set to 90% in the first continuation lottery table, 50% in the second continuation lottery table, and 30% in the third continuation lottery table. 10% is set in the fourth continuation lottery table. As the continuation rate of the second game, the first continuation lottery table is set to 10%, the second continuation lottery table is set to 20%, the third continuation lottery table is set to 30%, and the fourth continuation lottery table is set to 30%. 90% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate of the third game, the first continuation lottery table is set to 10%, the second continuation lottery table is set to 20%, the third continuation lottery table is set to 30%, and the fourth continuation lottery table is set to 30%. 30% is set in the lottery table. As the continuation rate for the 4th to 10th games, 10% is set for the first continuation lottery table, 20% is set for the second continuation lottery table, and 30% is set for the third continuation lottery table. 10% is set in the fourth continuation lottery table. Then, when the A loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. In other words, the continuation lottery table to be used is looped and used in each cycle with 10 games as one cycle.

Returning to the description of the addition processing (FIG. 62), after reading the A-loop lottery table in step S2909, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2910). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the A-loop generation lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S2910 is collated with the A loop lottery table read out in step S2909 to determine whether or not the A loop has been generated and won (step S2911).

If the A loop is generated and won (step S2911: YES), the A loop flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2912). As a result, the addition of the A loop will occur from the next game. Also, the continuation lottery table selected using the A loop lottery table in step S2911 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2913).

After that, addition processing of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2914). In the addition process, the ART game number counter 121 is incremented by "10". As a result, when the A-loop generation is won in the game in which the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is "0", it is possible to continue the ART state ST9 and generate an addition by the A-loop. Become. In addition, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even when a direct addition is won. As a result, when an addition of 10 games is generated with the occurrence of the A loop as a trigger, the player cannot distinguish whether it is due to the direct addition or due to the occurrence of the A loop. becomes possible.

Thereafter, an A loop winning command indicating that the A loop has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2915). The A-loop winning command includes not only information indicating that the A-loop has been won, but also information indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been incremented by "10" and the number of the advantageous interval SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. Information on the number of continuous games is also set. By receiving the A-loop winning command, the effect side MPU 92 executes an expectation effect for making the player expect that a special addition to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 will occur.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2907, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the A loop flag or the B loop flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether it is in any of the loops (step S2916). If a negative determination is made in step S2916, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter provided in the main RAM 74 has reached or exceeded the cycle reference value (step S2917). The cycle counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the timing of executing the B loop generation lottery process, and a new game is started in the ART state ST9 and neither the A loop nor the B loop. is added by 1, and is cleared to "0" by executing the generation lottery process of the B loop. "100" is set as the cycle reference value. Therefore, when 100 or more games have been executed in the ART state ST9 and neither the A loop nor the B loop, the generation lottery process for the B loop is executed.

Here, even if the value of the cycle counter becomes equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, the generation lottery processing of the B loop is not executed when the generation lottery processing of the direct addition or the generation lottery processing of the A loop is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of lottery processes that occur redundantly at the start of one game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 72 .

If the value of the cycle counter is greater than or equal to the cycle reference value (step S2917: YES), the generation lottery process of the B loop after step S2919 is executed. Also, even if the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, even if the winning number "41" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S2918: YES). , the generation lottery process of the B loop after step S2919 is executed. The winning number "41" corresponds to the index value IV=17 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22), and only the normal replay winning data is set for the winning combination.

In the B loop generation lottery process, first, the B loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2919). The B-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the generation lottery process of the current B-loop, and the set values of "1" to "6" are common. ing.

FIG. 67(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B-loop lottery table. In the B-loop lottery table, as the lottery results, the result of losing, the selection result of the 5th continuation lottery table, the selection result of the 6th continuation lottery table, the selection result of the 7th continuation lottery table, and the 8th continuation lottery table. There is a selection result. If any one of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is selected in the B loop generation lottery process, the B loop generation lottery is won. In this case, the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop is set lower than the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop, but the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop is the same or substantially the same as the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop. The configuration may be the same, or the configuration may be such that the probability of winning the occurrence of the B loop is set higher than the probability of winning the occurrence of the A loop. In the B-loop lottery table, the selection rates of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables are the same.

It should be noted that the probability of winning the B loop is different between when the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value and when the winning number "41" is set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which For example, the former may have a higher probability of winning the B loop than the latter, and the former may have a lower probability of winning the B loop than the latter. Also, although the B-loop lottery table is common among the setting values "1" to "6", it may be configured such that the probability of winning the B-loop is different according to the setting value.

In the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables, as shown in FIG. 67(b), data are set that determine the continuation rate of the B loop according to the number of games in which the B loop continues. In this case, the continuation rates are set differently depending on the types of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables. Specifically, the continuation rate of the first game is set to 10% in the fifth continuation lottery table, 100% in the sixth continuation lottery table, and 25% in the seventh continuation lottery table. 60% is set in the eighth continuation lottery table. As the continuation rate of the second game, the fifth continuation lottery table is set at 90%, the sixth continuation lottery table is set at 50%, the seventh continuation lottery table is set at 80%, and the eighth continuation lottery table is set at 80%. 60% is set in the lottery table. The continuation rate of the third game is set to 90% in the fifth continuation lottery table, 100% in the sixth continuation lottery table, 80% in the seventh continuation lottery table, and eighth continuation lottery table. 60% is set in the lottery table. The continuation rate of the 4th to 10th games is set to 90% in the fifth continuation lottery table, 50% in the sixth continuation lottery table, and 80% in the seventh continuation lottery table. 60% is set in the eighth continuation lottery table. Then, when the B loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. In other words, the continuation lottery table to be used is looped and used in each cycle with 10 games as one cycle.

Returning to the description of the addition processing (FIG. 62), after reading the B-loop lottery table in step S2919, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2920). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the generation lottery process of the B loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S2920 is collated with the B loop lottery table read out in step S2919 to determine whether or not the B loop has been generated and won (step S2921).

If the B loop is generated and won (step S2921: YES), the B loop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2922). As a result, the addition of the B loop will occur from the next game. Also, the continuation lottery table selected using the B loop lottery table in step S2921 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2923).

After that, addition processing of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2924). In the addition process, the ART game number counter 121 is incremented by "10". As a result, when the game in which the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is "0" and the occurrence of the B loop is won, the ART state ST9 can be continued to generate an addition by the B loop. Become.

In step S2924, instead of a command indicating that the B loop has been won, a direct addition command corresponding to the addition of 10 games is transmitted. Information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set in the direct addition command. By receiving the direct addition command, the effect side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of additional games of 10 games has been awarded. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to winning the B loop is not executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is internally added in a situation that the player does not recognize. By the way, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even when a direct winning is won. As a result, when an addition of 10 games is generated with the occurrence and winning of the B loop as a trigger, the player cannot distinguish whether it is due to the direct addition or due to the occurrence and winning of the B loop. becomes possible.

Next, the A-loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. A-loop processing is executed in step S2903 when the A-loop flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the addition processing (FIG. 62) (step S2902: YES). As already explained, the addition processing is executed after the judgment of whether the winning combination is completed at the start of the game, so the A-loop processing is also executed after the completion of the judgment of the winning combination at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the number-of-ART-games counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S3201). That is, every time one game is executed in the A loop, 50 games are added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, an A loop addition command indicating that an addition due to the A loop has occurred is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3202). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the A loop addition command, it executes the process of adding the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94, but does not execute the effect corresponding to the reception of the A loop addition command. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added internally in situations that the player is not aware of.

After that, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuation lottery table to be used stored in the main RAM 74 among the first to fourth continuation lottery tables (step S3203). Specifically, a continuation rate pointer is provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" when the A loop is started. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set for the first game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate to be used this time. Also, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the A loop. Then, when the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set for the second game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is If it is "3", the continuation rate set for the third game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is "4" to "10". In any of the cases, the continuation rates set for the fourth and subsequent games in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables are the continuation rates to be used this time. Further, when the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value of "1". As a result, the continuation lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S3204). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery process of the A loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number acquired in step S3204 is collated with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S3203 to determine whether or not continuous winning has been achieved (step S3205).

If the winning continues (step S3205: YES), the value of the continuity rate pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3206). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10" (step S3207: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S3208). As a result, the continuation lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

On the other hand, if the continuous winning is not achieved (step S3205: NO), the A loop flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3209). This ends the A loop. After that, an A-loop end command indicating that the A-loop has ended is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S3210). Upon receiving the A-loop end command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes processing corresponding to the end of the A-loop.

As described above, in the A loop, every time one game is executed, the number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games, and the continuation lottery process of the A loop is executed. The continuation rate of this A continuation lottery process is determined as a scenario corresponding to the number of continuation games in the A loop in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables. Then, the A loop is continued while the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process of the A loop. As a result, it becomes possible to greatly increase the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 by forming an A loop.

Next, the B-loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The B loop processing is executed in step S2905 when the B loop flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the addition processing (FIG. 62) (step S2904: YES). As already explained, the addition processing is executed after the judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game, so the B-loop processing is also executed after the judgment of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the number-of-ART-games counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S3301). That is, every time a game is executed in the B loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. The number of games to be added is the same as the number of games to be added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time a game is executed in the A loop. As a result, the number of games to be added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the A loop and the B loop can be made to have the same advantage. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of games added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 for each game may be different between the A loop and the B loop, but may be substantially the same. The A loop may have a larger number of games than the B loop, or the B loop may have a larger number of games than the A loop.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 (step S3302). The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for specifying the number of games in which the B-loop continues, in the main MPU 72, as already described.

After that, a B loop addition command indicating that an addition by the B loop has occurred is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3303). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the B loop addition command, it executes the process of adding the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94, but does not execute the effect corresponding to the reception of the B loop addition command. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added internally in situations that the player is not aware of.

After that, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuation lottery table to be used stored in the main RAM 74 among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables (step S3304). Specifically, the main RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" when the B loop is started. Note that the continuation rate pointer is also used in the A loop, but since the A loop and the B loop do not occur at the same time, there is no problem even if it is shared between the A loop and the B loop.

When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set for the first game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate to be used this time. Also, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the B loop. Then, when the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set for the second game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is If it is "3", the continuation rate set for the third game in the 5th to 8th continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, and the continuation rate pointer has a value of "4" to "10". In any of the cases, the continuation rates set for the fourth and subsequent games in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables are the continuation rates to be used this time. Further, when the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value of "1". As a result, the continuation lottery table to be used among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S3305). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery process of loop B, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S3305 is collated with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S3304, thereby determining whether or not continuous winning has been achieved (step S3306).

If the winning continues (step S3306: YES), the value of the continuity rate pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3307). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10" (step S3308: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S3309). As a result, the continuation lottery table to be used among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

On the other hand, if the continuous winning is not achieved (step S3306: NO), the B loop flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3310). This ends the B loop.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 21 (step S3311). That is, it is determined whether or not the B loop has continued for 21 games or more.

Here, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 in each game, as already explained. Therefore, the situation where the B loop continues for 21 games or more means that the number of continued games of 1050 games or more has occurred in the B loop. In addition, even if an increase in the number of continuous games occurs in the B loop, the effect to notify that the increase has occurred is not performed each time, but in a situation where the B loop continues for 21 games or more, the B loop When is finished, an effect is performed in which the addition of the number of continuous games is notified collectively.

In this case, since the condition that the number of continuous games in the B loop is 21 games or more is set as a condition for performing the effect, it is possible to collectively notify the addition of 1000 games or more. . In other words, if 1000 games are added, it is sufficient for the B loop to continue for 20 games, but over the 20 games in which the B loop continues, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is also consumed. Therefore, if the B loop is started under the condition that the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is 10 games, it is necessary to complete the added number of games in the B loop from the 11th game of the B loop. occurs. In that case, since part of the 1000 games has already been completed before the 1000 games addition notification is executed, the effect of notifying the addition of 1000 games cannot be executed. On the other hand, as a condition for executing the effect of collectively notifying the addition in the B loop, the condition that the B loop continues for 21 games or more is set. Since the number of additional games generated is equal to or greater than the number of games completed in the B loop, it is possible to guarantee the notification of the additional games of 1000 games or more.

When the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 is 21 or more, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games to be played in the advantageous section SC2. (Specifically, 1500 games) is determined (step S3312). Then, when affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the process of step S3313 and step S3314 is not executed, so that the effect of collectively notifying the addition of 1000 games or more is not executed.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly terminated, and accordingly, even if the remaining number of continuous games remains in the ART state ST9, the ART state is reached. ST9 is forcibly terminated. In this case, even though the number of games exceeds the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section SC2, if the addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 including the number of games exceeding the upper limit of the number of games is notified, the number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9 will be added. If the number of continuous games reaches the upper limit number of games, the player may have a strong impression that the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 has been forcibly invalidated. This impression becomes stronger as the number of remaining continuous games increases. On the other hand, the sum of the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games to be continued in the advantage section SC2 (specifically, 1500 games). If it exceeds, the effect of collectively informing the addition of 1000 games or more is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantageous as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S3312, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S3313). Also, a special freeze command indicating that a special freeze effect should be executed is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3314). The special freeze command contains information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop.

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in the B loop process, the process waits in step S408 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, even when a new game is started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a waiting state to start rotating. In this state of waiting for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to start rotating, the effect-side MPU 92 executes a special freeze effect with the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in response to the reception of the special freeze command. be done. In the special freeze effect, an effect is executed in which an addition of 1000 games or more is collectively announced. In addition, since the special freeze command includes information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop, the directing MPU 92 determines ("the number of games continued in the B loop" - "the number of games played in the B loop. "number of games in loop B" divided by "number of games added to the number of games in ART state ST9 for each game in loop B (50 games)" rounded up to the nearest whole number") x "1 in loop B The number of games (50 games) to be added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is derived for each game, and the derivation result is reported. As a result, even if the number of games played in the B loop is taken into consideration, it is possible to collectively notify the addition of 1000 or more games that have not yet been played.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, or when the process of step S3314 is executed, the B loop continuation counter 122 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3315).

As described above, in the B loop, every time one game is executed, the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games, and the continuation lottery process of the B loop is executed. The continuation rate of this continuation lottery process is determined as a scenario corresponding to the number of continuation games in the B loop in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables. Then, the B loop is continued while the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process of the B loop. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 can be greatly increased by the B loop. Also, the number of games added in the B loop is notified to the player under the condition that the addition of 1000 games or more can be notified. As a result, it is possible to positively provide an impactful addition notification that 1000 games or more are added.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ART state process is executed at step S1707 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the ART state processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S3401). Then, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3402: YES), the ART end processing from step S3403 onwards is executed.

In the ART end processing, end processing of the ART state ST9 is executed first (step S3403). In the end processing, data setting is performed for shifting the game state from the ART state ST9 to the normal game state ST1. As a result, for example, the normal processing of step S1705 is executed in the corresponding processing (FIG. 44) at the end of the game.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued (step S3404). The number of games that can be continued is set to 1200 games. That is, it is determined whether or not the end timing of the ART state ST9 has come in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is 1200 games or less, which is the number of games that can be continued. The number of games that can be continued is set to the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games that can be continued in the advantageous section SC2, and is also set to the number of games that is less than the number of continuous games at which the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is started. ing.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3405). Winning values corresponding to advantageous maintenance winning are set in the advantage maintaining lottery table. The advantage maintenance lottery table is common regardless of the number of continued games in ART state ST9 ending this time and the number of game media acquired in ART state ST9. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types are set so that selection targets differ according to the number of media. For example, when the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is less than a predetermined number of games, an advantage maintenance lottery table with a higher probability of winning an advantage maintenance lottery may be selected than when the number of games is greater than the predetermined number of games. When the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 is less than a predetermined number, an advantage maintenance lottery table may be selected which has a higher probability of winning an advantage maintenance election than when the number is greater than the predetermined number. In this case, the smaller the profit obtained in the ART state ST9, the higher the probability that the advantageous section SC2 will be maintained after the ART state ST9 ends.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S3406). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for generating the advantage maintenance interval, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number obtained in step S3406 is collated with the advantage maintenance lottery table read out in step S3405, thereby determining whether or not an advantage maintenance lottery is won (step S3407).

If the winning is to maintain the advantage (step S3407: YES), a value (specifically "10") corresponding to the number of games to maintain the advantage is set in the advantage maintenance counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3408). As a result, even after the ART state ST9 ends, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 until the number of games for maintaining the advantage is completed. After that, an advantage maintenance command indicating that it has shifted to the advantage maintenance section is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S3409). By receiving the advantage maintenance command, the production side MPU 92 executes the production corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9, and also executes the production corresponding to the advantage maintenance section after the end of the production. to

If a negative determination is made in step S3404, or if a negative determination is made in step S3407, an ART end command indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3410). The effect side MPU 92 receives the ART end command so that the effect corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9 is executed, and after the end of the effect, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not the advantageous maintenance section is executed. be executed.

<Production in ART state ST9>
Next, the effect in the ART state ST9 will be explained. First, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71, the outline of the effects that occur in the ART state ST9 will be described. 71(a) shows the execution period of the A loop, FIG. 71(b) shows the execution period of the B loop, FIG. 71(c) shows the generation timing of the direct addition, and FIG. 71(e) shows the execution period of the special additional effect, FIG. 71(f) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect, and FIG. 71(g) shows the execution period of the stock release effect. 71(h) shows the execution period of the ending effect.

At the timing of t1 in the ART state ST9, as shown in FIG. 71(c), the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added directly to the main MPU 72. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71(d), over the period from timing t1 to timing t2, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the superimposed effect. In the direct addition effect, an effect corresponding to the occurrence of the direct addition to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed, and the image display device 63 displays an image showing the determined direct addition game number to the main side MPU 72. is displayed.

At the timing of t3 in the ART state ST9, the main MPU 72 starts loop A as shown in FIG. 71(a). At the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 71(e), although the special additional effect is not executed, the expectation effect that makes the player expect the occurrence of the special additional effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. be. The expected performance can be executed even in a situation where the special additional performance is not executed. When the expected performance is executed, the player expects that the special additional performance will occur after that. After that, at the timing of t4, the end timing of the expected performance is reached. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71(a), even if the main MPU 72 continues the A loop, as shown in FIG. A special add-on performance corresponding to the number of add-on games is started. The special add-on effect continues over a plurality of games, and the number of add-on games corresponding to the current execution of the special add-on effect is distributed and reported in each game of the plurality of games. For example, in the case of a special add-on effect that corresponds to the add-on of 100 games and continues over two games, the add-on of 50 games is notified in each game.

Even in the situation where the special extra effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 71(e), the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 in the main side MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71(c) at the timing of t5. 71(d), the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform the direct addition effect from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 71(d).

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at t7. In this case, in a situation where the A loop is being executed, it is determined to execute the special additional effect a plurality of times according to the number of additional games generated by the A loop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71(e), even after the A loop is finished, the special addition effect may be continuously executed. The special addition effect ends at the timing of t8.

At the timing of t9 in the ART state ST9, the main MPU 72 starts the B loop as shown in FIG. 71(b). At the timing of t9, the effect corresponding to the generation of the B loop is not executed. Even in a situation where loop B is being executed as shown in FIG. Due to the occurrence of the direct addition effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the direct addition effect from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 71(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the B loop ends at the main MPU 72 at the timing of t12. In this case, the number of continuous games in the B loop is 21 games or more. Therefore, although one game has started in the main MPU 72, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation, and as shown in FIG. A special freeze effect is executed by the lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In the special freeze effect, the number of games to be added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is notified as the number of games to be added to 1000 games or more.

After that, at the timing of t14, the number of continuous games on the effect side counted by the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, when a value of 1 or more is set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 of the effect-side RAM 94, there is a remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 that is not subject to subtraction. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the stock release effect corresponding to the continuation of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15. be.

At the timing of t16 in the ART state ST9, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 corresponds to the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. This is the number of games that trigger the start of production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71(h), the ending effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 at the timing of t16. Then, the ending effect continues until timing t17 when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Hereinafter, the processing contents of the effect-side MPU 92 for enabling execution of various effects as described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an extraordinary effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, the non-normal effect control processing is performed in the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds). ) is executed repeatedly.

When the ending effect command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3501: YES), the effect side ending effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3502). Then, when the effect-side ending effect flag is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), an ending effect process is executed (step S3504). The ending effect processing will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S3503, it is determined whether or not an addition command being prepared has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3505). The add-on command under preparation is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 by winning the add-on win in the add-on lottery process in the preparatory state ST8 as already explained. If the add-on command in preparation has been received (step S3505: YES), the number of add-on games this time set in the add-on command in preparation is displayed in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the production side RAM 94 respectively. (step S3506). By being added to the ART subtraction object counter 125, the current number of added games becomes the object of subtraction after the transition to the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of added games of this time is added. After the resulting number of continued games is shifted to the ART state ST9, it is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

After that, an additional effect setting process in preparation is executed (step S3507). In the addition effect setting process during preparation, an addition table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to enable the execution of an effect indicating that the number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9 is increased in the preparation state ST8. The addition table corresponds to the number of games added this time. Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the add-on table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the direct add-on effect, and an image showing the number of add-on games this time is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63 .

It should be noted that, as already explained, the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 may be added even in the bonus state. In this case, the main MPU 72 transmits an add-on command during the bonus. When the production side MPU 92 receives the bonus addition command from the main side MPU 72, the production side RAM 94 stores the number of games to be added this time set in the bonus addition command in other production processing (step S3520). The ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 are added. Further, an addition table is read which enables execution of an effect indicating that an addition to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has occurred in the bonus state. The addition table corresponds to the number of games added this time. Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the add-on table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the direct add-on effect, and an image showing the number of add-on games this time is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3505, or if the process of step S3507 is executed, it is determined whether or not an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3508). The ART start command is sent from the master side MPU 72 when the ART state ST9 is started as already explained. If the ART start command has been received (step S3508: YES), based on the information set in the ART start command, it is determined whether or not the current transition to ART state ST9 corresponds to return to ART state ST9. (Step S3509).

If it does not correspond to the return to the ART state ST9 (step S3509: NO), the start game number (specifically 50 games) corresponding to the new start of the ART state ST9 set in the ART start command is stored in the production side RAM 94. is added to each of the ART subtraction counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3510). In this case, in the bonus state and the preparation state ST8 before the start of the ART state ST9, if the addition of the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 does not occur, the respective values of the ART subtraction counter 125 and the display counter 126 is "50" corresponding to the number of starting games. On the other hand, in the bonus state and the preparation state ST8 before the start of the ART state ST9, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added, the number of games generated by the addition is added to the number of starting games. The added value is set in the ART subtraction counter 125 and the display counter 126 .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3509, or when the processing of step S3510 is executed, ART start effect setting processing is executed (step S3511). In the ART start effect setting process, if this time is not a return of ART state ST9 but a new start of ART state ST9, an ART start effect table corresponding to the start of ART state ST9 and an ART corresponding to ART state ST9 are set. A medium performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加First, the MPU 92 on the production side controls the execution of the production according to the ART start production table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the production corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9. At the same time, after that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the effect table during ART, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the ART state ST9. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, in the ART start effect setting process, when the return of the ART state ST9 is performed this time, data setting is performed for returning to the execution contents of the effect immediately before the ART state ST9 was interrupted. The data for specifying the execution contents of the performance of the return destination is stored in the performance side RAM 94 when the ART state ST9 is interrupted. Then, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the performance table stored in the performance side RAM 94 by setting the data for returning, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 The effect corresponding to the ART state ST9 is resumed. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

If a negative determination is made in step S3508, or if the process of step S3511 is executed, a direct addition effect process is executed in step S3512, an A loop effect process is executed in step S3513, and a loop effect process is executed in step S3514. Execute the B-loop effect processing. These processes will be described later in detail.

After that, when a game start command indicating a new start of one game is received from the main side MPU 72 in the situation of the ART state ST9 (step S3515 and step S3516: YES), the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the effect side RAM 94 is changed. 1 is subtracted and 1 is subtracted from the value of the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3517). Then, if the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3518: YES), stock release processing is executed (step S3519). The stock release process will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the production|presentation control process for non-normals, the process for production|presentations other than the said various processes is performed (step S3520). In the other processing for effect, a process for performing execution control of the effect in the game state of bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4 or preparation state ST8 is executed.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the process for direct addition effect of step S3512 in the effect control process for abnormal (FIG. 72).

First, it is determined whether or not a direct addition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3601). As already explained, the direct add-on command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the direct add-on win is won in the direct add-on generation lottery process in the ART state ST9 or when the B loop is set. Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 is also set.

If the direct addition command is received (step S3601: YES), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the direct addition command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the stock game number counter 127 and the number of additional games that occurred this time set in the direct addition command exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") of the advantageous section SC2 ( step S3602). That is, even if the number of additional games generated this time is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9, at least part of the added number of additional games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether or not it will be done. As described above, not only the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also the value of the stock game number counter 127 is referred to determine whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded. Inform the player of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 (that is, the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) that is not subject to notification to the player, and add it by the immediate addition that occurred this time. It is possible to give priority to the number of games.

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the number of added games that occurred this time is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3603). By being added to the ART subtraction object counter 125, the number of games added this time becomes the object of subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of games added this time is added to the continuation game. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the sum of the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the addition command received this time, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the number of stock games counter 127. exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") of the advantageous section SC2 (step S3604). In other words, without adding the number of additional games that occurred this time, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded by using up the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that has already been given. judge.

If a negative determination is made in step S3604, the sum of the number of continuous games in the current advantageous interval SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval SC2. The resulting number of games is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 as the number of additional games generated this time (step S3605). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games after this adjustment becomes the target of subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of additional games after this adjustment is added. The resulting number of continued games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. By adding the added number of games after this adjustment to each of the ART subtraction counter 125 and the display counter 126, it is possible to add the number of games within the range of the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2.

When the processing of step S3603 or step S3605 is executed, it is determined whether or not the special addition effect is currently being executed (step S3606). The special extra effect is a kind of effect for notifying the player of the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. The special additional effect is an effect that is performed when, for example, the A loop occurs, and as already described, an effect is executed as if the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added over a plurality of games.

If the special add-on effect is not being executed (step S3606: NO), normal add-on effect setting processing is executed (step S3607). In the direct addition effect setting processing, a normal direct addition table is set from the effect side ROM 93 to enable the execution of an effect indicating that the number of games added this time has been added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. It is read out and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . By performing the performance execution control in the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal direct addition table, the direct addition performance is executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and the number of games added this time is increased. The image shown is displayed on the image display device 63 .

If the special add-on effect is being executed (step S3606: YES), a direct add-on effect setting process during the special add-on effect is executed (step S3608). In the direct addition effect setting process, while continuing the currently executed special addition effect, an effect indicating that the number of games added this time to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 has occurred is executed. A direct addition table during the special addition performance to be made possible is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加Direct addition in the situation where the special addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by performing execution control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the direct addition table during the special addition effect. Along with the performance being executed, an image showing the number of additional games for this time is displayed on the image display device 63 . As a result, even if the special addition effect is being performed, the direct addition effect will be executed. It is possible for the player to expect not only the number of games to be generated but also the number of additional games to be generated based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the winning combination in each game.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3604, the number of additional games generated this time is not added to any of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the display counter 126, and the number of stock games counter 127, and a direct addition effect is also executed. do not. As a result, when it is already confirmed that the number of games exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to prevent the direct addition effect from being executed.

Next, the A-loop effect processing executed in step S3513 in the non-normal effect control processing (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the expected effect is being executed by the A loop (step S3701). The expected effect by the A loop is an effect that is executed before the special additional effect is executed, and continues over three games as the execution period of the expected effect. In the expected effect by the A loop, an effect is executed that enables the player to expect the occurrence of the special additional effect in each game included in the execution period of the expected effect. By executing the expected effect by the A loop in this way, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the special additional effect.

The false expectation effect can be executed even in a situation where the A loop is not generated and the special additional effect is not executed. When the expected performance by the A loop is started, the false expected performance is added by 10 games, which is the same as the number of the added games, corresponding to the addition of 10 games based on the winning of the A loop. It is started following execution of the direct addition effect. Then, the false expectation effect is continued over three games as the execution period of the expected effect, similarly to the expected effect of the A loop, and is also executed in the expected effect of the A loop in each game included in the execution period of the expected effect. The effect to obtain is executed. By executing the false expected performance in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special additional performance will be executed after the expected performance is executed in the ART state ST9.

If the expected effect by the A loop is not being executed (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether or not an A loop winning command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3702). The A loop winning command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the main MPU 72 shifts to the A loop as already described. If the A-loop winning command has been received (step S3702: YES), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the A-loop winning command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the number of stock games. The sum of the value of the counter 127 and "10", which is information on the number of additional games set in the A-loop win command, exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") of the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3703).

In other words, even if the number of games to be added when the A loop is won this time is added to the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state ST9, at least the number of games to be added is at least It is determined whether or not some of them will be invalidated. As described above, not only the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also the value of the stock game number counter 127 is referred to determine whether or not the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded. A loop newly generated this time to notify the player of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 (that is, the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) that is not subject to notification to the player and complete it. It is possible to give priority to the number of additional games at the start of .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, even if the A loop is being executed by the main MPU 72, the expected effect by the A loop is not executed and the special additional effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of an effect that notifies of a further increase in the number of continuous games, even though it has already been confirmed that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded. Become.

When a negative determination is made in step S3703, an expected effect start setting process is executed (step S3704). In the start setting process, the performance side reads out from the performance side ROM 93 a direct addition table at the time of winning the A loop, which enables the execution of the performance indicating that the addition of 10 games, which is the number of games to be added at the time of winning the A loop, has occurred. It is stored in the RAM 94. An execution pattern of the expected performance to be executed this time is determined by lottery over the execution period of the expected performance, and an expected performance table corresponding to the execution pattern determined by the lottery is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加. In this case, in the expectation performance by the A loop, the performance with a higher execution expectation of the special additional performance is more likely to be selected than the false expectation performance. After the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the direct addition table, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the expected performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 First, the direct addition effect of 10 games is executed, and an image showing the number of additional games of the current 10 games is displayed on the image display device 63, and then the expected effect is executed over the execution period of the expected effect. .

After that, the expected effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "3" corresponding to the execution period of the expected effect (step S3705). The expected effect counter is a counter for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the expected effect is being executed and the remaining number of games during the execution period of the expected effect. The value set in the expected effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly started.

Thereafter, "10" is added to each value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3706). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of games added this time becomes the target of subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of games added this time is added to the continuation game. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9.

After that, the A loop effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3707). The A-loop effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the main side MPU 72 is in the A-loop and that the effect corresponding to the A-loop should be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, or if the process of step S3707 is executed, it is determined whether or not the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". Determine (step S3708). If the A loop effect flag is set to "1" (step S3708: YES), on condition that the A loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3709: YES), the stock game number counter 127 is executed (step S3710). In loop A, as already explained, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed. 50” is added. If a negative determination is made in step S3709, or if the process of step S3710 is executed, a special addition effect process is executed (step S3711). The special addition effect processing will be described later in detail.

If the expected effect is being executed by the A loop (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not an opportunity to update the expected effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3712). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game has been newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the value of the expected performance counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the expected performance counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3714). . If the value of the expected effect counter is not "0" (step S3714: NO), an expected effect update setting process is executed (step S3715). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the current expected effect table to be referred to is performed according to the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the expected effect changes according to the number of games in which the expected effect continues.

On the other hand, when the value of the expected effect counter is "0" (step S3714: YES), a process for selecting a special added effect is executed (step S3716). FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing selection processing of a special add-on effect.

First, the sum of the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of extra games exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). It is determined whether or not there is (step S3801). The current number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 ascertained from the A-loop winning command when the A-loop winning command is received, plus the number of games completed after receiving the A-loop winning command. is derived by adding In addition, in the special addition performance, a performance is executed for making the player recognize that the number of games already stored in the stock game number counter 127 is added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of special addition effects. As shown in FIG. 76, as a special addition effect, a first special addition effect is performed in each of the two games to make it possible for the player to recognize the addition of the 50th game, A second special additional effect that makes the player aware of the addition of 100 games by performing effects as if 25 games were added in each of the 4 games, and a effect as if 50 games were added. A third special addition performance that makes the player recognize the addition of 100 games by being performed in each of the 2 games, and 150 games by performing the performance as if the addition of 50 games occurred in each of the 3 games. A fourth special add-on effect that allows the player to recognize the add-on, and a fourth special add-on effect that allows the player to recognize the add-on of the 200 game by performing each of the four games as if the add-on of the 50 games has occurred. A fifth special add-on effect and an effect similar to the addition of 100 games are performed in each of the two games, so that the player can recognize the addition of 200 games. A seventh special additional effect is performed in each of the three games so that the player can recognize the additional effect of the 300 games, and the effect of the additional effect of the 200 games is performed in each of the three games. An eighth special add-on effect that allows the player to recognize the add-on of 600 games by being performed is set. In this case, in the A loop, as already explained, 50 additional games are added every time one game is executed, so any of the first to eighth special additional effects are finally notified. The numbers are 50×n games (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). Since the first to eighth special add-on effects are set as described above, the minimum number of special add-on games is 50 games when the first special add-on effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special addition effect selection processing (FIG. 75), in step S3801, the number of games already completed in the current advantageous section SC2 and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 are notified to the player. It is determined whether or not the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the numbers and the number of games from the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the minimum number of extra extra games. Then, when the number of games to be added is not equal to or greater than the minimum number of special addition games, the special addition effect is not executed. As a result, even though the number of games to be added is reported as a special effect, part of the number of games to be added is invalidated due to the relationship with the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to prevent the event from occurring.

If a negative determination is made in step S3801, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the situation is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 (step S3802). Here, depending on the value stored in the number-of-stock-games counter 127, the number and types of special add-on effects that can be executed differ. Also, in the current ART state ST9, the sum of the number of games already played and the ART subtraction target counter 125 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 so that the remaining upper limit number of games is not exceeded. It is necessary to set the number and type of special effects to be added. Therefore, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read from the effect side ROM 93 .

In the special add-on lottery table, not only lottery results for selecting only one unit of special add-on performance but also lottery results for selecting a plurality of units of special add-on performance exist. For example, when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "800" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 800 games or more, the special add-on lottery table has a second special add-on effect → a fifth special add-on effect. There is a lottery result that determines the type of special add-on effect → 6th special add-on effect → 7th special add-on effect and the order of execution, and the type of special add-on effect is 5th special add-on effect → 8th special add-on effect. And there is a lottery result that determines the order of execution. In addition, the special add-on lottery table referred to when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "300" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 300 games or more includes the third special add-on effect→the sixth special add-on effect. There is a lottery result that determines the type and execution order of the special add-on effect, and there is also a lottery result that only the seventh special add-on effect is present.

Here, when a plurality of types of special add-on effects are selected, the type of special add-on effect having the greater number of games to be notified in total is executed later. As a result, when one unit of special add-on effect is executed following the end of one unit of special add-on effect, the one-unit special add-on effect on the rear side produces more than the one-unit special add-on effect on the front side. Since the number of additional games is notified, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a special addition effect of a type with a smaller number of games to be notified of is the total number of additional games to be executed in a later execution order. A configuration in which the execution order is set regardless of the number of games may be adopted.

After reading the special addition lottery table, the lottery processing for the special addition effect is executed (step S3803). In the lottery process, the current numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the special addition lottery table read in step S3802. The type of special add-on performance to be executed this time is specified, and when there are a plurality of types of special add-on performance to be executed this time, the order of execution is specified.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, it means that there is no room for executing the special additional effect in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" so as to disable execution of the special add-on effect (step S3804).

Returning to the description of the A-loop effect processing (FIG. 74), after executing the special addition effect selection process in step S3716, it is determined whether or not the value of the A-loop effect flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is "0". Determine (step S3717). If the value of the A loop effect flag is "0" (step S3717: YES), the execution of the special additional effect is not possible due to the relationship with the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, so the processes after step S3718 are executed. don't run

When the A loop effect flag is set to "1" (step S3717: NO), a setting process of special additional effect is executed (step S3718). In the setting process, the type of special add-on effect to be executed first selected in the special add-on effect selection process is grasped, and a special add-on effect table that enables execution of the grasped special add-on effect is stored in the effect-side ROM 93. , and stored in the performance-side RAM 94. In accordance with the stored special add-on effect table, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect, so that the special add-on effect to be executed this time on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is the special add-on effect. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the effect.

After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special added effect to be executed this time is set in the special added effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3719). For example, if the special add-on effect to be executed this time is the first special add-on effect, "2" is set, and if it is the fifth special add-on effect, "4" is set. The special add-on effect counter is a counter for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the special add-on effect is being executed and the remaining number of games during the execution period of the special add-on effect. The value set in the special addition performance counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly started.

After that, on condition that a plurality of units of special add-on effects are selected in the special add-on effect selection processing in step S3716 (step S3720: YES), stock processing for special add-on effects is executed (step S3721). As already explained, the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a stock area 128 for a special additional effect. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and is capable of storing information on the types of special addition effects waiting for execution in accordance with the execution order.

When a negative determination is made in step S3720, or when the process of step S3721 is executed, the total number of added games notified by the special added effect selected in the special added effect selection process in step S3716 is subject to ART subtraction. The number of added games is added to the counter 125 (step S3722), and the total number of added games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3723). In this case, when a plurality of units of special add-on effect is selected in the special add-on effect selection process in step S3716, the total number of added games notified by the plurality of units of special add-on effect is counted by the ART subtraction target counter. It is added to 125 and subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 .

However, addition processing to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition processing to the display counter 126 is performed every time the number of additional games is notified in accordance with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can correspond to the execution of the special addition effect. After executing the processing of step S3723, the processing of steps S3709 to S3711 already described is executed.

Next, the special addition effect processing executed in step S3711 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the special add-on effect is being executed (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether or not a trigger for updating the special add-on effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3902). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game has been newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special addition effect counter (step S3903). In addition, the number of additional games to be announced in the current game in the currently set special addition effect of 1 unit is grasped from the special addition effect table currently being referred to, and the grasped number of additional games is displayed. It is added to the counter 126 (step S3904). As a result, the number of additional games notified in the current game as a special additional effect is added to the display of the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63 . In addition, update setting processing of special addition production is executed (step S3905). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the special addition effect table currently being referred to is performed according to the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the special addition effect changes according to the number of games in which the special addition effect continues.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the special add-on effect counter in the effect-side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether or not the one-unit special add-on effect currently being executed has ended ( step S3906). If a negative determination is made in step S3906, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is equal to or greater than the creation reference value corresponding to the number of games in which a special addition effect of one unit can be newly created. (Step S3907). Specifically, the creation reference value is set to 50 games, which is the minimum number of extra extra games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3907, a creation lottery process is executed (step S3908). In the creation lottery process, the created lottery table stored in the ROM 93 on the performance side is collated with the numerical information read from the random number counter periodically updated in the RAM 94 on the performance side. The created lottery table is set so that the created lottery table has a probability of 50%. When it becomes creation lottery processing (step S3909: YES), it is determined whether or not the situation is such that it is possible to stock a special additional effect (step S3910).

Specifically, similar to step S3801 in the special addition effect selection process (FIG. 75), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special addition games (specifically "50" in the table), determines whether or not the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") of the advantageous section SC2 is exceeded. It is determined whether or not there is an empty area for stocking the information of the special addition effect. If the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is not exceeded and there is an empty area in the stock area 128 for the special addition effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S3910.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3910, midway lottery processing is executed (step S3911). In the midway lottery process, first, a special add-on lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the effect-side ROM 93 . Specifically, the type of special add-on effect that can be executed differs depending on the value stored in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 . Also, in the current ART state ST9, the sum of the number of games already played and the ART subtraction target counter 125 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2 so that the remaining upper limit number of games is not exceeded. It is necessary to set the type of special addition effect to . Therefore, the special addition lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read from the effect side ROM 93 . In this case, the special add-on lottery table read at step S3802 in the special add-on effect selection process (FIG. 75) has a lottery result in which a plurality of special add-on effects are selected at once, but in step S3911. There is no lottery result in which a plurality of special addition effects are selected at once in the special addition lottery table read out. In the midway lottery process, the numerical information of the random number counter periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read special addition lottery table. As a result, the type of special additional effect to be stocked this time is specified.

After that, a stock process for a special additional effect is executed (step S3912). As already explained, the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a stock area 128 for a special additional effect. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and is capable of storing information on the types of special addition effects waiting for execution in accordance with the execution order. In step S3912, the information of the type of the special addition effect selected in step S3911 is written in the area having the first execution order among the empty areas in the stock area 128 for the special addition effect.

After that, the total number of added games notified by the special added effect selected in step S3911 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3913), and the total number of added games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. (step S3914). However, addition processing to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition processing to the display counter 126 is performed every time the number of additional games is notified in accordance with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can correspond to the execution of the special addition effect.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S3906 in the special addition effect processing, that is, when the special addition effect which was in the middle of execution is completed, the stock of the special addition effect exists by referring to the stock area 128 of the special addition effect. (step S3915). When the stock exists (step S3915: YES), a setting process of special addition effect is executed (step S3916). In the setting process, information on the type of the special add-on effect stored in the area serving as the first execution order in the special add-on effect stock area 128 is grasped, and a special effect that enables execution of the grasped special add-on effect is obtained. An add-on performance table is read from a performance side ROM 93 and stored in a performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加In accordance with the stored special add-on effect table, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect, so that the special add-on effect to be executed this time on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is the special add-on effect. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the effect. After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special added effect to be executed this time is set in the special added effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3917).

If the stock does not exist (step S3915: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop end command has not yet been received from the main MPU 72 and the special addition effect can be created (step S3918). Specifically, regarding the determination of whether or not it is possible to create a special additional effect, similar to step S3801 in the special additional effect selection processing (FIG. 75), the number of continuous games in the current advantageous section SC2 and the number of ART It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the subtraction target counter 125 and the minimum special extra game number (specifically "50") exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically "1500") of the advantageous section SC2. judge.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3918, the kind of special addition effect is selected by lottery by executing lottery processing on the way in the same way as step S3911 (step S3919). Also in the midway lottery process in this case, one unit of special add-on effect is selected. Then, the setting processing of the special addition effect is executed (step S3920). In the setting process, the special addition effect table that enables the execution of the special addition effect selected in step S3919 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . In accordance with the stored special add-on effect table, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect, so that the special add-on effect to be executed this time by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is executed as the special add-on effect. It is executed over the number of continuous games corresponding to the effect. After that, the value of the number of continuous games corresponding to the special added effect to be executed this time is set in the special added effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3921).

After that, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect set to be executed this time is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3922), and the total number of additional games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. (step S3923). However, addition processing to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition processing to the display counter 126 is performed every time the number of additional games is notified in accordance with the execution of the special additional effect. As a result, the display content of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 can correspond to the execution of the special addition effect.

If the special addition effect is not being executed (step S3901: NO) and the expected effect is not being executed (step S3924: NO), it is determined whether or not the A loop end command has been received from the main side MPU 72 ( step S3925). The A loop end command is transmitted when the A loop ends in the main MPU 72 as already explained. If the A loop end command has been received (step S3925: YES), the A loop effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3926). By clearing the A-loop effect flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S3708 of the A-loop effect processing (FIG. 74), so the special addition effect processing is not executed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 78, a description will be given of how the expected effect and the special added effect are executed under the control of the effect-side MPU 92 when the A loop occurs in the main MPU 72 . FIG. 78(a) shows the execution period of the A loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 78(b) shows the expected performance execution period, FIG. 78(c) shows the special addition performance execution period, and FIG. d) indicates the period during which the special add-on effect is stocked.

First, the case where the special additional effect is not stocked will be described.

At the timing of t1, the main MPU 72 starts loop A as shown in FIG. 78(a). As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 each time one game is executed, although this is not notified to the player. Also, at the timing t1, the expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 78(b). As already explained, the expected effect is executed over three games regardless of whether or not the A loop continues in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. However, even if the A loop ends, the expected effect is continued because it is continuously executed over the three games.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the expected effect ends at the timing of t3. At the timing of t3, the number and type of special addition effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends early and the number of additional games stored in the stock game number counter 127 is small, so that one unit of special additional effect is selected. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the selected one-unit special addition effect is executed over the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. The special addition effect continues over a plurality of games, and the player is notified of the number of additional games in each game.

Next, a case where a special additional effect is stocked will be described.

At the timing of t5, the main MPU 72 starts loop A as shown in FIG. 78(a). As a result, every time one game is executed, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games. Also, at the timing of t5, the expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 78(b). As already explained, the expected effect is executed over three games regardless of whether or not the A loop continues in the main MPU 72 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the expectation effect ends as shown in FIG. 78(b) at the timing of t6 when the main MPU 72 continues the A loop. At the timing of t6, the number and type of special addition effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, it is decided to execute the special addition performance of 3 units. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 78(c), at the timing of t6, one unit of special additional effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 78(d), the execution of two units of special additional effect is stocked. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the one-unit special addition effect ends at the timing of t7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 78(d), execution of the special add-on effect is stocked, so the special add-on effect is newly started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 78(c). As shown in FIG. 78(a), since the main MPU 72 is still in the A loop, the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 in each game, although the player is not notified. ing.

After that, the A loop in the main side MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 78(a) at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the special add-on effect started at the timing of t8 is being executed. Further, at the timing of t10 after that, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the one-unit special addition effect ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 78(d), execution of the special add-on effect is stocked, so the special add-on effect is newly started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 78(c). By the start of the special add-on effect, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the execution of the special add-on effect is not stocked. After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the special addition effect ends.

Next, the B-loop effect processing executed in step S3514 in the non-normal effect control processing (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the B loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4001: YES), addition processing to the stock game number counter 127 is executed (step S4002). In the B loop, as already explained, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed. 50” is added.

When a negative determination is made in step S4001, or when the process of step S4002 is executed, it is determined whether or not a special freeze command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4003). The special freeze command is a case where the number of continuous games of the B loop in the main MPU 72 is 21 games or more, and the total number of games added by the B loop is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. This is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the number of games does not exceed the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 even if the number of games is increased. Also, as already explained, the situation in which the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more is not notified to the player at the end of the B loop, even if the number of games completed in the B loop is taken into account. 1000 or more games have been added. Therefore, when the special freeze command is received, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect in which the addition of 1000 games or more is notified.

If the special freeze command has been received (step S4003: YES), a special freeze effect start setting process is executed (step S4004). In the start setting process, information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop set in the special freeze command is grasped. Then, ("the number of games continued in the B loop" - "the number of games played in the B loop" is calculated as "the number of games to be added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games )", rounded up to the nearest whole number") x "the number of games (50 games) added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop" is derived as the number of special added games. Then, a special freeze performance table that enables notification of the derived number of special extra games is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加

In the special freeze effect table, information is set that enables the display of the derived number of special additional games, and information that enables execution of the special freeze effect is set. Also, since the special freeze effect is executed over the freeze period (specifically 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect set by the main MPU 72, any special freeze effect table indicating the number of additional games However, the execution period of the effect is set to the freeze period for the special freeze effect. 1000 or more games derived as described above are executed with the special freeze effect by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by executing the effect execution control by the effect side MPU 92 according to the special freeze effect table. The image display device 63 displays an image showing the number of additional games of .

After that, the derived number of special extra games is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and to the display counter 126 (step S4005). As a result, the number of special add-on games becomes the number of games to be subtracted as the games in the ART state ST9 are completed in the directing MPU 92, and the number of special add-on games is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. will be added. After that, the number of special add-on games is subtracted from the number-of-stock-games counter 127 (step S4006).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 80, how the special freeze effect is executed under the control of the effect-side MPU 92 when the B loop occurs in the main-side MPU 72 will be described. 80(a) shows the execution period of the B loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 80(b) shows the execution period of one game, and FIG. 80(c) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect.

First, the case where the special freeze effect is not executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the main MPU 72 starts the B loop as shown in FIG. 80(a). As a result, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed, although this is not notified to the player. When the A loop is started, the expected effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as already explained, but the expected effect triggered by the start of the B loop is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the B loop continues from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the timing of t5 to t6. One game is executed as shown in (b). Since each of these games is executed in the state of the B loop, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games in each game, and continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process of the B loop.

After that, one game is started as shown in FIG. 80(b) at timing t7 when the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80(a). By starting the one game, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games. However, in the continuation lottery process of the B loop, the continuation is lost. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 80(a). In this case, since the number of consecutive games in the B loop is not 21 or more, the special freeze effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 80(c).

Next, the case where the special freeze effect is executed will be described.

At the timing of t9, the main MPU 72 starts the B loop as shown in FIG. 80(a). As a result, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed, although this is not notified to the player.

After that, in the situation where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 20 games are executed including the timing from t14. After that, one game is started as shown in FIG. 80(b) at the timing of t15 where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80(a). By starting the one game, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games. However, in the continuation lottery process of the B loop, the continuation is lost. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 80(a).

In this case, the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 games or more. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(b), although one game is started at the timing of t15, the freeze period for the special freeze effect is set in the main side MPU 72, so that from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16 , even when a new game is started, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation. Also, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the special freeze effect is executed over the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Then, at the timing of t16, the freeze period for the special freeze effect elapses in the main MPU 72, and the special freeze effect ends as shown in FIG. 80(c). As a result, a game involving rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed from timing t16 to timing t17.

Next, the stock release process executed in step S3519 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the stock release process is executed when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 becomes "0".

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 is 1 or more (step S4101). The situation in which the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more means that the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 to be digested in the master side MPU 72 is 1 or more, and the number of games to be digested in the production side MPU 92 is 1 or more. This is a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is "0". In this situation, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 to be consumed in the master side MPU 72 is stored in the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is less than the first release reference value (step S4102). The first release reference value corresponds to the value of 10 games. Various additional effects exist in the ART state ST9 as already explained, but the minimum number of games that can be reported in these various additional effects is 10 games. That is, the first release reference value is set as the minimum number of games that can be announced in various additional effects.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, all the values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S4103). As a result, all the numbers of games stored in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 are set as the number of games to be completed in the ART state ST9 in the directing-side MPU 92 . Thereafter, the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4104). As a result, although the number of games to be played in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is newly set, the number of games is not displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. Also, the number of stock games counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S4105).

After that, the start setting process of the first release effect is executed (step S4106). In the start setting process, the first release effect table enabling execution of the first release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . The first release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the first release effect table. In the first release effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 is about to end is executed. In the first release effect, the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is unknown.

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b). In the ART state ST9, when the value of the display counter 126 is 1 or more and various additional effects are not being executed, as shown in FIG. , a game number image G9 is displayed for notifying the value stored in the display counter 126 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. The number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G9 is decremented by one each time one game is completed. As a result of subtracting 1, if the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G9 becomes "0" and the value stored in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is greater than or equal to 1 and less than 10, A first release effect is started. In the first release effect, as shown in FIG. 82(b), an end suggesting image G10 indicating that the ART state ST9 is about to end is displayed, and the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is unknown. An unknown number of games image G11 is displayed. When the first release effect is executed in this way, the player recognizes that the ART state ST9 is nearing its end.

In the situation where the first release effect is being executed, if the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is directly added, added by the A loop, or added by the B loop, etc., the first release effect is terminated. At the same time, an effect corresponding to the addition is executed. After that, the normal effect for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 82(a) is executed. Further, although description of specific processing is omitted, when the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9 is added while the first release effect is being executed, the effect corresponding to the effect that triggered the addition is added. The number of add-on games is not reported as it is, but the sum of the number of add-on games corresponding to the effect that triggered the add-on and the number of remaining continuous games of the first release effect is reported as the number of add-on games. At the same time, in the normal effect for ART state ST9 which is started thereafter, the number of remaining continuous games in ART state ST9 is notified.

Returning to the description of the stock release process (FIG. 81), if a negative determination is made in step S4102, whether or not the value of the stock game number counter 127 is greater than or equal to the first release reference value and less than or equal to the second release reference value. (step S4107). The second release reference value corresponds to the value of 100 games. As already explained, the ART state ST9 has a direct addition effect, but the maximum number of games that can be announced in the direct addition effect is 100 games. That is, the second release reference value is set as the maximum number of games that can be announced in the direct addition effect.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, all the values stored in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 are set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S4108). As a result, all the numbers of games stored in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 are set as the number of games to be completed in the ART state ST9 in the directing-side MPU 92 . Also, the number of games newly set as the number of games to be completed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S4109).

After that, the start setting process of the second release effect is executed (step S4110). In the start setting process, the second release effect table enabling execution of the second release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . The second release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by executing the effect execution control in the effect side MPU 92 according to the second release effect table. In the second release effect, an effect indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the added number of games is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. image is displayed.

FIG. 82(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second release effect is executed. In the second release effect, an addition notification image G12 indicating that 100 games have been added is displayed, and the number of games displayed in the addition notification image G12 is added to the game number image G9 with 0 games. image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that an addition of 100 games has occurred. After the second release effect is executed, a normal effect for ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 82(a) is executed.

Returning to the description of the stock release process (FIG. 81), if a negative determination is made in step S4107, it means that the stock game number counter 127 stores more than 100 games. In this case, selection processing for the number of released games is executed (step S4111). In the selection process, the release selection table corresponding to the current value of the number-of-stocked-games counter 127 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93, and numerical information of the random number counter periodically updated in the effect-side RAM 94 is read out. Then, the number of games to be released is selected as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 by collating the read numerical information against the release selection table. In this case, in the release selection table, a plurality of types of release game numbers are set at intervals of 10 games with the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the upper limit, and the selection rate of each release game number is fixed or constant. It is approximately constant.

After that, the value of the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of released games is set in each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S4112). As a result, the number of games selected in the number-of-release-games selection process is set as the number of games to be completed in the ART state ST9 in the effect-side MPU 92 . Further, the number of games selected in the selection process of the number of released games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. After that, the value of the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of released games is subtracted from the number-of-stock-games counter 127 (step S4113).

After that, the start setting process of the third release effect is executed (step S4114). In the start setting process, the third release effect table enabling execution of the third release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the third release effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the third release effect. In the third release effect, an effect indicating that the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the added number of games is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. image is displayed. The specific content of the third release effect is the same as the content of the second release effect shown in FIG. 82(c).

On the other hand, when the value of the number of stock games counter 127 is "0" and thus a negative determination is made in step S4101, ART end effect start setting processing is executed (step S4115). In the start setting process, an ART end effect table enabling execution of an ART end effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . ART end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART end effect table. In the ART end effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is executed, and on the image display device 63, the number of games completed in the current ART state ST9 and the number of games completed in the current ART state ST9 are displayed to the player. The number of given game media is notified.

Next, how various release effects are executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 83(a) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 83(b) shows the execution period of the normal effect in the ART state ST9, and FIG. FIG. 83(d) shows the period during which the first release effect is executed, FIG. 83(e) shows the period during which the second release effect is executed, and FIG. 83(f) shows the period during which the third release effect is executed. The execution period is shown, and FIG. 83(g) shows the generation timing of the direct addition effect.

First, the case where only the first release effect among the first to third release effects is executed will be described.

By starting the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 83(a) at the timing t1, the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started as shown in FIG. 83(b) at the timing t1. After that, at the timing of t2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the value of the number-of-stocked-games counter 127 is 1 or more, so the ART state ST9 is not terminated immediately, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing t2 is less than the first release reference value, the first release effect is started at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 83(d). This first release effect continues over the number of games corresponding to the value set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 at the timing of t2. At the timing t2, the value of the stock game number counter 127 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 83(c).

After that, in the situation where the first release effect is being executed, since the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is not added, the ART measured by both the main side MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t3. The number of remaining continuous games in state ST9 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing t3, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83(a), and the first release effect ends as shown in FIG. 83(d).

Next, a case where each of the first to third release effects is executed will be described.

By starting the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 83(a) at the timing t4, the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started as shown in FIG. 83(b) at the timing t4. After that, at the timing of t5, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, since the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 83(c), the ART state ST9 is not terminated immediately, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at timing t5 is less than the first release reference value, the first release effect is started at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 83(d).

After that, at the timing of t6 when the first release effect is being executed, the direct addition effect is generated as shown in FIG. 83(g). In the direct addition effect, the number of games, which is the sum of the number of games to be added by the direct addition and the number of remaining continuous games of the first release effect, is reported as the number of additional games. Also, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 83(b) and 83(d), the first release effect ends and the normal effect in the ART state ST9 is started.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, since the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 83(c), the ART state ST9 is not terminated immediately, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the number-of-stocked-games counter 127 at timing t7 exceeds the second release reference value, the third release effect is executed from timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. 83(f). . In this case, the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of released games (step S4111) is reported as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the normal effect of the ART state ST9 is executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Then, at the timing of t9, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the production side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the value of the number-of-stocked-games counter 127 is 1 or more, so the ART state ST9 is not terminated immediately, but the release effect is started. Since the value of the number-of-stocked-games counter 127 at timing t9 is greater than or equal to the first release reference value and less than or equal to the second release reference value, as shown in FIG. A second release effect is executed. In this case, the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is reported as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. At the timing t9, the value of the stock game number counter 127 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 83(c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the normal effect of the ART state ST9 is executed from timing t10 to timing t11. Then, at the timing of t11, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 measured by both the main side MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 92 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t11, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83(a), and the normal effect of the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83(b).

<Regarding the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2>
Next, the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 will be described. First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 45 again, the processing of steps S1801 to S1811 in the second control processing of the game section will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the freeze standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The freeze standby flag is set to the ending effect until the end of the bonus state when the bonus state is entered in the middle of the ending effect and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the bonus state. This is a flag for specifying that the main MPU 72 is in a state of waiting for freeze setting at the end of .

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), freeze setting processing is executed (step S1802). The freeze setting process will be described later in detail. When the freeze standby flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", so that the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2. (step S1803). If the advantageous interval flag is set to "1" (step S1803: YES), 1 is added to the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1804). After that, ending correspondence processing is executed (step S1805).

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the ending handling process executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. Incidentally, the ending correspondence process is executed in step S1805 in the second control process (FIG. 45) of the game section. As already explained, the second control process for the game section is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. Executed after stopping.

First, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4201). The main ending effect flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the execution period of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has arrived.

If the main ending effect flag is not set to "1" (step S4201: NO), the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuation games in the advantageous section SC2 in the main RAM 74, is the ending corresponding game. It is determined whether or not the number (specifically, "1450") or more is reached (step S4202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, the sum of the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games in the advantage section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). ) or more (step S4203). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of games played in the ART state ST9 and the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section SC2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, it means that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. In this case, the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4204). Also, an ending effect command indicating that the ending effect should be started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4205). By receiving the ending effect command, the effect side MPU 92 starts the ending effect even if other effects such as an expected effect and a special added effect are being executed. Further, information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set in the ending effect command. As a result, it becomes possible for the directing MPU 92 to grasp the remaining number of games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

With the above configuration, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is confirmed to reach , it is the execution period of the ending effect. In this case, the execution period of the ending effect is set on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 is 1 or more. Either a bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) occurring during the ART state ST9 or a preparation state ST8 after the bonus state occurring during the ART state ST9 ends.

The contents of the processing executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the ending effect command from the main side MPU 72, it makes an affirmative determination in step S3501 in the effect control process for non-normal use (FIG. 72), and the effect side ending effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3502). The effect-side ending effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the execution period of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has arrived. If the effect-side ending effect flag is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), an ending effect process is executed (step S3504).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG.

When it is time to start the ending effect (step S4301: YES), a process of grasping the number of games executed for the ending effect is executed (step S4302). In the grasping process, the remaining number of games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is grasped from the ending effect command received this time. Then, the comprehended number of games is set in an ending effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The ending effect counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining games to be executed for the ending effect by the effect side MPU 92, and when a value of 1 or more is set in the ending effect counter, one game is newly started. Each time, the value of the ending effect counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the ending effect counter is already "0", the state is maintained even if one game is newly started.

After that, the ending effect start setting process is executed (step S4303). In the start setting process, the ending effect table that enables execution of the ending effect over the number of games ascertained in step S4302 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table.

If it is not the timing to start the ending effect (step S4301: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to update the ending effect (step S4304). Specifically, it is determined whether or not one game has been newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, ending effect update setting processing is executed (step S4305). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the ending effect table currently being referred to is performed according to the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the ending effect changes according to the number of games in which the ending effect continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S4304, or if the process of step S4305 is executed, it is determined whether or not any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4306). At the start of a game in which bonus winning data is set, the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command in which information for identifying the type of the set bonus winning data is set, and when a bonus prize is established, transmits commands corresponding thereto, the effect-side MPU 92 can identify whether or not bonus winning data is set in the main-side RAM 74 based on those commands.

If any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4306: YES), on the condition that both the first notification and the second notification are not executed (step S4307: NO), the first An announcement effect setting process is executed (step S4308). In the effect setting processing of the first notification, data setting is performed so that the image corresponding to the winning of the bonus is displayed in a reduced size under the condition that the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed on the image display device 63.例文帳に追加

FIG. 86(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the first notification in which the image corresponding to the winning of the bonus is displayed while the ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 86( a ), a partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63 . In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set wider than the partial display area. In areas other than the partial display area, an image G13 for an ending effect is displayed as a moving image, and in the partial display area, a bonus notification image G14 corresponding to any bonus winning data set in the main RAM 74 is displayed. is displayed. By displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this manner, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the bonus prize can be established even in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. . Also, in the first announcement, the image G13 for the ending effect is displayed more conspicuously than the bonus announcement image G14. This makes it possible to display the bonus notification image G14 while minimizing the visibility of the image G13 for the ending effect. It should be noted that the state in which the first notification is being executed ends when a second notification, which will be described later, is started, or when a bonus prize is won.

When a negative determination is made in step S4306, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4307, or when the process of step S4308 is executed, a predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) have been played since the bonus internal state ST2 was reached. It is determined whether or not it has been digested (step S4309). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4309, on condition that the second notification is not executed (step S4310: NO), the second notification effect setting process is executed (step S4311). In the effect setting process of the second notification, the image corresponding to the bonus win is enlarged and displayed more than in the case of the first notification in a situation where the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed in reduced size on the image display device 63. Make data settings for

FIG. 86(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second notification in which the image corresponding to the winning of the bonus is displayed while the ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 86(b), a partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In FIG. In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set wider than the partial display area. In the partial display area, an image G13 for the ending effect is displayed as a moving image, and in the area other than the partial display area, a bonus notification image G14 corresponding to any bonus winning data set in the main RAM 74 is displayed. is displayed. In other words, the areas where the images G13 and G14 are displayed are in the opposite relationship to the case of the first notification. By enlarging and displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the bonus has been won to the player who is concentrating on the ending effect and does not notice the bonus winning. It should be noted that the situation in which the second notification is being executed is terminated when the bonus winning is established.

If a negative determination is made in step S4309, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4310, or if the process of step S4311 is executed, any BB winning is established (step S4312: YES). , "1" is set to the BB effect waiting flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4313), and provided in the effect side RAM 94 on condition that any RB winning prize is established (step S4314: YES) "1" is set to the received RB effect standby flag (step S4315). The BB effect standby flag is a flag for specifying that the effect side MPU 92 is in the BB state ST3 during the execution of the ending effect, and the RB effect standby flag is the RB state ST4 during the execution of the ending effect. This is a flag for specifying that the effect side MPU 92 is present. When the final game in the BB state ST3 is started before the number of remaining execution games of the ending effect becomes "0" in a situation where the BB effect waiting flag is set to "1", the BB effect waiting flag is set. is cleared to "0". Further, when the final game in the RB state ST4 is started before the number of remaining execution games of the ending effect becomes "0" in a situation where the RB effect waiting flag is set to "1", the RB effect waiting flag is set. is cleared to "0".

Here, as already explained, when the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is started, a new freeze counter setting process is executed in step S2414 in the bonus process (FIG. 56) of the main MPU 72. The start of the game is in a waiting state. Then, an effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state in the effect-side MPU 92 in the situation where the freeze setting is performed is executed. In this case, if the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2413, and the process of step S2414 is not executed. Thereby, even if the bonus state is started while the ending performance is being executed, the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the bonus state can be prevented. If a bonus state occurs while the ending effect is being executed, control corresponding to the bonus state is executed in the main side MPU 72, but the effect corresponding to the bonus state is executed in the effect side MPU 92. To continue the ending performance as it is without performing control. In this case, even if the bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed as described above, the flow of the ending effect is not hindered by the freeze setting because the freeze setting is not performed. becomes possible.

In addition, as already explained, when the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is ended, a freeze counter setting process is executed in step S2709 in the bonus state process (FIG. 59) of the main MPU 72, and a new The start of the game is in a waiting state. Then, an effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state is executed by the effect-side MPU 92 in the situation where the freeze setting is performed. In this case, if the main ending effect flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2708 and the process of step S2709 is not executed. Thereby, even if the bonus state is ended while the ending performance is being executed, the freeze setting corresponding to the end of the bonus state can be prevented. When the ending effect occurs in the middle of the bonus state, or when the bonus state occurs while the ending effect is being executed, the main MPU 72 executes control corresponding to the bonus state. In the side MPU 92, the execution control of the ending effect is performed without performing the execution control of the effect corresponding to the bonus state. In this case, even if the bonus state ends while the ending effect is being executed as described above, the freeze setting is not performed, and the flow of the ending effect is not hindered by the freeze setting. becomes possible.

In the ending effect processing (FIG. 85), in the game in which the value of the ending effect counter of the effect side RAM 94 is "0", when it is the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating (step S4316: YES). , ending effect end processing is executed (step S4317). That is, the ending effect end processing is executed at the end timing of the game when the number of remaining execution games of the ending effect set when the ending effect is started becomes "0".

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing processing for ending the ending effect.

First, it is determined whether or not the effect extension flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4401). The effect extension flag extends the ending effect due to the continuation of the bonus state even when the bonus state is entered in the middle of the ending effect and the number of remaining execution games of the ending effect becomes "0". It is a flag for specifying whether or not the effect side MPU 92 is in a situation where the player is in the state.

When the effect extension flag is not set to "1" (step S4401: NO), it is determined whether or not the BB effect waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", thereby the BB state ST3. It is determined whether or not (step S4402). When the BB effect standby flag is set to "1" (step S4402: YES), after clearing the BB effect standby flag to "0" (step S4403), the game given to the player in the current BB state ST3 It is determined whether or not the total number of media provided is equal to or less than a specific reference number (step S4404). As already explained, the BB state ST3 ends when the total number of game media awarded in the BB state ST3 becomes equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"). is measured not only by the main side MPU 72 but also by the effect side MPU 92 based on commands transmitted from the main side MPU 72 . Also, the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number. Specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100" which is less than half the BB end reference number. However, without being limited to this, the specific reference number may be set to 1/3 or less of the BB end reference number, or may be set to 1/4 or less.

When the total given number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S4404: YES), BB effect start setting processing is executed (step S4405). Thereafter, the effect-side ending effect flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4406).

In the BB effect start setting process, an ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the BB that enables the execution of the BB effect. A performance table is read from a performance side ROM 93 and stored in a performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table. Further, after that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the BB effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the BB effect. That is, when the number of remaining games to be executed for the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0" during the BB state ST3, the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3. is still equal to or less than the specific reference number, the ending effect is terminated and the BB effect is started even in the middle of the BB state ST3. As a result, when the BB state ST3 is started just before the end of the ending effect, it is possible to create a situation in which the BB effect is executed following the ending effect.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the situation where the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number, the value of the ending effect counter becomes "0" and the game ends. When the ending effect is executed including the case of ending, freeze setting is performed to forcibly wait the start of a new game in the main MPU 72 over the freeze period at the end of the ending. The freeze period at the end of the ending corresponds to the execution period of the ending effect, and is specifically set to 15 seconds. By executing the ending effect in such a state that the start of a new game is forced to wait, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the ending effect.

Further, when the BB effect is executed following the ending effect, an image indicating that the BB state ST3 is started continuously is displayed in the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the ending effect. That is, when the BB performance is started following the ending performance, the freeze period corresponding to the ending performance is set, but the freeze period at the start of the bonus corresponding to the start of the bonus state is not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the freeze period from becoming excessively long while sufficiently ensuring the execution period of the ending effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4402, it is determined whether or not the RB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the RB state ST4 (step S4407). . When the RB effect waiting flag is set to "1" (step S4407: YES), the RB effect waiting flag is cleared to "0" (step S4408).

When the negative determination is made in step S4404, or when the process of step S4408 is executed, the process for extending the ending effect is executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games to be played set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0", the total number of game media awarded to the player in the BB state ST3 is already specified as a specific reference. If the number is exceeded, the ending effect is extended until the BB state ST3 ends. Further, when the number of remaining games to be executed set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0" and the RB state ST4 is reached, the ending effect is extended until the RB state ST4 ends.

As processing for extending the ending effect, first, extension setting processing of the ending effect is executed (step S4409). In the extension setting process, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . Execution of the ending effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is extended by one game by performing execution control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the extension table. In this case, an effect for one game is executed so as to have continuity in effect with respect to the contents of the immediately preceding ending effect. After that, the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4410).

When none of the effect extension flag, the BB effect standby flag and the RB effect standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 in the ending effect end processing is set to "1" (step S4401, step S4402 and step S4407: NO), normal A production start setting process is executed (step S4411). In the start setting process, the ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the execution of the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is performed. A normal performance table to be enabled is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加In this case, the effect execution is controlled by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table, and the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. After that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

When the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether or not the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S4412). If the bonus state has not ended (step S4412: NO), an ending effect extension setting process is executed (step S4413). In the extension setting process, similarly to step S4409, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. FIG. Execution of the ending effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is extended by one game by performing execution control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the extension table. In this case, an effect for one game is executed so as to have continuity in effect with respect to the contents of the immediately preceding ending effect.

When the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S4412: YES), the effect extension flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4414), and the effect side ending of the effect side RAM 94 The effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S4415). After that, the start setting process of the normal effect is executed (step S4416). In the start setting process, the ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the execution of the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is performed. A normal performance table to be enabled is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加In this case, the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table. After that, the effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

Returning to the description of the second control process (FIG. 45) for the game section, after the ending handling process is executed in step S1805, the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, is "1500") (step S1806). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, initialization processing of the advantageous section is executed (step S1807). In the advantageous interval initialization process, the advantageous interval flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous interval, even if the player stays in any of the false portent state ST5, the main portent state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8 and the ART state ST9, the game states ST5 to ST9 are continued. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST5 to ST9 including the counter for storing the number of games. After that, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1808). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section in the advantageous section display section 67 ends.

After that, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1809). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, freeze setting processing is executed (step S1810).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1809, a forced end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1811). When the production side MPU 92 receives the forced end command, it executes the normal production start setting process in the other production process of step S3520 in the non-normal production control process (FIG. 72). In the start setting process, a normal return effect table that enables execution of a normal return effect indicating returning to the normal game state ST1 and a normal effect table that enables execution of a effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are set on the effect side. It is read out from the ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 . In this case, first, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of production according to the normal return production table, and after the normal return production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, the production is performed according to the normal production table. When the side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

Next, the freeze setting process executed at step S1802 or step S1810 in the second control process (FIG. 45) of the game section will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the second control process of the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game have stopped, the freeze setting process also stops all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. executed later.

If the freeze wait flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it means that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games while the ending effect is being executed. do. In this case, first, the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4502). Thereafter, if the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is BB state ST3 (step S4503: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game in BB state ST3 (step S4504). If the current game is not the final game in BB state ST3 (step S4504: NO), it is determined whether or not the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number ( step S4505). The specific reference number is the same as the specific reference number determined in step S4404 of the ending effect end processing (FIG. 87) in the effect side MPU 92. FIG. That is, the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number, specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100" which is less than half the BB end reference number.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4504 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4505, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S4506). In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4506, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as already described, thereby drawing the player's attention to the ending effect. becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, if negative determinations are made in both steps S4504 and S4505, the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. If the total given number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is not equal to or smaller than the specific reference number, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, which is advantageous. Even after the initialization process of the section SC2 is executed, the execution of the ending effect in the effect side MPU 92 is extended in the situation of the normal section SC1 and the BB state ST3. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect waits until the end of the extension of the ending effect, that is, until the end of the BB state ST3. The freeze standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the standby state of such freeze setting.

If the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is not in the BB state ST3 (step S4503: NO), it is determined whether or not the current game was other than the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S4508). If the current game is not in the RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S4508: NO), freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S4509). In the freeze counter setting process, as in step S4506, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter at step S4509, the routine waits at step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as already described, thereby drawing the player's attention to the ending effect. becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

By executing the freeze counter setting processing in each of steps S4506 and S4509 as described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the execution period of the ending effect, the game If it is not in the bonus state, if it is in the bonus state but is the final game in the bonus state, or if the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number, the game A freeze period at the end of the ending will occur at the end of . Then, the ending effect is executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

If the current game is in the RB state ST4 and is not the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S4508: YES), the freeze standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. (step S4510). When the RB state ST4 is not the final game of the RB state ST4, the normal section is executed even after the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section SC2 is initialized. In the situation of SC1 and RB state ST4, the execution of the ending effect in the effect side MPU 92 is extended. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect waits until the timing when the extension of the ending effect ends, that is, until the timing when the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the standby state of such freeze setting.

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), it is determined whether it is the final game in BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S4511). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4511, the state in which the ending effect is extended in this game ends. Therefore, after clearing the freeze wait flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S4512), the freeze counter is set (step S4513).

In the freeze counter setting process, as in steps S4506 and S4509, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter at step S4509, the routine waits at step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as already described, thereby drawing the player's attention to the ending effect. becomes possible. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, how the ending effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 89(a) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, FIG. 89(b) shows the execution period of the BB state ST3, FIG. 89(c) shows the execution period of the RB state ST4, and FIG. 89(d). indicates the execution period of the ending effect, FIG. 89(e) shows the execution period of the bonus effect (BB effect or RB effect), and FIG. 89(f) shows the freeze period.

First, the case where the ending effect ends in neither the BB state ST3 nor the RB state ST4 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending at the timing of t1, which is the situation in the advantageous section SC2, and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 increases. By confirming that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 89(d). After that, at timing t2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89(a). A freeze period is initiated in which the start of is forced to wait. An ending effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, the freezing period ends as shown in FIG. 89(f) at the timing of t3, and the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 89(d).

Next, the case where the ending effect ends in the middle of the BB state ST3 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending at the timing of t4, which is the situation in the advantageous section SC2, and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 increases. By confirming that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 89(d). After that, the BB state ST3 is started as shown in FIG. 89(b) at the timing of t5 when the ending effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 89(f), the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the BB state ST3 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the freeze setting.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(b), at timing t6 when the BB state ST3 is being executed, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89(a). It is time to end the game. In this case, since the total number of game media awarded so far in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number, the ending effect is not extended. Therefore, at timing t6, a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forced to wait as shown in FIG. 89(f). An ending effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, the freezing period ends as shown in FIG. 89(f) at the timing of t7, and the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 89(d). At the timing of t7, an effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 is started as shown in FIG. 89(e).

After that, at the timing of t8, the BB state ST3 ends and the game ends. Therefore, at the timing of t8, a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forced to wait as shown in FIG. 89(f). An effect corresponding to the end of the BB state ST3 is executed during the freeze period. After that, the freeze period ends at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 89(f), and the effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 ends as shown in FIG. 89(e).

Next, a case will be described where the ending effect is extended by the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RB state ST4.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), at the timing of t10, which is the advantageous interval SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending. By confirming that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 89(d). After that, the RB state ST4 is started as shown in FIG. 89(c) at the timing of t11 in which the ending effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 89(f), freeze setting corresponding to the start of the RB state ST4 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the freeze setting.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(c), at timing t12 in which the RB state ST4 is executed, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89(a). It is time to end the game. In this case, the ending effect is extended because the RB state ST4 continues.

After that, at the timing of t13, it is the end timing of the game in which the RB state ST4 is ended. Therefore, at the timing of t13, a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forced to wait as shown in FIG. 89(f). An ending effect is executed during the freeze period. After that, at the timing of t14, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89(f), thereby ending the RB state ST4 as shown in FIG. 89(c) and ending as shown in FIG. 89(d). The performance ends.

<Regarding advantageous maintenance section>
Next, the advantageous maintenance section will be explained.

As already explained, by executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3409 of the ART state processing (FIG. 70), when the ART state ST9 ends, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 up to that point is changed to the number of continuable games ( Specifically, when it is equal to or less than "1200"), the lottery process for generation of the advantageous maintenance section is executed, and when the winning lottery process for the generation of the advantageous maintenance section is won, the maintenance of the advantage of the main side RAM 74 is performed. A value (specifically, "10") corresponding to the number of games to maintain an advantage is set in the counter, and the advantage section SC2 is maintained as an advantage maintenance section. In the advantage maintenance section, the value of the advantage maintenance counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed. Based on an affirmative determination in step S1812 of the second control process (FIG. 45), the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the advantageous section SC2 ends.

When the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintenance section, if the first game in the bonus state started by the establishment of the winning is in the advantageous section SC2, it is determined that the transition to the ART state ST9 is made after the bonus state ends. . In this case, if the bonus state accompanies the establishment of the 3rd BB prize, the 4th BB prize or the 1st RB prize, which are bonus prizes with no set difference, the bonus state starts regardless of the game section in the game in which the bonus prize was established. This is the advantageous section SC2 in the game. Therefore, even if the bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance interval, the advantage interval SC2 is maintained in the start game of the bonus state. Become.

On the other hand, in the bonus state associated with establishment of the 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, or 2nd RB prize, which are bonus prizes with set differences, the advantageous section SC2 is not maintained or set with the start of the bonus state. . Then, if the bonus prize is established in the last game of the advantage maintenance section, the normal section SC1 is entered in the start game of the bonus state, so even if the bonus prize is generated in the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. do not. On the other hand, when a bonus win is won in the advantage maintenance interval, an effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the type of the bonus winning combination and the number of games played in the advantage maintenance interval. A processing configuration for performing execution control of the effect will be described below.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing effect control processing for an advantageous maintenance section. Note that the effect control process for the advantage maintenance section is executed after the normal effect control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not an advantage maintenance command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4601). The advantage maintenance command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the advantage maintenance section starts when the ART state ST9 ends. When the advantage maintenance command is received (step S4601: YES), the advantage maintenance effect start setting process is executed (step S4602). In the start setting process, an advantage maintenance effect table that enables the execution of an advantage maintenance effect corresponding to the advantage maintenance section over the number of advantage maintenance games (specifically, "10") is read from the effect side ROM 93, and is read out from the effect side ROM 93. It is stored in the RAM 94. Advantage maintenance effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the advantage maintenance effect table. In addition, in the advantage maintenance effect on the image display device 63, although the image corresponding to the advantage maintenance effect is displayed, the remaining number of continuous games of the advantage maintenance effect is not displayed. Further, not only the image display device 63 but also the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 are not notified of the remaining number of continuous games of the advantage maintenance effect.

If the advantage maintenance effect is being executed (step S4603: YES), it is determined whether or not any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4604). If any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4604: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the advantage maintenance section (step S4605).

If it is not the last game in the advantage maintenance section (step S4605: NO), on condition that the bonus winning notification is not being executed (step S4606: NO), the bonus winning notification setting process is executed (step S4607). In the notification setting processing of bonus winning, data setting is performed for displaying an image corresponding to bonus winning while the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the advantage maintenance effect.

FIG. 91(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the bonus winning notification image G15. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the image display device 63 displays a bonus winning announcement image G15 with characters "Establish a bonus!". By displaying the bonus winning notification image G15 in this way, it is possible to prompt the player to establish a bonus winning within the range of the advantage maintenance section. The display of the bonus winning notification image G15 ends when the display of the bonus type notification image G16, which will be described later, starts or when the bonus prize is established.

If it is the final game of the advantage maintenance section (step S4605: YES), the winning data currently set in the main side RAM 74 are the winning data with a setting difference in the winning probability, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data. It is determined whether it is either data or second RB winning data (step S4608). The effect-side MPU 92 can specify whether bonus winning data is set in the main-side RAM 74 based on the game start command transmitted from the main-side MPU 72, and can also specify the type of the bonus winning data. can.

If the winning data is one of these (step S4608: YES), even if a bonus win is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance interval, the game interval will be normal in the start game in the bonus state corresponding to the establishment of the bonus win. Since it becomes the section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed. Therefore, on condition that the normal effect is not being executed (step S4609: NO), the normal effect start setting process is executed (step S4610). In the normal performance start setting process, the normal performance table that enables execution of the normal performance corresponding to the normal section SC1 in the normal game state ST1 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The normal effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table.

When the bonus winning is established in the advantage maintaining section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is decided except for the case where the bonus winning with the set difference in the winning probability is established in the final game of the advantage maintaining section. In this case, when the final game of the advantage maintaining section is set under the condition that the bonus winning data with the setting difference in the winning probability is set, the normal performance is started at the start of the game. This makes it difficult for the player to have the impression that the transition to the ART state ST9 did not occur even though the bonus winning was established in the advantage maintenance section.

If a negative determination is made in step S4608, on condition that bonus type notification is not being executed (step S4611: NO), bonus type notification setting processing is executed (step S4612). In the notification setting processing of the bonus type, it is possible to establish a bonus prize corresponding to the bonus winning data currently set in the main side RAM 74 in a situation where the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the advantage maintenance effect. Data setting is performed so that an image showing a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed.

FIG. 91(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the bonus type notification image G16 in the situation where the 3rd BB winning data is set in the main RAM74. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image G16 of "Red 7, Red 7, White 7" corresponding to the combination of symbols that establishes the 3rd BB winning. By displaying the bonus type notification image G16 in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of winning a bonus prize in which there is no set difference in winning probability in the final game of the advantage maintenance interval. The display of the bonus type notification image G16 ends when the bonus winning is established.

If the advantage maintenance effect is being executed (step S4603: YES) and the timing for updating the advantage maintenance effect has come due to the start of a new game (step S4613: YES), the update setting process for the advantage maintenance effect. is executed (step S4614). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the advantage maintenance effect table currently being referred to is performed according to the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the advantage maintenance effect changes according to the number of games in which the advantage maintenance effect continues.

Next, how the advantageous maintenance section progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 92(a) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance section, FIG. 92(b) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. FIG. 92(d) shows the timing at which bonus winning data with a set difference in winning probability is set, and FIG. 92(e) shows the execution period of the bonus state. (f) shows the timing of transition to ART state ST9 and winning, FIG. 92(g) shows the execution period of the advantage maintenance effect, and FIG. 92(h) shows the execution period of bonus winning or bonus type notification effect. , and FIG. 92(i) shows the execution period of the normal effect.

First, a case will be described in which a bonus prize is won with a set difference in the advantage maintenance interval and a bonus prize is established in a game before the final game in the advantage maintenance interval.

At the timing of t1, which is the advantageous interval SC2 as shown in FIG. 92(b), the advantageous maintenance interval starts as shown in FIG. The performance begins. After that, at timing t2, which is the timing at which the game before the final game in the advantage maintenance section is started, as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 92(h), the effect of notifying the winning of the bonus is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

A player who confirms the bonus winning notification image G15 establishes a bonus winning in the game in which the bonus winning is won. As a result, at the timing t3, which is the end timing of the game, as shown in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(e), the advantage maintenance section ends and the bonus state starts. Further, at the timing of t3, the advantage maintenance effect is ended as shown in FIG. 92(g), and the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is ended as shown in FIG. 92(h). After that, the first game in the bonus state is started at the timing of t4. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 92(b), the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintaining section and the start game in the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 92(f), the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

Next, a case will be described in which a bonus prize is won with a set difference in the advantage maintenance section and a bonus prize is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

At the timing of t5, which is the advantageous interval SC2 as shown in FIG. 92(b), the advantageous maintenance interval starts as shown in FIG. The performance begins. After that, at timing t6, which is the timing at which the game before the final game in the advantage maintenance section is started, as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 92(h), the effect of notifying that the bonus is won is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

Although the player confirms the bonus winning notification image G15, the final game of the advantage maintaining section is started at the timing of t7 without the player being able to establish the bonus winning. In this case, even if the main MPU 72 is maintained in the advantageous maintenance section as shown in FIG. 92(a), at the timing of t7 as shown in FIGS. The advantage maintenance performance is terminated and the normal performance is started. Further, even if the advantage maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started in this way, the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is continued as shown in FIG. 92(h). Then, a bonus winning is established in the final game. In this case, at the timing t8, which is the end timing of the final game, the advantageous maintenance section ends as shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantageous section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 92(b). Also, at the timing of t8, a bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 92(e). In the start game in the bonus state, the normal section SC1 is set instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although a bonus prize is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

As described above, even if a bonus is won with a set difference in the game before the final game of the advantage maintenance interval and the bonus winning notification image G15 is displayed, the bonus prize may not be established before the final game of the advantage maintenance interval. Otherwise, even if a bonus prize is won in the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won. In other words, in order to make a transition to the ART state ST9, it is necessary to predict the type of bonus winning data with respect to the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 by the game before the final game in the advantage maintenance interval. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous maintenance section.

Next, the case where the final game in the advantage maintenance section wins a bonus with a set difference will be described.

In the situation where the advantage maintenance section is shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantage section SC2 is shown in FIG. 92(b), the final game of the advantage maintenance section is started at the timing of t9. In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 92(d), bonus winning with a setting difference is made. When a bonus win with a set difference is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the bonus win notification image G15 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 92(h). At the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 92(g) and 92(i), the advantage maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started. Even if a bonus prize is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance interval, the advantage maintenance interval is not only ended at the timing t10, which is the end timing of the final game, as shown in FIG. 92(a). The advantageous section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 92(b). Also, at the timing of t10, a bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 92(e). In the start game in the bonus state, the normal section SC1 is set instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although a bonus prize is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

Next, a case will be described where a bonus is won without a set difference in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

In the situation where the advantage maintenance section is shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantage section SC2 is shown in FIG. 92(b), the final game of the advantage maintenance section is started at the timing of t11. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92(c), at the timing of t11, the winning bonus is won without any set difference. In the case of winning the bonus with no set difference and in the case of the final game of the advantage maintaining section, the bonus type notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 92(h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is started.

A player who confirms the bonus type notification image G16 establishes a bonus winning in the game in which the bonus is won. As a result, at the timing t12, which is the end timing of the game, as shown in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(e), the advantage maintenance section ends and the bonus state starts. Further, at the timing of t12, the advantage maintenance effect is ended as shown in FIG. 92(g), and the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is ended as shown in FIG. 92(h). After that, the first game in the bonus state is started at the timing of t13. In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 92(b), the bonus winning is established in the advantageous maintaining section and the start game in the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 92(f), the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

<Regarding game history management>
Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 72 to manage the game history and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that the management process is executed at step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

If one game has been newly executed (step S4701: YES), the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4702). The total number-of-games counter 74a is a counter for counting the number of games completed regardless of the game state and the game interval. The total number-of-games counter 74a consists of 3 bytes, and can count the number of games with a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 256 to the power of 3 as an upper limit. Further, the value of the total number of games counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the all-clearing process in step S104 or the clearing process other than the set value in step S113 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to count the total number of games played on a plurality of business days in the gaming hall.

If one game is newly executed (step S4701: YES), and if it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S4703: YES), not only is the value of the total number of games counter 74a increased by 1, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b provided in (step S4704). The advantageous game number counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74, and the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" even if the initialization processing of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 occurs a plurality of times with the normal section SC1 in between, the total number of games played in the plurality of advantageous sections SC2 can be counted by the advantageous game number counter 74b. . The number-of-advantage-games counter 74b consists of 3 bytes and can count the number of games with an upper limit of a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 256 to the third power. Also, the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the all-clearing process in step S104 or the clearing process other than the set value in step S113 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to count the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 that have been played on a plurality of business days in the gaming hall.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, if a negative determination is made in step S4703, or if the process of step S4704 is executed, it is determined whether or not the game history management result is being displayed ( step S4705). If the game history management result is not being displayed (step S4705: NO), it is determined whether or not an instruction to display the game history management result has been issued (step S4706). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. If the reset button 56 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied, an instruction to display the management result of the game history has been generated.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the management result of the game history has been generated (step S4706: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S4707). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result=“value of number-of-advantage-games counter 74b”/“value of number-of-total-games counter 74a”.

Thereafter, display start processing is executed (step S4708). In the display start processing, display of the calculation result in step S4707 on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is started. In this case, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S4707 by 100, the tens place is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66, and the ones place is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. The dual-use display unit 66 is controlled so as to display. The above calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. be.

However, in the case of display by only the two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b, the display contents on the shared display unit 66 are different depending on whether the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100" or "0". end up being the same. Therefore, when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "0" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, and the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on, and when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "0", "0" is not only displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. The advantageous section display section 67 is turned off. If the result of management of the game history is displayed on the combined display unit 66 and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is not "100", it is assumed that the current game section is the advantageous section SC2. Also, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the game history management result is displayed (step S4705: YES), the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a-49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a. (step S4709). When an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, an ON signal indicating that one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is being pressed is received from one of the stop buttons 42-44. If it is received from the detection sensors 42a to 44a, and if an ON signal indicating that medals have been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, one of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is pressed. is received from any of the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, or if an ON signal indicating that the settlement button 51 has been pressed is received from the settlement detection sensor 51a, step An affirmative determination is made in S4709. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether or not each ON signal has occurred during the effective period.

In other words, regardless of whether reception of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of ON signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a serves as a trigger for stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is the target of bet setting or credit increase, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is the target of the bet setting, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a serves as a settlement trigger for the credited virtual medals, an affirmative determination is made in step S4709.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, display end processing is executed (step S4710). In the display end processing, the display of the calculation results in the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is ended, and the display contents of the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are changed to the display contents immediately before starting the display of the calculation results. Display content. For example, when the display of the calculation result is started while the number of awarded game media corresponding to the winning result of one game is displayed on the combined display unit 66, the display of the number of awarded game media is restarted. Let Further, when the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where the information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the combined display section 66, the display of the information corresponding to the stop order is started. let it resume. Further, when the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where nothing is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, it is assumed that nothing is displayed. In addition, when the advantageous interval display unit 67 is turned on by displaying the calculation result while the advantageous interval display unit 67 is in the off state, the advantageous interval display unit 67 is returned to the off state. Further, when the advantageous interval display portion 67 is turned off by displaying the calculation result while the advantageous interval display portion 67 is in the lighting state, the lighting state is restored.

Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 94, how the management result of the game history is displayed using the combined display section 66 will be described. FIG. 94(a) shows a period during which the number of awarded game media corresponding to the winning result of one game is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 (giveaway number display), and FIG. 94(b) shows the dual-purpose display section 66. 94(c) shows the period during which the result of calculating the management result of the game history is displayed (hereinafter referred to as management display), and FIG. 94(c) shows the period during which the front door 12 is open. (d) shows the timing at which the management display instruction is performed, and FIG. 94(e) shows reception of an ON signal from any one of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, 51a that triggers display termination. indicates the timing.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), the front door 12 is opened as shown in FIG. 94(c) at the timing of t1, which is the situation in which the number of grants is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and then at the timing of t2. 94(d), the reset button 56 is operated as a management display operation. As a result, management display is started on the combined display section 66 as shown in FIG. 94(b) at the timing t2. After that, the front door 12 is closed as shown in FIG. 94(c) at the timing t3 when the management display is continued. In this case, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sensor for detecting whether or not the front door 12 is open. A display termination trigger does not occur. Therefore, even at timing t3, the management display continues as shown in FIG. 94(b). In this way, opening and closing the front door 12 does not trigger the termination of the management display, so opening the front door 12 and operating the reset button 56 starts the management display on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. After that, when the front door 12 is closed, the contents of the management display can be confirmed.

Note that the reel index sensor for detecting that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one turn is also excluded from the sensors that generate the timing for ending the management display. Thus, when the management display is started while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the management display ends depending on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R against the will of the manager of the game hall. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 94(e), an ON signal is received from any one of various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, and 51a, which triggers display termination. As a result, at the timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b), the management display is terminated and the awarded number display is resumed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the set value to be used is set from multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is set as the use target. It will be done. In addition, since there are a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST9 and there are game intervals apart from them, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, while the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur in the advantageous section SC2, and both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2 are normal game states. Since the structure allows staying in ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3 and RB state ST4, the player plays the game expecting to be in an advantageous game state and in the advantageous section SC2.

In this case, bonus states (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) can occur on the basis of the occurrence of the advantageous interval SC2 to the ART state ST9. On the other hand, even if the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. As a result, the player expects that a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability varies according to the set value will occur in the advantageous section SC2. Further, according to the configuration, the probability of transition to ART state ST9 is affected by the probability of occurrence of the bonus state. , the probability of transition to the ART state ST9 can be indirectly changed according to the set value.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is not executed by itself, and the winning probability changes according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2. ART state ST9 shift lottery processing is executed based on the execution of the game in the bonus state corresponding to the variable bonus combination. As a result, the player who expects to shift to the ART state ST9 not only pays attention to winning the bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value, but also pays attention to the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. is started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary according to the set value (specifically, a combination of the 3rd BB winning data, a combination of the 4th BB winning data, and a combination of the 1st RB winning data) has occurred in the advantageous section SC2. A transition to the ART state ST9 may also occur in this case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from significantly affecting the probability of transition to the ART state ST9.

When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 with the transition to the bonus state as a trigger. Therefore, transition to ART state ST9 may occur. On the other hand, even if the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section is maintained in the normal section SC1, so the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. do not. As a result, the player's attention to the former bonus state can be made higher than the latter bonus state.

By winning a non-bonus combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value in the normal section SC1, a lottery process to shift to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and by winning in the transition lottery process, the game section changes to the normal section. It shifts from SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the probability of transition to the advantageous section SC2 from varying according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value from significantly affecting the probability of transition to the ART state ST9.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the ART state ST9 is not executed, and the game is in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. is executed, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the ART state ST9 not only pays attention to winning the bonus combination, but also pays attention to whether the advantageous section SC2 is reached when the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is executed. We will pay attention to whether or not Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won in the normal section SC1 and a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is started, the transition from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 does not occur. Thus, in order for the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus hand whose winning probability varies according to the set value to be executed in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus hand is won in the advantageous section SC2 and It is necessary to execute the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation state of the advantageous section SC2, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the first game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus winning is established early, thereby making it easier to obtain an opportunity to execute the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9.

When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value is generated, even if it is a normal section SC1, it becomes an advantageous section SC2 and a lottery process for shifting to an ART state ST9 is executed. Thus, in the normal section SC1, the player expects to win a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary according to the set value rather than a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value.

Even after the ART state ST9 ends, the advantageous section SC2 is continued by being set to the advantageous maintenance section. Then, when the bonus winning is established in the situation of the advantageous maintenance section and the game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus winning is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. . As a result, the player expects that a bonus prize will be won in the advantage maintenance section, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Even if a bonus prize is established in the advantage maintenance interval, if the game in which the bonus prize is established is the last game in the advantage maintenance interval, the establishment of the bonus prize is a bonus role in which the winning probability varies according to the set value. , the normal section SC1 is set in the game in the bonus state, so the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. On the other hand, if a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance interval, even in the final game of the advantage maintenance interval, the advantage maintenance corresponding to the advantage maintenance interval To perform normal performance without executing performance. This makes it difficult for the player to have the impression that the transition to the ART state ST9 did not occur even though the bonus prize was won in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

On the other hand, when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs, even if the normal section SC1, it becomes the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, when the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus combination is established in the final game of the advantage maintaining section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. Therefore, when winning a bonus combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the advantage maintenance effect is executed also in the final game. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of occurrence of an event in which a bonus prize is established in the advantage maintenance section and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the advantage maintenance section. becomes.

When the number of games executed in the advantage maintenance interval reaches the number of advantage maintenance games, the advantage maintenance interval ends and the advantage interval SC2 ends. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to clearly understand when the advantage maintenance section ends.

The number of games executed in the advantage interval SC2 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, which is set as the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games by more than the number of games to maintain the advantage. set. As a result, even though the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is close to the maximum number of games, the advantage maintenance section can be prevented from occurring.

In a configuration in which, when the precursor state ST6 is reached, an effect is executed that makes the player expect a transition to the ART state ST9 over a plurality of games, and a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the game, In the case of false portent state ST5, an effect is executed to make the player expect a transition to ART state ST9 over a plurality of games, but transition to ART state ST9 does not occur after the end. As a result, when the player expects the transition to the ART state ST9 over a plurality of games, the player expects the transition to the ART state ST9 after that, which improves the interest in the game. It is possible to plan In this case, the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2 in the false portent state ST5. As a result, it is possible to cause a transition to the ART state ST9 even in the false portent state ST5, so that the player's attention to not only the present portent state ST6 but also the false portent state ST5 is increased. becomes possible.

When the opportunity to shift to the ART state ST9 occurs in the false portent state ST5, the number of games executed in the false portent state ST5 is also counted as the number of games executed in the subsequent advantageous interval SC2. Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous interval SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous interval SC2 is terminated. As a result, while the advantage of the advantageous section SC2 is obtained in the false portent state ST5, the demerit of the continuation of the false portent state ST5 is caused with respect to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. becomes possible.

When notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning has occurred once before the false portent state ST5 ends, when the false portent state ST5 ends While the advantageous section SC2 is terminated, even if the false sign state ST5 is terminated, it is false if the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize has not been reported once. The advantageous section SC2 is maintained even after the precursor state ST5 ends. As a result, when the advantageous section SC2 is reached, it is ensured that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of the first bell prize, is reported once, and the advantageous section SC2 is advantageous. In addition, it is possible to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2 with respect to the end timing of the false portent state ST5 depending on whether or not the notification of the stop order occurs.

When a predetermined combination is won in the chance state ST7, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed, and when the transition lottery process wins the transition lottery process, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. As a result, the player expects that the chance state ST7 will occur, and expects that a predetermined combination will be won in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by executing the chance effect in each game in the chance state ST7, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation for the chance state ST7. In this case, when the chance state ST7 is set in the false portent state ST5 and the false portent performance is being executed, the chance performance is not started but the false portent performance is continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the effect contents of the false omen effect from being hindered by the occurrence of the chance effect. Also, even if the false portent effect is continued without the chance effect being executed, the game state is the chance state ST7, so that the profit of the chance state ST7 is not lost. However, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

After the precursor state ST6 ends, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, and also when a transition lottery process executed in the chance state ST7 results in a winning transition, a transition to the ART state ST9 also occurs. In this case, if the chance state ST7 is set while the false portent effect is being executed as described above, the false portent effect is continued so that the ART state ST9 is reached during the false portent effect. Transition to ART state ST9 may occur as a result of winning. As a result, the transition to the ART state ST9 can occur even in the situation in which the false portent effect is being executed, and the ART state can occur in any situation in which the false portent effect or the actual portent effect is being executed. It is possible to make the player expect the transition to the state ST9.

When the false portent effect ends in the chance state ST7, the chance effect is started. Thereby, it is possible to give an opportunity to execute the chance production. Further, even when the chance effect is executed following the end of the false omen effect, the chance effect is similar to the case where the chance effect is started when the chance state ST7 is set. It continues for the number of games. As a result, even if the chance state ST7 ends during execution of the chance performance, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained while the chance performance is being executed.

To prevent excessive continuation of an advantageous section SC2 advantageous to a player by ending the advantageous section SC2 when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. becomes possible. In this case, the ending effect is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending set as the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the advantageous section SC2 is nearing its end. In addition, by making the player want to confirm the ending effect, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue the advantageous section SC2, and furthermore, to give the player a sense of satisfaction when the ending effect is actually executed. be able to give. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending in a situation where the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. The ending production is executed. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a situation where it is confirmed that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the phenomenon that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 does not reach the upper limit number of games despite the execution of the ending effect.

In any of the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9, which are game states advantageous to the player, the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending. An ending production is executed based on a certain thing. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a game state advantageous to the player, and the player can be given a feeling of satisfaction when the ending effect is executed.

When a bonus state occurs while the ending performance is being executed, the ending performance is continued without starting the bonus performance (BB performance, RB performance). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending effect.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation in which the ending effect is being executed in a BB state, the total number of given game media in the BB state at that time is If the number is equal to or less than the specific reference number, the BB effect is started. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the BB effect even in a situation where the execution of the ending effect is prioritized.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation in which the ending effect is being executed in a BB state, the total number of given game media in the BB state at that time is If the specific reference number is exceeded, the ending effect is continued. Further, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending effect is being executed in the RB state, the ending effect is continued. As a result, it is possible to extend the ending effect by utilizing the period in which the situation advantageous to the player continues. Further, it is possible for the player to recognize that the ART state ST9 continues when the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous section SC2.

When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the advantageous section SC2 will end. In this case, if the bonus state continues even after the advantageous section SC2 ends and the ending effect is continued, the progress of the game is not stopped at the end of the advantageous section SC2. As a result, when the ending effect is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, and the bonus state is restored after the advantageous section SC2 ends. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the continuing situation is the continuing situation of the ART state ST9.

When the bonus state is started and ended, the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state will start or end. In this case, even if the bonus state is started or ended while the ending effect is being executed, the progress of the game is not stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the progress stop state of the game caused by the bonus state.

The index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" is the index value in any of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. The index values IV in the front range are aggregated sequentially from IV=1, and the index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values "1" to "6" are the last index values IV in the front range. The index values IV in the rear range, which are serial numbers from the next index value IV to the last index value IV, are aggregated. In this way, the index values IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" are grouped in the front range, and the index values with different winning probabilities among the setting values "1" to "6". Setting the index value IV with the same winning probability and the index value IV with different winning probability among the setting values '1' to '6' in the design stage of the slot machine 10 by concentrating the IV in the rear range. and make corrections easier.

In the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, different index values IV are set among the lottery tables even if the winning data are the same. . On the other hand, an offset table 111 is provided, and in the offset table 111, the combinations in which the same winning data are set but different index values IV are set are grouped into the same winning number. . Then, the winning number is used in various processes after determining the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after execution of the lottery process of the winning combination. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the role specifying processing.

Winning numbers in the offset table 111 are set as serial number information. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform processing for grasping the winning combination in various processes after determining the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process.

The relationship between the index value IV and the winning number in each lottery table is set as an offset table 111 at the design stage of the slot machine 10 . This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for ascertaining the winning number based on the index value IV of each lottery table.

The number of games set in the display counter 126 out of the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is reported to the player, but the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not reported to the player. Then, according to the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127, a special additional effect indicating that the number of games has been given to the player is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is executed, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

The stock game number counter 127 stores the number of games for a plurality of additional occasions, and the stored number of games is reported collectively as the increment of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that a large number of games have been awarded at once, and it is possible to provide surprise.

Even in a situation where the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is the same, there are a plurality of modes for selecting the number of games to be notified to the player as a special extra effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the selection mode of the number of games to be notified from the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 .

Even in a situation where the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is the same, there are a plurality of types of special addition effects to be selected. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the special addition effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Execution of a plurality of types of special additional effects may be determined at once. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special addition effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the special extra effect is executed, an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is notified in each of the plurality of games. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times that the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is reported, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the condition for adding the number of games is established in a situation where the special addition effect is being executed, in addition to the increase notification of the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 due to the special addition effect, the addition notification of the number of games is given. executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness regarding the notification of the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9.

The main side MPU 72 executes a process for increasing the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, and the effect side MPU 92 executes a process for executing an effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games. As a result, the processing load of the main MPU 72 will increase even if the main MPU 72 performs the control of the progress of the ART state ST9 collectively, and the effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is performed in a complicated manner. It is possible to prevent Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform control regarding the ART state ST9.

As the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as the predetermined increased number of games in each game. In this case, when the number of games executed in the B loop reaches 21 games or more, which is the specific reference number, the total number of games given to the B loop is collectively notified to the player. A special freeze effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to collectively notify the award of a large number of games, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Even if the B loop is set in the main MPU 72, the effect corresponding to the setting of the B loop is not executed until the special freeze effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special freeze effect has suddenly occurred, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

When the special freeze effect is executed, the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the special freeze effect.

A special freeze effect is executed based on the end of the B loop in a situation where the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 games or more, which is the specific reference number. As a result, it is possible to execute the special freeze effect under the condition that a large number of games are awarded, and to inform the player that the B loop has ended.

The specified reference number of times is set to a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing 1000 games by 50 games, which is the predetermined number of increased games. As a result, even if the number of games given in the B loop is completed in the middle of the B loop, the number of games of 1000 games or more is added to the remaining continuous number of games in the ART state ST9 as the number of uncompleted games. It is possible to notify the player of this fact.

As the A loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as the specific increased number of games in each game. In this case, the number of games awarded in the A loop is temporarily added to the stock game number counter 127 without being notified to the player, while when the A loop is set, the number of games is reduced to 3 games, which is the number of specific effect games. Since the expected effect is executed over a period of time, it is possible for the player to expect how many games have been added to the stock game number counter 127 in the situation where the expected effect is being executed.

When the expected performance is executed over the specified number of performance games, the special additional performance corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 at that time is executed even if the A loop is not finished yet. As a result, the player expects the contents of the special additional performance to be executed after the execution of the expectation performance. Moreover, it becomes possible to start the special additional performance earlier than the structure in which the special additional performance is not executed until the A loop is finished.

Even in a situation where the expected performance is executed over the specified number of performance games, the A loop is terminated when the conditions for ending the A loop are established. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the A loop ends before the expected performance ends and a situation in which the A loop continues even after the expected performance ends.

In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is the first release criterion. Depending on what kind of value is in relation to the value and the second release reference value, the execution mode of the release effect for continuing the ART state ST9 differs. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the release effect according to the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a situation where the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is equal to or greater than the first release reference value, if the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 increases. At least part of the value is notified to the player as the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of security that the ART state ST9 will continue to some extent.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 exceeds the second release reference value and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player is 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is notified to the player as the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the release effect in which the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is notified, and the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player can be increased. It is possible to make the player expect that the ART state ST9 will continue even if the game is close to 0 games.

When the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0 in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value, the remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 The ART state ST9 is continued while not announcing the number. This makes it possible for the player to expect how long the ART state ST9 will continue.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are commonly used in a plurality of types of lottery processes. As a result, the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l can be reduced, and the configuration can be simplified.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are subject to random number acquisition in a predetermined order. This makes it possible to prevent random numbers from being biased toward one of the random number circuits 101a to 101l. In addition, since the random numbers are acquired from the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the values of the random number pointers in the main RAM 74, the processing configuration for specifying the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l from which the random numbers are to be acquired is complicated. It is possible to prevent it from becoming distorted.

The number of lottery processes for obtaining random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is greater than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to increase the number of lottery processes while suppressing an increase in the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is larger than the maximum number of lottery processes for obtaining random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one game. As a result, in a configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are jointly used in a plurality of lottery processes, a plurality of random numbers from the same first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are generated in one game. It is possible to prevent the card from being used in the lottery process.

In the winning lottery process, random numbers are not obtained from the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l, but are obtained from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly perform the lottery process for the winning combination.

All of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are 8-bit random numbers. This makes it possible to use random numbers of the same number of bits regardless of which one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l obtains a random number in one lottery process.

Every time one game is executed, the value of the total game number counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1, and each time one game is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is 1. is added. This enables the slot machine 10 to store information for deriving the percentage of stays in the advantageous section SC2. Also, the ratio of stays in the advantageous section SC2 is calculated using the value of the total number-of-games counter 74a and the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b. Is displayed. This makes it possible to grasp the rate of staying in the advantageous section SC2. In addition, when the end trigger occurs while the calculation result of the percentage of stays in the advantageous section SC2 is being displayed on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, the display is terminated. As a result, in a situation where it is not necessary to display the calculation result of the percentage of stays in the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to prevent the display from being performed on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. Become.

Even if an ON signal is received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a, the occurrence of the end trigger is generated. The display of the calculation result of the percentage of stays in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is terminated. This makes it possible to improve the operability for ending the display.

There is only one kind of operation for starting the display of the calculation result of the percentage of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the calculation result of the percentage of stays in the advantageous section SC2 on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 from being started unintentionally.

Transmission of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, transmission of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and transmission of an ON signal from the inserted credit detection sensors 47a to 49a can occur when starting a game. In this case, based on the occurrence of an event that can occur when the game is started in this way, display of the calculation result of the percentage of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played while the calculation result of the percentage of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the dual-use display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 .

Even when the ON signal is received from the start detection sensor 41a in a situation where the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated, the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 The display of the calculation result is ended. As a result, by operating the start lever 41, the user stays in the advantageous section SC2 in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 without waiting for the state in which the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. It is possible to terminate the display of the calculation result of the ratio. This also applies to the stop buttons 42-44.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, a rotation start opportunity based on a new operation of the start lever 41 occurs when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. Rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of one game by rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from being invalidated by the stoppage of the supply of operating power. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R newly start rotating when the supply of operating power is resumed, the execution of the stop control by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 is regulated. As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed while the stop buttons 42 to 44 are being operated, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop immediately after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. It is possible to prevent it from being executed. If stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed immediately after starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not be performed normally. Furthermore, by restricting the execution of stop control by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" in the situation after the supply of operating power is resumed. is assumed to be absent. If the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be rotated, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to be accelerated. As a result, by using the constant speed flag 74c, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating and the supply of operating power is restarted, the stop buttons 42 to 44 The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be newly started while invalidating the operation of .

When the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", when the supply of operating power is started, steps S104 and S113 in the main process (FIG. 10) Even if each clearing process is not executed, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0". If the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be rotated, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to be accelerated. As a result, by using the constant speed flag 74c, the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be operated when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating and the supply of operating power is restarted. It is possible to newly start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R while invalidating the operation.

When the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the constant speed flag 74c is set to " 0” is cleared. This ensures that the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Regardless of the result of the combination lottery process (Fig. 17), the constant lottery process (Fig. 63) is executed, and the number of games to be added is given based on the direct winning in the constant lottery process (Fig. 63). be. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which an additional number of games is awarded in a manner that does not depend on the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, even if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is not the desired result, it is possible to make the player expect that an extra number of games will be given, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The random numbers used in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) are acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the random numbers used in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) are also obtained when the start lever 41 is operated. obtained on the basis of As a result, even if the lottery process (Fig. 63) is always executed regardless of the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), the opportunity to obtain the random number used in the constant lottery process (Fig. 63) can be obtained. It is possible to share the operation of the start lever 41 in the same manner as the random number acquisition opportunity used in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described without complicating the configuration relating to the random number acquisition trigger.

During the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), a random number updated by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is obtained, and during the regular lottery process (FIG. 63), a random number updated by the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is obtained. As a result, the result of the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) can be made completely independent of the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In the ART state ST9, lottery processing (FIG. 63) is always executed in each game. As a result, in the ART state ST9, the player can expect to receive an extra game number in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17).

In the direct addition process (FIG. 65), the addition lottery process is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). As a result, there is a situation in which the additional number of games is awarded regardless of the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), and a situation in which the additional number of games is awarded in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). It is possible to cause As a result, the player expects that the number of additional games will be given according to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), and the number of games to be added will be increased regardless of the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17). Expect to be granted.

The number of games to be added by winning in the regular lottery process (Fig. 63) is directly added in the lottery process executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 17). As a result, the number of games is less than the number of additional games given. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) regarding the addition of the number of games to be added. It is also possible to make the player expect to receive an additional number of games.

If the number of games to be added is given by directly winning in the additional lottery process executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), the number of games to be added is given directly in the regular lottery process (Fig. 63). Even if an additional winning is obtained, the number of additional games triggered by the immediate additional winning is not provided. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing an excessive number of additional games from being awarded.

Addition corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) based on the winning of a winning combination with the same winning probability regardless of the set value of the plurality of stages in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Lottery processing is executed. On the other hand, the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed regardless of the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). As a result, it is possible to provide an additional number of games while making it difficult to predict the set value.

The random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the bit number of 1 byte. As a result, while using a common program as the lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9, a 1-byte lottery is generated in any situation in which a 100% winning situation and a situation that may result in a loss are caused. Value information can be used.

If the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, and the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for creating a 100% winning situation is 1 byte, all zeros after subtraction. Unless such a situation is treated as a winning result, even if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% is used, the winning will not be 100%. On the other hand, if a situation in which all zeros are obtained after the subtraction is treated as a winning result, it will be necessary to eliminate the acquisition of all zeros as random numbers. Therefore, if the random number to be used is 8 bits, which is the same as the bit number of 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to at least 100% as a number of bits larger than the bit number of 1 byte. put away. On the other hand, as described above, the random number used in the lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the bit number of 1 byte, so the lottery value corresponding to 100% 1-byte lottery value information can be used as information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the lottery value information.

After the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R ends, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be started such that the acceleration period of the next reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. As a result, the player can visually recognize how the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are sequentially started to rotate. In this case, the period from the end of the acceleration period for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the start of the acceleration period for the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R may vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the starting modes when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are sequentially started to rotate.

When reel performance is not executed when one game is started, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate, and when one game is started and reel performance is executed, the reel performance ends. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted after that, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is sequentially started, and after the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, the next order is reached. The period until the acceleration period starts on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated.

Further, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are to be rotated again after the end of the reel effect, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is sequentially started and the acceleration period of one of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is finished. to the start of the acceleration period on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order may vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating again after the reel effect is executed.

When the rotation of the left reel 32L is started after the reel effect, the period from the end timing of the reel effect to the start of the acceleration period in the left reel 32L may fluctuate. Also, when starting the rotation of the middle reel 32M, which is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order, the period from the end of the acceleration period of the left reel 32L to the start of the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M is can fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. It is possible to diversify the starting mode.

Whether or not there is a waiting period before starting the acceleration period for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and its length are determined by lottery. This makes it possible to irregularly determine the waiting period.

A random number counter used in determining the presence or absence of a waiting period until the start of the acceleration period for the left reel 32L and its length, and the presence or absence of the waiting period until the start of the acceleration period for the middle reel 32M and its length is the same as the random number counter used in determining This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the configuration.

The period required for the random number counter to make one round is shorter than the period required from the start to the end of the acceleration period for the left reel 32L. As a result, in a configuration in which a common random number counter is used even when either the waiting period for the left reel 32L or the waiting period for the middle reel 32M is determined, the lottery for each waiting period is performed independently. becomes possible.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state exists as one type of bonus state. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Similar to ART state ST9, the pseudo-bonus state enables establishment of the first bell prize when any winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17). The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported, and when the player wins a combination that enables establishment of the promotion replay prize that promotes the game mode to the first RT mode or the second RT mode, establishment of the promotion replay prize is possible. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, and if a win is won that enables establishment of a fall replay prize that causes the game mode to fall to the normal mode or the 1st RT mode, establishment of the fall replay prize can be avoided. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. In other words, the pseudo-bonus state basically progresses in a situation where the game mode is the second RT mode, similarly to the ART state ST9. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize when the winning number is set is reported. Therefore, in the pseudo-bonus state, the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is the same as in the ART state ST9. However, it is not limited to this, and the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games between the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state ST9 may be slightly different but substantially the same, or may be greatly different. good.

The pseudo-bonus state occurs on the condition that it is in the advantageous section SC2 as in the ART state ST9, and ends when the remaining number of continuous games has been played. Also, in the pseudo-bonus state, transition to the ART state ST9 is won, so that the game transitions to the ART state ST9 after the pseudo-bonus state ends. In the situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed, such as the precursor state ST6 or the preparatory state ST8, and in the state of the ART state ST9, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not occur. A processing configuration regarding the pseudo-bonus state will be described below.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus generation management process executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. It should be noted that the pseudo-bonus generation management process is executed after the win/loss determination is completed in the win lottery process (FIG. 17).

In a situation where the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES), "4" to "8", "15", " 16” winning number is set (step S4802: YES), a lottery process for transition to a pseudo-bonus state is executed. That is, the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is executed on the condition that it is the advantageous section SC2. Further, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is executed when a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

In the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process, first, the pseudo-bonus transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4803). In this case, the pseudo-bonus transition table is set so that a winning number with a low winning probability has a higher probability of winning transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S4804). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done. Then, the random number acquired in step S4804 is collated with the pseudo-bonus transition table read out in step S4803 to determine whether or not transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been won (step S4805). If the transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been won (step S4805: YES), the pseudo-bonus winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4806). The pseudo-bonus winning flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transfer to the pseudo-bonus state has been won.

Next, the pseudo bonus management process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pseudo bonus management process is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

When the pseudo-bonus winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4901: YES), the bonus precursor counter provided in the main RAM 74 indicates "5" as the value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the bonus precursor state. ” is set (step S4902). A game state becomes a bonus precursor state by setting a value in the bonus precursor counter. The value set in the bonus portent counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is newly executed, and when the value of the bonus portent counter becomes "0", the state shifts to the bonus preparation state. Also, a bonus sign start command indicating that the bonus sign state has been entered is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4903). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus portent start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the bonus portent state is executed.

When the value of the bonus precursor counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4904: YES), the value of the bonus precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4905). If the value of the bonus precursor counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4906: YES), the bonus preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4907). By setting the bonus preparation flag to "1", the game state becomes the bonus preparation state. Also, a bonus preparation start command indicating that the bonus preparation state has been entered is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4908). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus preparation start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the bonus preparation state is executed.

When the bonus preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4909: YES), it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning has been established in the current game (step S4910). If the 2nd RT replay winning has been established (step S4910: YES), it means that the transition from the bonus preparation state to the pseudo-bonus state has occurred, so the pseudo-bonus start processing is executed (step S4911). . After that, a pseudo-bonus start command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state has been entered is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S4912). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the pseudo-bonus start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state is executed. In the pseudo-bonus start command, information on the number of initial continuation games and the number of transition condition games determined in the pseudo-bonus start process, which will be described later, is set. If it is in the pseudo-bonus state (step S4913: YES), the pseudo-bonus progression process is executed (step S4914).

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus start processing in step S4911.

First, a process for determining the number of initial continuous games in the current pseudo-bonus state is executed. Specifically, the initial continuous game number table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5001). Only one type of the initial continuous game number table is prepared regardless of the set values of "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus precursor state this time. In the initial continuation game number table, a plurality of types of initial continuation game numbers are set as the continuation game numbers at the start of the pseudo-bonus state. FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial continuous game number table. As shown in FIG. 98(a), 33 games, 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games are set in the initial continuous game number table as the initial continuous game numbers. In addition, in the initial continuous game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 50%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 30%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 10%. , the selection probability of 50 games is set to 10%.

Here, in the pseudo-bonus state, the first 25 games correspond to the execution period of the pre-branching effect, and in the pre-branching effect, the image display device 63 displays a moving image along with a predetermined story. Then, the execution period of the branching effect occurs after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends. The execution period of the branching effect is set to 8 games, and as the branching effect, the image display device 63 executes an effect indicating whether or not the shift to the ART state ST9 occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends. Concretely, a moving image display is performed in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other. When the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur, a moving image display is performed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and when the notification of the presence or absence of the transition to the ART state ST9 is carried over to the branch effect of the next execution time. A moving image display is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character are drawn.

When 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the execution period of the branching performance occurs once after the execution period of the pre-branching performance ends, and when 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the branching occurs. After the end of the execution period of the pre-branch effect, the execution period of the branch effect occurs twice, and when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the number of initial continuous games, the branch effect is executed after the end of the pre-branch effect execution period. The execution period occurs 3 times. The upper limit of the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect in the pseudo-bonus state is 3 times. Therefore, when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, even if the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is added during execution of the pseudo bonus state, the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect. is not changed. On the other hand, when 33 games or 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, if the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is added during execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the upper limit is 3 times in total. , the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect can be increased.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S5002). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for the number of initial continuous games, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

By checking the random number obtained in step S5002 against the initial continuous game number table read out in step S5001, the initial continuous game number of the current pseudo-bonus state is selected, and the selected initial continuous game number is used as the main game number. It is set in the continuous game number counter 131 provided in the side RAM 74 (step S5003). In other words, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 99, in this embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a continuous game number counter 131 in addition to the ART game number counter 121 . A continuous game number counter 131 is set with the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state. The main MPU 72 checks the number-of-continued-games counter 131 to identify whether or not the game is in the pseudo-bonus state, and also identifies the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state.

Next, a process for determining the transition condition number of games is executed. The number of transition condition games is the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state necessary to win the transition to the ART state ST9 in the current pseudo-bonus state. That is, when the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends.

Specifically, as the processing for determining the transition condition game number, first, the transition condition game number table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5004). Only one transition condition game number table is prepared regardless of the set values "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus precursor state this time. A plurality of transition condition game numbers are set in the transition condition game number table. FIG. 98(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition condition number-of-games table. As shown in FIG. 98(b), 33 games, 41 games, and 49 games are set as transition condition game numbers in the transition condition game number table. In addition, in the transition condition game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 5%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 10%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 85%. .

Here, all of these transition condition game numbers match the initial continuous game number set in the initial continuous game number table as shown in FIG. 98(a). Further, 50 games are set as the number of initial continuation games in the initial continuation game number table, and the 50 games are the number of games larger than any transition condition game number set in the transition condition game number table. there is As already explained, when the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends. Therefore, when 33 games are selected as the transition condition number of games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 41 games, 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial continuation game number. When 41 games are selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the number of initial continuous games, and when 49 games are selected as the transition condition number of games, the initial When 50 games are selected as the number of continuous games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S5005). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the transition condition game number lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding one of the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. get a random number. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

By comparing the random number obtained in step S5005 with the transition condition game number table read out in step S5004, the transition condition game number of the current pseudo-bonus state is selected, and the selected transition condition game number is used as the main game number. It is set in the transition condition game number counter 132 provided in the side RAM 74 (step S5006). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 99, in this embodiment, the transition condition game number counter 132 is provided in the main RAM 74 . The transition condition game number counter 132 is set with the number of remaining transition condition games. Each time one game is played in the pseudo-bonus state, the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 is decremented by 1, and the remaining transition condition game number stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 is counted as the remaining continuation of the pseudo-bonus state. When the number of games exceeds, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state stored in the continuous game number counter 131 exceeds the remaining transition condition game number stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 (step S5007). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5007, the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5008). The ART winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state.

Next, the processing at the start of the game during the pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process at the start of the game during the pseudo-bonus is executed after the determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17).

When winning numbers of "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are set in the role lottery process (FIG. 17) (step S5101: YES), the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". is not set (step S5102: NO), a lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is executed. In the addition lottery process, first, the first addition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5103). In this case, the first add-on table is set so that the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning an additional win, and the winning number with a lower winning probability expects the number of games to be added when the winning number has an added win. The first addition table is set so that the value increases.

FIG. 101(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition table. As shown in FIG. 101(a), the first add-on table has a probability of not winning an add-on win when the winning number set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is "4" or "5". It is set so that the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games will be selected is 10%. In some cases, the probability of not winning an additional game is 70%, the probability of selecting the additional game number of 8 games is 25%, and the probability of selecting the additional game number of 22 games is set to 5%. If the winning number set in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17) is "8", the probability that the additional winning will not be made is 10%, and the probability that the additional game number of 8 games will be selected is 70. 52, 102, 202, and 302 games are set to each have a probability of 5%. If the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) is "15" or "16", the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games will be selected is 50%. The probability of selecting the number of games to be added to the game, the number of games to be added to 52 games, and the number of games to be added to 102 games is 5%, and the probability of selecting the number of games to be added to 202 games and the number of games to be added to 302 games is 5%. It is set to be 15%.

As described above, 8 games or 22 or more games are set as the number of additional games. If 22 games or more are selected among these, the transition to the ART state ST9 is decided at that time. In other words, the minimum number of games to be continued in the initial stage is 33 games, whereas the maximum number of games to be transitioned is 49 games. This is because the number of continuous games will certainly exceed the number of remaining transition condition games.

On the other hand, even if the number of additional games of 8 games is selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be confirmed. For example, if 49 games are selected at the start of the pseudo-bonus state as the transition condition number of games, even if 8 games are added twice in a situation where the initial number of continuous games is 33 games, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the number of transitional games remaining. Further, when 49 games are selected at the start of the pseudo-bonus state as the transition condition number of games, even if 8 games are added once in a situation where the initial number of continuous games is 41 games, the remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state. The number does not exceed the number of transition condition games remaining. Under these circumstances, the number of additional games in which the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be confirmed is set to only 8 games, so even if the number of additional games occurs, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed. In such a case, it is only necessary to simply add the execution period of the branching effect in a mode that does not correspond to the transition to the ART state ST9.

Returning to the description of the game start processing during the pseudo bonus (FIG. 100), after reading the first addition table in step S5103, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S5104). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, the corresponding latch among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is selected in the lottery process for adding the number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state. Get the random number written to the register. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

As a result of collating the random number obtained in step S5104 with the first addition table read out in step S5103, if one of the additional game numbers is selected (step S5105: YES), it is stored in the continuous game number counter 131. It is determined whether or not the sum of the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state and the number of additional games selected this time is a value greater than the number of remaining transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132. Determine (step S5106). If a negative determination is made in step S5106, it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not yet been confirmed, so the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the number-of-continued-games counter 131 (step S5107). . In this case, it means that 8 games have been added in a situation where there is a margin in the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect, so the execution period of the branch effect is added once.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5106, it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed. In this case, the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5108). After that, the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S5109). In other words, when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of added games, including the number of added games that triggered the confirmation of the transition, is not the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state, but the remaining number of the ART state ST9. is added as the number of continuous games. This makes it possible to make it easier for the ART state ST9 to continue for a long time.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is already set to "1" (step S5102: YES), a lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is executed. In the addition lottery process, first, the second addition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5110). In this case, the second add-on table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the additional winning, and the winning number with the lower winning probability expects the number of additional games when the winning number has the added winning. The second addition table is set so that the value increases.

FIG. 101(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition table. As shown in FIG. 101(b), the second add-on table has a probability of not winning an add-on win when the winning number set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is "4" or "5". It is set so that the probability that the number of additional games of 12 games will be selected is 10%. In some cases, the probability of not winning the additional game is 70%, the probability of selecting the additional game number of 12 games is 10%, the additional game number of 22 games, the additional game number of 32 games, and the additional game number of 52 games. and 102 games. The probability of not winning is 10%, the probability of selecting the additional number of games of 12 games is 50%, the probability of selecting the additional number of games of 22 games is 10%, the number of additional games of 32 games and 52 games. The probability that the number of added games will be selected is 5%, the probability that the number of added games will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the number of added games of 202 games and 302 games will be selected. Each is set to be 5%, and if the winning number set in the role lottery process (Fig. 17) is "15" or "16", the number of additional games of 22 games is selected. The probability is 30%, the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 32 games and the number of additional games of 52 games is 10%, and the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 102 games is 20%, and the number of additional games of 202 games is selected. The probability that the number of games and the number of additional games of 302 games will be selected is set to be 15%.

As described above, when the second add-on table is selected, the probability of winning the add-on win is the same as when the first add-on table is selected. However, the expected value of the number of games to be added in the event of an additional win is set so that the second addition table is larger than the first addition table. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of confirming the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state. Further, the minimum number of games to be added is 8 games for the first addition table, while the minimum number of games for the number of games to be added is 12 games for the second addition table. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the advantage of confirming the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state.

Returning to the description of the process at the start of the game during the pseudo bonus (FIG. 100), after reading the second addition table in step S5110, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S5111). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponds to the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Gets the random number written to the latch register. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

As a result of collating the random number acquired in step S5111 with the second addition table read out in step S5110, if any number of addition games is selected (step S5112: YES), the number of ART games in the main RAM 74 The value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the counter 121 (step S5113).

When the process of step S5107 is executed, when the process of step S5109 is executed, or when the process of step S5113 is executed, an addition generation command indicating that an addition to the number of games has occurred is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S5114). Information on the number of added games selected this time is set in the addition generation command, and the number of added games this time is either the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state or the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9. Information is set to indicate whether or not the object is targeted. When the production side MPU 92 receives the addition generation command, it performs execution control of the production according to the aspect corresponding to the addition of this time. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, the pseudo-bonus progression process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The pseudo-bonus progress processing is executed in step S4914 in the pseudo-bonus management processing (FIG. 96), and the pseudo-bonus management processing is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. be. In other words, the situation in which the process for progressing the pseudo-bonus is executed is the situation in which one game has been completed in the pseudo-bonus state. Therefore, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 131 of the main RAM 74 (step S5201), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the transition condition-number-of-games counter 132 of the main RAM 74 (step S5202).

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 131 is "0" (step S5203). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, it means that it is time to end the pseudo-bonus state. In this case, it is determined whether or not the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state (step S5204). .

When the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S5204: YES), ART start processing is executed (step S5205). In the ART start process, information is set in the master side RAM 74 so that the ART state process of step S1707 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 44) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state becomes ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART start processing, information of 50 games, which is the number of games to be started in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 .

After that, an ART start command indicating that the ART state ST9 is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S5206). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, an ART start performance table that enables execution of performance corresponding to the start of ART state ST9 and an ART performance that enables execution of performance corresponding to ART state ST9. The table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. - 特許庁First, after the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART start performance table, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART performance table, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device At 63, the ART effect is executed after the ART start effect is executed. Further, when the effect side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, it adds information of 50 games, which is the number of games to be started in the ART state ST9, to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, 50 games are displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

Here, by confirming the transition to ART state ST9 in the pseudo-bonus state, the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74 is incremented in response to the establishment of the conditions for adding the number of games, and the remainder of ART state ST9 is calculated. The number of continuous games is added. On the other hand, the number of additional games is added to the number-of-stock-games counter 127 of the effect-side RAM 94 in the effect-side MPU 92 . At the start timing of the ART state ST9, the game number added to the stock game number counter 127 is not shifted to the ART subtraction counter 125 and the display counter 126. FIG. Therefore, the player is not notified of the number of games added in the situation in which the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state, but is not notified to the player at the start of ART state ST9. The player is notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the addition of the number of games is notified during the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S5204: NO), it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state. In this case, a pseudo-bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state has ended without transition to the ART state ST9 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S5207). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the pseudo-bonus end command, the bonus end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the termination of the pseudo-bonus state and the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 can be executed. A normal performance table to be played is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加First, after the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the bonus end performance table, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal performance table, whereby the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device. At 63, the normal effect is executed after the bonus end effect is first executed.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 103, how the handling of the number of additional games changes according to the state of the ART winning flag in the pseudo-bonus state will be described. 103(a) shows the execution period of the pseudo-bonus state, FIG. 103(b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 103(c) shows the state of the ART winning flag, and FIG. 103(d) FIG. 103(e) shows addition timing to the continuous game number counter 131 of the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 103(f) shows addition timing to the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74. FIG.

First, the case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined in the pseudo-bonus state will be described.

At the timing of t1, a pseudo-bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 103(a). Since the initial number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined when the pseudo-bonus state starts, the initial number of continued games is added to the number-of-continued-games counter 131 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 103(e). However, since the initial number of continuous games is equal to or less than the transition condition number of games, the ART winning flag is not set to "1" at the start of the pseudo-bonus state as shown in FIG. 103(c).

After that, at timings t2 and t3 during the execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the addition generation timings are set as shown in FIG. 103(d). However, at any of these timings, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103(e), the number of additional games is added to the number-of-continued-games counter 131 at timings t2 and t3. Also, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the ART win flag is not set to "1" at either timing t2 or timing t3.

After that, at the timing of t4, the pseudo-bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103(a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the transition to ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 103(b).

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state will be described.

At the timing of t5, a pseudo-bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 103(a). Since the initial number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined when the pseudo-bonus state starts, the initial number of continued games is added to the number-of-continued-games counter 131 at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 103(e). However, since the number of initial continuous games is equal to or less than the transition condition number of games, the ART winning flag is not set to "1" at the start of the pseudo-bonus state as shown in FIG. 103(c).

After that, at the timing of t6 during execution of the pseudo-bonus state, it becomes the addition generation timing as shown in FIG. 103(d). By adding the number of additional games to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state, the remaining number of continuous games exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), and the number of additional games this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103(f). be done.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 103(d), it becomes the addition occurrence timing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the ART win flag has already been set to "1", so the number of additional games this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103(f). be.

After that, at the timing of t8, the pseudo-bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103(a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the game moves to ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103(b).

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the pseudo-bonus state is started will be described.

At the timing of t9, a pseudo-bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 103(a). Since the initial number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined when the pseudo-bonus state starts, the initial number of continued games is added to the number-of-continued-games counter 131 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 103(e). In this case, the initial continuation game number exceeds the transition condition game number. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the ART win flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c).

After that, at timings t10 and t11, the addition occurrence timings are set as shown in FIG. 103(d). In this case, since the ART winning flag is already set to "1" as shown in FIG. is added.

After that, at the timing of t12, the pseudo-bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103(a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the game moves to ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103(b).

Next, the pseudo-bonus effect control processing executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process for the pseudo-bonus is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the pseudo-bonus state.

If a pseudo bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5301: YES), a pre-branch effect start setting process is executed (step S5302). In the pre-branching performance start setting process, a pre-branching performance table that enables execution of the pre-branching performance is read from the performance-side ROM 93 and stored in the performance-side RAM 94 . The pre-branching effect table is set with information that enables the execution of the pre-branching effect that continues over 25 games. By performing the time control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the pre-branch effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the pre-branch effect over 25 games.

After that, the number of occurrences of the branching performance generated in the current pseudo-bonus state is grasped from the information of the number of initial continuous games set in the pseudo-bonus start command, and the information of the grasped number of occurrences of the branching performance is stored in the performance-side RAM 94. It is set to the provided branch effect counter (step S5303). The performance side MPU 92 executes the branch performance until the value of the branch performance counter becomes "0" after the end of the pre-branch performance.

After that, by determining whether or not the number of initial continuous games set in the pseudo-bonus start command exceeds the transition condition game number also set in the pseudo-bonus start command, the ART at the start of the pseudo-bonus state It is determined whether or not the transition to state ST9 is confirmed (step S5304). When a negative determination is made in step S5304, setting processing of branch effect for ART non-winning is executed (step S5305). In the setting process, if the number of branch performances currently scheduled to be executed is one, a defeat performance table in which the result of the branch performance is the defeat of the teammate character is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加In this case, the effect side MPU 92 performs execution control of the effect according to the defeat effect table after completing the effect execution control according to the pre-branching effect table. Further, in the setting process, if the number of times of the branching effects currently scheduled to be executed is plural, a draw effect table in which the result of the branching effects of the execution times before the final time is a draw is set as many times as the number of execution times. It is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94, and a defeat performance table in which the result of the final branch performance is the defeat of the teammate character is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加In this case, after the effect execution control by the pre-branch effect table is completed, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect execution control by the draw effect table for the number of times the draw effect table is stored in the effect-side RAM 94, and then Execution control of the performance by the defeat performance table is performed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, setting processing of branch effects for winning ART is executed (step S5306). The case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at the start of the pseudo-bonus state is the case where any one of 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games is selected as the number of initial continuous games, and if 41 games, the process branches. The effect is executed twice, and the branch effect is executed three times in the case of 49 games or 50 games. In other words, when the process of setting the branch effect for winning ART is executed, the branch effect is executed two or more times. In this case, in the setting process, a draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution times before the final time is a draw is read from the effect side ROM 93 for the number of times of execution and stored in the effect side RAM 94, A victory performance table in which the result of the final branch performance is the victory of the teammate character is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加In this case, after the effect execution control by the pre-branch effect table is completed, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect execution control by the draw effect table for the number of times the draw effect table is stored in the effect-side RAM 94, and then Execution control of the performance by the victory performance table is performed.

After that, the ART winning flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5307). The ART winning flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in this pseudo-bonus state.

In the pseudo-bonus effect control process, when a new game is executed and the pre-branch effect update timing has come (step S5308: YES), the pre-branch effect update setting process is executed (step S5309). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the pre-branch effect table currently being referred to is performed according to the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the pre-branching effect changes according to the number of games in which the pre-branching effect continues. Further, in the update setting processing, when it is time to end the pre-branching performance, the performance execution control is started according to any kind of branch performance table set as the next reference target in the performance-side RAM 94.例文帳に追加As a result, the branch effect of the first execution is started.

In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, if the addition generation command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S5310: YES), if the ART winning flag of the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S5311 : NO), by determining whether or not information indicating that the number of remaining games in the ART state ST9 is to be added is set in the addition generation command received this time, the ART in the current game is determined. It is determined whether or not the transition to state ST9 has been confirmed (step S5312).

When a negative determination is made in step S5312, adjustment processing of the branch effect for ART non-winning is executed (step S5313). The case where the number of games has been added but the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed means that the number of games to be added this time is 8 games. Therefore, in the branch performance adjustment processing for ART non-winning, adjustment is made so that one execution of the branch performance resulting in a tie is added before the execution of the branch performance resulting in a loss. Specifically, if it is a stage before execution control of the performance by the defeat performance table is performed, the draw performance table is stored in the performance side RAM 94 so as to be executed before the execution control of the performance by the defeat performance table is performed. Memorize. In addition, at the stage of performing execution control of the performance by the defeat performance table, the content of the defeat performance table is corrected to the content that finally results in a draw, and the defeat performance table is changed so as to be executed after that. It is stored in the performance-side RAM 94 .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5312, adjustment processing of branch effect for ART winning is executed (step S5314). When the number of games is added and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of games to be added this time is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Therefore, in the adjustment processing of the branch presentation for winning ART, the content of the branch presentation resulting in defeat is changed to the content of branch presentation resulting in victory. Specifically, if it is a stage before execution control of the effect by the defeat effect table is performed, the defeat effect table is changed to the victory effect table. Further, at the stage of performing execution control of the performance by the defeat performance table, the content of the defeat performance table is corrected to the content of the final victory result. After that, "1" is set in the ART winning completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5315), and the value corresponding to the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command received this time is set to the number of stock games counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94. (step S5316).

If the addition generation command is received in a situation where the ART winning flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5311. In this case, the value corresponding to the number of add-on games set in the add-on occurrence command received this time is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S5316).

In the pseudo-bonus effect control process, when a new game is executed and the branch effect update timing has come (step S5317: YES), the branch effect update setting process is executed (step S5318). In the update setting process, a process of changing the range to be referred to in the branch effect table (the draw effect table, the defeat effect table or the victory effect table) currently being referred to is executed according to the new start of one game. . As a result, the execution content of the branching effect changes according to the number of games in which the branching effect continues. In addition, in the update setting process, when it is the end timing of the branch effect of one execution time and the execution time of the branch effect to be executed remains, it is set as the next reference target in the effect side RAM 94 Execution control of performance is started according to any kind of branch performance table.

How the before-branch effect and the branch effect are executed in the pseudo-bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 105(a) shows the execution period of the pseudo-bonus state, FIG. 105(b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 105(c) shows the execution period of the pre-branching effect, and FIG. 105(d). indicates the execution period of the branch effect, FIG. 105(e) shows the timing at which the effect side MPU 92 receives the command to generate the addition, FIG. 105(f) shows the additional timing of one execution of the branch effect, FIG. g) indicates the timing of correcting the contents of the branch effect.

First, the case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined in the pseudo-bonus state will be described.

At the timing of t1, a pseudo-bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 105(a). In addition, since 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect in the current pseudo-bonus state is 1 at this time. Also, while 33 games are selected as the number of initial continuous games, the transition condition number of games is set to 41 games, so transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at this start timing. At the timing of t1, a pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 105(c).

After that, at the timing of t2 in which the pre-branching effect is being executed, an addition command is received from the main side MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 8 games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games is generated, the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105(f) at the timing of t2, the scheduled execution number of branch effects is added by one with the occurrence of the number of additional games this time, and the scheduled execution number of branch effects becomes two.

After that, at the timing of t3, the effect before branching ends as shown in FIG. 105(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), one execution of the branch effect that results in a draw is executed over the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the defeat is performed over the timing of t5 to t6. One run of the resulting branch effect is executed. The pseudo-bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 105(a) at the timing of t6 when the branch effect resulting in the defeat ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 105(b).

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed while the pre-branching effect is being executed will be described.

At the timing of t7, a pseudo-bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 105(a). In addition, since 33 games are selected as the number of initial continuous games, at this time point, the scheduled execution number of branch effects in the current pseudo-bonus state is one. Further, 33 games are selected as the number of initial continuous games, whereas the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, so transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at the start timing. Also, at the timing of t7, a pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 105(c).

After that, at the timing of t8 when the pre-branching effect is being executed, an add-on command is received from the main side MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 22 games. Therefore, the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games due to the occurrence of the additional game number. Therefore, at the timing t8, the content of the branch effect corresponding to the loss result scheduled to be executed is corrected to the win result as shown in FIG. 105(g).

After that, at the timing of t9, the pre-branch effect ends as shown in FIG. 105(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), one execution of the branch effect that results in victory is executed over the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. The pseudo-bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 105(a) at the timing of t10 when the branch effect resulting in the winning result ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the transition to the ART state ST9 is made as shown in FIG. 105(b).

Next, a case will be described where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed during execution of the branch effect resulting in the defeat.

At the timing of t11, a pseudo-bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 105(a). In addition, since 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect in the current pseudo-bonus state is 1 at this time. Also, while 33 games are selected as the number of initial continuous games, the transition condition number of games is set to 41 games, so transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at this start timing. Also, at the timing of t11, a pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 105(c).

After that, at the timing of t12 when the pre-branching effect is being executed, an add-on command is received from the main side MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 8 games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games is generated, the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105(f), at the timing of t12, the scheduled number of executions of the branching effect is added once with the occurrence of the number of additional games this time, and the scheduled number of executions of the branching effect becomes two.

After that, at the timing of t13, the effect before branching ends as shown in FIG. 105(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), one execution of the branch effect that results in a draw is executed over the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. One run is started.

At the timing of t16, which is the situation in which the branch effect resulting in the defeat is being executed, an addition generation command is received from the main side MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 8 games. Therefore, the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games due to the occurrence of the additional game number. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 105(g), the content of the branch presentation corresponding to the defeat result currently being executed is corrected to the victory result.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 105(d), the branch effect corresponding to the winning result ends. At the timing of t17, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 105(a). In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the transition to the ART state ST9 is made as shown in FIG. 105(b).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the total number of games awarded to the player in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number, the transition condition game number is determined by lottery. As a result, when the pseudo-bonus state is entered, it is expected that the transition condition game number with a smaller number of games will be selected, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the pseudo-bonus state is started, the initial number of continuous games is determined by lottery. Then, when the number of initial continuous games determined by the lottery exceeds the transition condition number of games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. As a result, it is possible to diversify patterns in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state.

An extra number of games can be given during the pseudo-bonus state. As a result, even if the total number of games given to the player does not exceed the number of transition condition games at the stage when the pseudo-bonus state is started, the additional number of games is given during the pseudo-bonus state and the transition is made. Exceeding the number of conditional games may occur. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the pseudo-bonus state.

If the number of additional games is given in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state but does not exceed the number of transition condition games, the number of additional games is consumed in the pseudo-bonus state. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state increases.

When the number of additional games given during the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, the number of additional games is consumed in the ART state ST9 that occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

If the number of additional games is provided in the pseudo-bonus state in which the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed, the number of additional games is consumed in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state increases even though the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed, and the game in the pseudo-bonus state is delayed. It becomes possible.

Until the total number of games given to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state, and the total number of games given to the player becomes the number of transition condition games. After exceeding the number of games, a lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the lottery process for adding the number of games in a manner suitable for each situation. Also, the earlier the timing of exceeding the transition condition number of games, the longer the period during which the lottery process for adding the number of games can be secured in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9.

Even if the transition condition game number is exceeded at the stage when the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined, the initial number of continuous games is completed in the pseudo-bonus state. Thus, even in a situation where it is certain that the ART state ST9 will occur after the end of the pseudo-bonus state, it is possible to finish the game to some extent in the pseudo-bonus state.

In place of the configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games awarded to the player in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the number of transition condition games, the number of games awarded to the player in the pseudo-bonus state is equal to or greater than the transition condition number of games, the transition to the ART state ST9 may be determined.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined by lottery, the configuration may be such that the initial number of continuous games is a fixed number of games. In this case, the fixed number of games may or may not exceed the transition condition game number depending on the lottery result of the transition condition game number. Also, the fixed number of games may be configured so as not to exceed the transition condition number of games. In this case, the number of games given to the player does not exceed the number of transition condition games unless the additional number of games is given in the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, in the case where the number of games to be added in the pseudo-bonus state is given, if the number of games given to the player exceeds the number of games for the transition condition with the provision of the number of games to be added as a trigger, the number of games to be given to the player exceeds the number of games for the transition condition. Instead of the configuration in which the bonus is consumed in the state ST9, it may be configured to be consumed in the pseudo-bonus state. This allows the pseudo bonus state to continue for a long time.

Further, the number of additional games given when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state is added to the number-of-stock-games counter 127 so as not to notify the player, but at least the ART The configuration may be such that notification is made before the start timing of state ST9. For example, in the game in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state, it is notified that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed, and each time the number of additional games is awarded in the pseudo-bonus state, it is awarded. A configuration may be adopted in which a notification indicating that the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9 has increased is executed in the last game. In addition, in a game in which the number of games to be added is not notified, but when the pseudo-bonus state ends and the ART state ST9 is started, the number of games to be added in the pseudo-bonus state is added to the initial continuous game number of the ART state ST9. The number of games remaining in the ART state ST9 may be notified after the number of games has been added.

Further, in place of the configuration in which the number of additional games is more advantageous for the player after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state than before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, any Even if the number of additional games is given, the advantage may be the same or substantially the same. It may be configured such that it is advantageous for the player regarding the addition of the number of games to be added.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the addition table executed in the game number addition lottery process is different from that of the second embodiment. The configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

106(a) to 106(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the addition tables 141 to 144 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, as the additional tables 141 to 144, a first additional table 141 shown in FIG. 106(a), a second additional table 142 shown in FIG. 106(b), and a third additional table shown in FIG. 143 and a fourth addition table 144 shown in FIG. Although the details will be described later, the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are not stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as they are. Fourth compressed data 146 to 149 are stored in the main ROM 73 in advance.

The first add-on table 141 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed in the pseudo-bonus state when the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed. The second add-on table 142 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed in a situation where the shift to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state. The third add-on table 143 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed as a direct add-on while the A loop and B loop are not executed in the ART state ST9. The fourth add-on table 144 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed as a direct add-on while the A loop or B loop is being executed in the ART state ST9.

As shown in FIGS. 106(a) to 106(d), in each of the first addition table 141, the second addition table 142, the third addition table 143, and the fourth addition table 144, numerical information of the addition index is set. In addition, for each group of winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16", the number of random numbers to be won is set corresponding to the numerical information of the added index. specified data area is set. Specifically, in these data areas, values from "0" to "8" are set in serial numbers as the numerical information of the additional index. In this case, 1-byte data is assigned to each data area in which the numerical information of the superimposed index is set. In other words, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, nine data areas of "0" to "8" are set as the numerical information of the addition index. It is data for 1 byte.

Numerical information of the additional index is numerical information for specifying the actual number of additional games in the main MPU 72 . An index correspondence table 145 is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as data for specifying the actual number of games to be added to the numerical information of the added index. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index correspondence table 145. As shown in FIG. Numerical information of the add-on index of "0" corresponds to the fact that the number of add-on games is 0, that is, the result of the add-on lottery process is a loss. Numerical information of the add-on index of "1" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 8 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "2" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 12 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "3" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 22 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "4" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 32 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "5" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 52 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "6" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 102 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "7" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 202 games. Numerical information of the add-on index of "8" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 302 games.

As described above, in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of the number of games to be added is not set as it is, but the numerical information of the addition index is set, and the index correspondence table 145 is used to set the numerical value of the addition index. The data volume of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 can be suppressed by deriving the numerical information of the number of added games from the information. In other words, the numerical information of the number of games to be added is 302 games at maximum, and 9 bits are required to express the numerical information in binary, and 2 bytes are required in byte units. Then, in order to standardize the processing in the process of adding the number of additional games, if the data volume of the data area in which the numerical information of each number of additional games is set is fixed, the numerical information of the maximum number of additional games Therefore, the data capacity of each data area in which the numerical information of each additional game number is set is 2 bytes. In this case, if the numerical information of the number of additional games is set in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 as they are, 2 bytes×9×4=72 bytes are required. On the other hand, in the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of the add-on index having a data capacity of 1 byte is set, and the numerical information of the actual number of add-on games is derived from the numerical information of the add-on index. When using the index correspondence table 145 for the index table 145, 36 bytes (1 byte x 9 x 4) is required as the data capacity for setting the numerical information of the added indexes in the first to fourth added tables 141 to 144. In addition, 1 byte x 9 + 2 bytes x 9 = 27 bytes are required in the index correspondence table 145, for a total of 63 bytes. This 63 bytes is a data capacity smaller than 72 bytes when the numerical information of each additional game number is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 145 as it is.

106(a) to 106(d), the data areas in which the number of winning random numbers in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are set are "4" to "8", The winning numbers of '15' and '16' are divided into the first group including the winning numbers of '4' and '5', the second group including the winning numbers of '6' and '7', and the winning number of '8'. , and the fourth group includes winning numbers of '15' and '16'. Further, in the present embodiment, dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d for 16-bit random numbers are used in the additional lottery process. In each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the number of winning random numbers for winning the numerical information of each additional index in the first group, and the numerical information of each additional index in the second group. The number of winning random numbers for winning, the number of winning random numbers for winning the numerical information of each additional index in the third group, and the number of winning random numbers for winning the numerical information of each additional index in the fourth group and the number of winning random numbers are set.

Here, the types of numerical value information of the add-on indexes for which the number of winning random numbers equal to or greater than 1 are set are different in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106(a), in the first superimposition table 141, the numerical information of the superimposition indexes of "0", "1", "6" to "8" includes the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers equal to or greater than 1 is set in any of the above, the numerical information of the additional indices of "2" to "5" is the winning random number in any of the first to fourth groups. The number is set to 0. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106(b), in the second addition table 142, the number of winning random numbers equal to or greater than 1 in any of the first to fourth groups is set for the numerical information of the addition index other than "2". On the other hand, the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the added index of "2". Further, as shown in FIG. 106(c), in the third superimposition table 143, the numerical value information of the superimposition indexes of "0", "2" to "4" is 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers is set as follows, the number of winning random numbers is 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the added indexes of "1", "5" to "8". are set individually. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106(d), in the fourth addition table 144, the numerical information of the addition index of "6" to "8" is a winning random number that is 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number is set, the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in all of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the added indexes of "0" to "5".

As described above, in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, in each of the first to fourth groups, there is numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0. However, since numerical information of "0" to "8" is commonly set as numerical information of the added indexes in any of the first to fourth added tables 141 to 144, the first to fourth added tables 141 to 144 It becomes possible to use the index correspondence table 145 in common in the fourth addition tables 141 to 144 . That is, when non-common addition index numerical information is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 is associated with each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. However, since the numerical information of the common addition index is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 as described above, one type of index correspondence table 145 can be used in common. available. As a result, the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145 can be suppressed, and the common index correspondence table 145 can be read out regardless of which one of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is used. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the index correspondence table 145 because it is sufficient to use it.

In the addition lottery process, the tables to be referred to among the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are developed in the main side RAM 74, but the main side ROM 73 stores the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. are not stored as they are, but are stored as first to fourth compressed data 146-149. In each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, as already explained, there is numerical information of add-on indexes in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in all of the first to fourth groups. there is Therefore, the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 do not have data indicating the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0.

The first to fourth compressed data 146-149 will be described in detail below. 108(a) to 108(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. FIG.

The first compressed data 146 is data for creating the first add table 141, the second compressed data 147 is data for creating the second add table 142, and the third compressed data 148 is the third add table. 143 , and the fourth compressed data 149 is data for creating the fourth superimposition table 144 . As shown in FIGS. 108(a) to 108(d), the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 are set with header data and actual data.

Information is set in the header data to indicate which numerical information of the superimposed index corresponds to the actual data set in the corresponding compressed data 146 to 149 . In addition, in the actual data, one or more winning random numbers are set in any of the first to fourth groups. Regarding the numerical information of the additional index, the winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups number of information is set. In this case, information on the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of a plurality of additional indices is set as the actual data, and each of these pieces of information is arranged in ascending order when viewed from the numerical information of the additional indices. there is

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(a), 2-byte header data is set as the leading data of the first compressed data 146, and the header data contains actual data in the first compressed data 146. "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8" are set as information that can specify the numerical information of the added index. Five unit real data are set as real data, and the first unit real data set following the header data has a value of "0" in the numerical information of the superposition index in the first superposition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "1" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "6" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "7" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "8" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the addition lottery process using the first addition table 141, the first addition table 141 is stored in the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the first compressed data 146 read from the main ROM 73. unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added indexes of "0" to "8" are written in the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the superimposed index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit real data arranged in the real data is written corresponding to the numerical information of the added index already written in the main side RAM 74 in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the added index. As a result, the numerical value information of the added indexes of "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8" is set to the information of the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups. becomes. After that, for each of the 1st to 4th groups, the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74 corresponds to 0. information settings. As a result, the first superimposed table 141 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the first compressed data 146 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the second compressed data 147 has 2-byte header data set as leading data, and the header data does not contain actual data in the second compressed data 147. "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" are set as information that can specify the numerical information of the added index . Eight unit real data are set as real data, and the first unit real data set following the header data has a value of "0" in the numerical information of the superposition index in the second superposition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. In addition, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "2" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "3" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "4" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "5" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the sixth unit actual data set following the fifth unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "6" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Also, the seventh unit real data set following the sixth unit real data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the superimposition index "7" in the second superimposition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Also, the eighth unit real data set following the seventh unit real data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the superposition index "8" in the second superposition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the addition lottery process using the second addition table 142 , the second addition table 142 is stored in the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the second compressed data 147 read from the main ROM 73 . unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added indexes of "0" to "8" are written in the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the superimposed index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit real data arranged in the real data is written corresponding to the numerical information of the added index already written in the main side RAM 74 in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the added index. As a result, the numerical information of the added indices of "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" are obtained for each of the first to fourth groups. , information on the number of winning random numbers is set. After that, for each of the 1st to 4th groups, the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74 corresponds to 0. information settings. As a result, the second added table 142 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the second compressed data 147 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(c), 2-byte header data is set as the leading data of the third compressed data 148, and the header data contains actual data in the third compressed data 148. "0", "2", "3", and "4" are set as information that enables identification of the numerical information of the added index. Four units of real data are set as real data, and the first unit real data set following the header data has a value of "0" in the numerical information of the superposition index in the third superposition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. Also, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "2" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit real data set following the second unit real data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the superimposition index "3" in the third superimposition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "4" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the addition lottery process using the third addition table 143, the third addition table 143 is stored in the main RAM 74 by executing the decoding process on the third compressed data 148 read from the main ROM 73. unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added indexes of "0" to "8" are written in the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numeric information of the superimposed index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit real data arranged in the real data is written corresponding to the numerical information of the added index already written in the main side RAM 74 in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the added index. As a result, information on the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information of the added indexes of "0", "2", "3", and "4". After that, for each of the 1st to 4th groups, the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74 corresponds to 0. information settings. As a result, the third superimposed table 143 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the third compressed data 148 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(d), 2-byte header data is set as the leading data of the fourth compressed data 149, and the header data contains actual data in the fourth compressed data 149. "6", "7", and "8" are set as information that enables identification of the numerical information of the added index. Also, three unit real data are set as real data, and the first unit real data set following the header data in the fourth superimposition table 144 has the value of "6" in the numerical information of the superimposition index. Information on the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. Further, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set to each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "7" in the fourth addition table 144. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Further, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "8" in the fourth addition table 144. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the addition lottery process using the fourth addition table 144, the fourth addition table 144 is stored in the main RAM 74 by decoding the fourth compressed data 149 read from the main ROM 73. unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the added indexes of "0" to "8" are written in the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numeric information of the superimposed index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit real data arranged in the real data is written corresponding to the numerical information of the added index already written in the main side RAM 74 in order from the numerical information of the smaller value among the numerical information of the added index. As a result, information on the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the first to fourth groups with respect to the numerical information of the added indexes of "6", "7", and "8". After that, for each of the 1st to 4th groups, the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information not set in the header data among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74 corresponds to 0. information settings. As a result, the fourth superimposed table 144 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the fourth compressed data 149 .

In a configuration in which the random number used in the additional lottery process is 16 bits, from the viewpoint of simplifying the process when specifying the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of each additional index in the additional lottery process, the first The data capacity of the data area in which the number of winning random numbers is set in each of the fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is set to 2 bytes. 1st to 4th groups are set in the 1st to 4th addition tables 141 to 144, and each of the 1st to 4th groups corresponds to the numerical information of the addition indexes "0" to "8". Since the data representing the number of winning random numbers is set, the data capacity for specifying the information of the number of winning random numbers is 2 bytes x 9 in any of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. 4 x 72 bytes. Numerical information of the superimposed indexes "0" to "8" is set in the first to fourth superimposed tables 141 to 144, and each of the numerical information has a data capacity of 1 byte. Therefore, the data capacity of each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is 72 bytes+1 byte×9, or 81 bytes. On the other hand, the data capacity of the first compressed data 146 is 42 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the 2-byte×4×5 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the first superimposition table 141 . . The data capacity of the second compressed data 147 is 66 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the 2-byte×4×8 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the second superimposition table 142 . The data capacity of the third compressed data 148 is 34 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the 2-byte×4×4 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the third superimposition table 143 . The data capacity of the fourth compressed data 149 is 26 bytes, which is the sum of the 2-byte header data and the 2-byte×4×3 actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the fourth superimposition table 144 . This makes it possible to use the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 while suppressing the required data capacity in the main ROM 73 .

Next, the addition lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 using the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that when one game is newly started, the additional lottery process is executed after the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the combination is executed and before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

First, among the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the compressed data 146 to 149 corresponding to the current gaming situation are read out from the main ROM 73 (step S5401). After that, the numerical information of the added indices from "0" to "8" is written in the main RAM 74 in ascending order (step S5402).

After that, in step S5401, the numerical information of the added index set in the header data of the compressed data 146 to 149 read out is read, and in step S5401, the numerical information of the numerical value of the added index is sequentially read from the numerical information of the smaller value. Each unit real data arranged in the real data of the read compressed data 146 to 149 is written corresponding to the numerical information of the added index already written in the main RAM 74 (step S5403). After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main RAM 74, the numerical information not set in the header data corresponds to the fact that the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is 0. Information is set (step S5404).

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S5405). In the random number acquisition process, a 16-bit random number updated by the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d corresponding to the additional lottery process is acquired.

After that, an additional index acquisition process is executed (step S5406). FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing processing for acquiring an added index. In steps S5401 to S5404, the group corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination among the first to fourth groups in the addition tables 141 to 144 developed in the main RAM 74 is selected. grasp (step S5501). After that, "9" corresponding to the maximum value of the numerical information of the added index is set in the repetition counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5502). Also, the value of the 16-bit random number obtained in step S5405 is set in the determination value counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5503).

After that, in steps S5401 to S5404, among the addition tables 141 to 144 developed in the main RAM 74, in the group grasped in step S5501, it corresponds to the numerical information of the addition index corresponding to the value of the repetition counter of the main RAM 74. Then, the set winning random numbers are read out (step S5504). In this case, for example, if the value of the repetition counter is "9", the number of winning random numbers set corresponding to the numerical information of the added index of "8" is read, and if the value of the repetition counter is "5", The number of winning random numbers set in correspondence with the numerical information of the added index of "4" is read, and if the value of the repetition counter is "1", it is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the added index of "0". Reads the number of winning random numbers. Then, the determined winning random number is added to the determination value counter of the main RAM 74 (step S5505).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the determination value counter after the addition has exceeded the maximum value of 16-bit random number "65535" (step S5506). If a negative determination is made in step S5506, it means that the numerical information of the added index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter was not won. In this case, the value of the repetition counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S5507). The processing of steps S5504 to S5506 is executed for the value of the repetition counter in .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5506, it means that the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current repetition counter value has been won. Therefore, numerical information of the added index corresponding to the current repetition counter value is obtained (step S5509). For example, if the value of the repetition counter is "9", "8" is obtained as the numerical information of the additional index, and if the value of the repetition counter is "5", "4" is obtained as the numerical information of the additional index. If the value of the counter is "1", "0" is acquired as the numerical information of the added index.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5508, an affirmative determination should be made in step S5506 at the timing when one of the numerical information of the additional index from "0" to "8" is selected. However, assuming that no positive determination is made in step S5506 for any of the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8", processing is executed to notify the abnormality (step S5510). . As a result, it is possible to inform the administrator of the game hall when there is an electrical noise or a problem with the set value of the addition table.

Returning to the description of the additional lottery process (FIG. 109), after executing the additional index acquisition process in step S5406, the index correspondence table 145 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5407). Thereafter, information on the number of additional games corresponding to the information on the additional index acquired in step S5406 is read from the index correspondence table 145 (step S5408). Then, the read out information on the number of additional games is added to the counter that is currently subject to addition (step S5409).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Even if there is numerical information of the addition index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 , and all of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, numerical information of "0" to "8" are commonly set as numerical information of the addition index. This makes it possible to use the index correspondence table 145 in common in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 . That is, when non-common addition index numerical information is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 is associated with each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. However, since the numerical information of the common addition index is set in each of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 as described above, one type of index correspondence table 145 can be used in common. It becomes possible to use. As a result, the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145 can be suppressed, and the common index correspondence table 145 can be read out regardless of which one of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is used. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the index correspondence table 145 because it is sufficient to use it.

In the addition lottery process, the tables to be referred to among the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are developed in the main side RAM 74, but the main side ROM 73 stores the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144. are not stored as they are, but are stored as first to fourth compressed data 146-149. In each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, as already explained, there is numerical information of add-on indexes in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in all of the first to fourth groups. there is On the other hand, in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 has data indicating the number of winning random numbers. not This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity of the main-side ROM 73 .

Even if there is a lottery table in which the number of winning random numbers is not set to a predetermined index value as described above, the configuration in which the index values are made common among a plurality of lottery tables is referred to as an additional lottery process. It may be applied to a table group for other lottery instead of the table group for lottery.

Further, the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are not limited to the configuration stored in the main ROM 73 as the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. 144 may be stored in the main ROM 73 as it is.

Further, the data structure of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 is not limited to the one described above, and any specific data structure can be used as long as the data can be compressed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the random number acquisition process in the main MPU 72 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

In steps S5601 to S5608, the same processes as steps S501 to S508 of the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, when the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are the random number acquisition targets, the random numbers updated by the corresponding dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are acquired.

If the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to use the random number (step S5607: NO), the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S5609). The random number pointer is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for the random number. can take When the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a is used for the random number, and when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b is used for the random number, When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is used for random numbers. Target (m is an integer of 0 or more).

If the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "11" (step S5610: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S5611). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is used in the lottery process within the numerical range of "0" to "11", and when the maximum value of the numerical range is exceeded, the value is reduced to the minimum value. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a are used according to a predetermined order every time they are used for the lottery process. 101l are sequentially changed, and after the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the last order are used, the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in the first order are used again.

If a negative determination is made in step S5610, or if the process of step S5611 is executed, the random numbers of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are the current random numbers. Numerical information on the random number is obtained from the latch register written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game (step S5612).

After that, it is determined whether or not the random number to be obtained this time is a 16-bit random number (step S5613). That is, in this embodiment, not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers may be obtained using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. If a negative determination is made in step S5613, it means that the random number to be obtained this time is an 8-bit random number, so the random number obtaining process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5613, it is determined whether or not a 16-bit random number has been obtained (step S5614). If a negative determination is made in step S5614, the processes of steps S5609 to S5612 are executed again, and the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that have already acquired the 8-bit random numbers to be acquired are processed in the next acquisition order. An 8-bit random number is additionally obtained from certain shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. As a result, a 16-bit random number is obtained in total from the already obtained 8-bit random number and the newly obtained 8-bit random number.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is possible to obtain not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the types of lottery processes for which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used.

When obtaining an 8-bit random number, the 8-bit random number is obtained from one of the first to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and when obtaining a 16-bit random number, the first to 12th common 8-bit random numbers are obtained from two of the random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to obtain a 16-bit random number while using a processing configuration for obtaining an 8-bit random number. In addition, since the update cycle of the 8-bit random number is shorter than the update cycle of the 16-bit random number, when acquiring the 16-bit random number, two 8-bit random numbers are acquired, thereby shortening the update cycle. A 16-bit random number can be used.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for supplying clock signals to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the random number circuit group 100 in this embodiment.

The configuration of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d in the random number circuit group 100 is the same as that of the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a common clock circuit 104 is provided for the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. , 101l, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Twelfth clock circuits 151a-151l are provided. The output periods of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are different from each other, and are set so as not to be in a multiple relationship with each other. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at arbitrary timings.

In addition, the clock signal output periods of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are all sufficiently shorter than the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41. FIG. For example, while the time required for a player to operate the start lever 41 is one second, the clock signal output period of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l ranges from 3 microseconds to 30 microseconds. It has become. As a result, the difference between the random number update cycles in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is sufficiently small in relation to the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41. FIG.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of normal effect control processing in the effect side MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing normal effect control processing in this embodiment.

In step S5701, the same processing as steps S2201 to S2210 of the normal effect control processing (FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5702). The chance effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. If the value of the chance effect flag is "0" (step S5702: NO), it is determined whether or not a chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5703). If the chance start command has been received (step S5703: YES), it is determined whether or not the false portent effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5704).

When the false portent effect flag is set to "1" (step S5704: YES), it is determined whether or not the currently executed false portent effect is to be stopped (step S5705). The false portent effect includes a type in which an effect with a high degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed and a type in which a type with a low degree of expectation for the transition to the ART state ST9 is executed. Since the false portent state ST5 is a game state that does not lead to transition to the ART state ST9 in the first place, the ART state ST9 is entered after the false portent effect is completed regardless of the type of false portent effect being executed. transition does not occur.

If the currently executed false portent effect is of a type in which an effect with a low degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, an affirmative determination is made in step S5705, and the false portent effect flag is cleared to "0". (Step S5706). As a result, the false portent effect that is being executed is stopped halfway along with the transition to the chance state ST7.

When a negative determination is made in step S5704, or when the processing of step S5706 is executed, a chance production start setting processing is executed (step S5707). In the chance production start setting process, a chance production table enabling the execution of the chance production corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The chance production is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the production in the production side MPU 92 according to the chance production table. Then, the player can recognize that the chance state ST7 is reached by confirming the effect. After that, the chance effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5708).

On the other hand, if the currently executed false portent effect is a type of effect in which the degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is high, a negative determination is made in step S5705. In this case, "1" is set to the chance waiting flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S5709). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that the start of the chance effect is waiting due to the fact that the false portent effect corresponding to the false portent state ST5 is being executed. be. Here, in the main side MPU 72, when a transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent state ST5 is ended in the middle and the state is shifted to the chance state ST7. On the other hand, even if the shift to the chance state ST7 occurs in the middle of the false portent effect, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect with a high degree of expectation for the transition to the ART state ST9 in the false portent effect being executed. In the case of the type, the false portent effect is continued even if the control corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed by the main side MPU 72 without ending the false portent effect in the middle. As a result, as a game state, by prioritizing the transition to the chance state ST7 over the continuation of the false portent state ST5, it is possible to prevent the transition to the ART state ST9 while securing the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7. By continuing the false portent effect which is in the middle of execution of the effect with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from giving a sense of incongruity.

When negative determination is made in step S5703, or when the process of step S5709 is executed, the effect control process for the false portent state is executed (step S5710). The processing contents of the effect control processing for the false portent state are the same as those of the first embodiment. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the processing of steps S5711 to S5716 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S5711 to S5716 are the same as steps S2217 to S2222 of the normal effect control processing (FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, if the currently executed false omen effect is of a type in which the effect with a high degree of expectation for the transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, the main MPU 72 will cause the main MPU 72 to shift to the chance state ST7. To continue the execution of the false portent presentation even if the transition occurs. As a result, as a game state, by prioritizing the transition to the chance state ST7 over the continuation of the false portent state ST5, it is possible to prevent the transition to the ART state ST9 while securing the player's profit due to the occurrence of the chance state ST7. By continuing the false portent effect which is in the middle of execution of the effect with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from giving a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, if the currently executed false portent effect is of a type in which an effect with a low degree of expectation for the transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, if the master side MPU 72 shifts to the chance state ST7, To stop the false omen presentation in the middle and start the chance presentation. As a result, in a situation where the false portent effect with a low degree of attention is being executed, in accordance with the occurrence of the transition to the chance state ST7 in the main MPU 72, the player is more likely than the currently executed false portent effect. It is possible to give priority to the start of the chance production that attracts a high degree of attention.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control process for the false portent state in the effect side MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the effect control processing for the false portent state in this embodiment. Note that the effect control processing for the false portent state is not limited to the situation in which the false portent effect is being executed, but also the actual portent effect, the chance effect, the effect for the bonus state, the effect for the preparation state ST8, and the effect for the ART state ST9. is executed even if is not executed.

In steps S5801 to S5804, the same processing as steps S2301 to S2304 of the effect control processing for false portent state (FIG. 53) in the first embodiment is executed. When the false portent effect flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5801: YES), the information to be referred to in the false portent effect table stored in the effect-side RAM 94 is the end timing of the false portent effect. By determining whether or not it is corresponding information, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the false portent effect (step S5805).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5805, it is determined whether or not a false portent start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5806). If the false portent start command has not been received (step S5806: NO), a false portent effect end setting process is executed (step S5807). In the processing for setting the end of the false portent effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the termination of the false portent state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect-side ROM 93. is stored in the performance-side RAM 94. By executing the performance execution control in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 end the false sign state ST5 and return to the normal game state ST1. After the corresponding normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the premonitory effect has ended and the normal game state ST1 has been restored.

If the false portent start command has been received (step S5806: YES), a false portent effect adjustment process is executed (step S5808). In the adjustment processing of the false portent effect, a false portent effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 for executing a false portent effect having continuity of effect with respect to the content of the false portent effect at that point in time. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false portent effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false portent state ST5 set in the false portent start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effects in the effect side MPU 92 according to the false portent effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image are displayed with the content having continuity with the content of the false portent effect executed so far. A false portent effect is executed on the display device 63 . When the false portent effect is started in the middle of the false portent effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false portent effect executed so far and the number of games of the false portent effect to be executed from now on. The number of games and the number of games, and the total number of games, will be executed.

If it is not the end timing of the false portent effect (step S5805: NO), it is determined whether or not a false portent start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5809). If the false portent effect start command has not been received (step S5809: NO), update setting processing of the false portent effect is executed (step S5810). In the update setting process, if it is time to update the false portent effect by executing a new game, the range to be referred to in the false portent effect table currently being referred to is set to one game. Execute the process that changes according to the new start. As a result, the execution content of the false portent effect changes according to the number of games in which the false portent effect continues.

When the false portent effect command has been received (step S5809: YES), adjustment processing of the false portent effect is executed (step S5811). In the adjustment processing of the false portent effect, a false portent effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 for executing a false portent effect having continuity of effect with respect to the content of the false portent effect at that point in time. It is stored in the RAM 94. In this case, the false portent effect table corresponds to the information on the number of continuous games in the false portent state ST5 set in the false portent start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the effects in the effect side MPU 92 according to the false portent effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image are displayed with the content having continuity with the content of the false portent effect executed so far. A false portent effect is executed on the display device 63 . When the false portent effect is started in the middle of the false portent effect, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the number of games of the false portent effect executed so far and the number of games of the false portent effect to be executed from now on. The number of games and the number of games, and the total number of games, will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S5802, when the process of step S5804 is performed, when the process of step S5807 is performed, when the process of step S5808 is performed, when the process of step S5810 is performed, or when the process of step S5811 is performed If the process has been executed, it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5812). Even if the effect side MPU 92 is executing the control for executing the false portent effect, the game state of the main side MPU 72 may be the chance state ST7. In such a situation, the main MPU 72 wins the transition lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7. A preparation start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 .

If the preparation start command has been received (step S5812: YES), a preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S5813). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table enabling execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The preparation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by performing execution control of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the preparation effect table. By confirming the effect, the player can grasp that the game is in the preparation state ST8. In addition, if the preparation effect start setting process is executed in the situation where the false sign effect is being executed, it corresponds to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST9 was won in such a way as to interrupt the series of stories of the false sign effect. A production is executed. Thereafter, various flags relating to the false portent effect are cleared to "0" (step S5814).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the main MPU 72 while the false portent effect is being executed, the false portent effect being executed is continued, If the side MPU 72 continues the chance state ST7, even if the false sign effect is terminated, the chance effect is not started. As a result, the chance performance is not suddenly started in the middle of the false omen performance, or the chance performance is not started at the same time as the false omen performance is finished, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the sudden start of the chance performance. It becomes possible to do so.

<Eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the execution mode of the bonus winning announcement when the bonus winning is won during execution of the ending effect. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the bonus notification process during the ending executed by the effect side MPU 92 . Note that the bonus notification process during the ending is executed during execution of the ending effect.

It is determined whether or not any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S5901). At the start of a game in which bonus winning data is set, the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command in which information for specifying the type of the set bonus winning data is set, and when a bonus prize is established, transmits commands corresponding thereto, the effect-side MPU 92 can identify whether or not bonus winning data is set in the main-side RAM 74 based on those commands.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the game in which bonus winning data is set (step S5902). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5902, the number of games corresponding to non-announcement corresponding to the type of bonus winning data set this time is read out from the production side ROM 93 (step S5903). A plurality of non-announcement compatible game numbers are set according to the types of bonus winning data. Specifically, when any BB winning data is set, 10 games are selected as the number of non-announced games, and when any RB winning data is set, 20 are selected as the non-announced number of games. A game is selected.

When a negative determination is made in step S5902, or when the processing of step S5903 is executed, whether or not the number of remaining games of the number of continuous games of the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect is less than the number of games corresponding to non-announcement is determined (step S5904). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5904, notification effect setting processing is executed (step S5905). In the notification effect setting process, data setting is performed so that the image corresponding to the winning of the bonus is displayed in a reduced size while the moving image corresponding to the ending effect is being displayed on the image display device 63 .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when a bonus win is won during the ending effect, the bonus winning announcement is made at the timing when the number of remaining continuous games in the ending effect reaches a predetermined number of games. . As a result, it is possible to perform the bonus winning announcement at a timing preferable in relation to the ending effect.

It should be noted that the number of unannounced games may differ depending on whether or not there is a set difference in the winning probability.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the processing configuration for appropriately restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is resumed. is different from the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing power failure processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . As in the first embodiment, the power failure process is executed in step S203 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) that the power failure flag is set to "1".

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not command transmission has ended (step S6001). Return and finish sending commands. If command transmission has been completed (step S6001: YES), clear processing for reel control is executed (step S6002), and return address adjustment processing is executed (step S6003). The clearing process for reel control is the same as step S116 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the return address adjusting process is step S117 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment. is identical to

Specifically, in the reel control clearing process (step S6002), the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting completed flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S6003), if the return address for the normal process (FIG. 13) is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address for the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, even if the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped while at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped. When the process is resumed and the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S119), the normal process can be started from the start address of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Since the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting completion flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0", the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped. Even if the timing is after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be started according to the normal acceleration table. In this embodiment, the clearing process for reel control and the adjustment process of the return address are not executed in the main process (FIG. 10).

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S6004), and the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared to turn off all actuators (not shown) (step S6005). . After executing the checksum calculation process (step S6006), the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S6007). The contents of the checksum calculation process are the same as step S304 of the power failure process (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment, and more specifically, the same as step S109 of the main process (FIG. 10). Thereafter, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S6008). After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

According to the above configuration, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of the operating power is restarted without the need to execute the reel control clearing process and the return address adjusting process in the main process (FIG. 10). It is possible to properly restart the rotation.

In addition, since the clearing process for reel control and the adjustment process of the return address are executed before the checksum is calculated in the power failure process (FIG. 116), the main side RAM 74 in the state after these processes are executed A checksum can be calculated and stored. Then, in the main process (FIG. 10) when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal, as in the first embodiment. (steps S120 to S122) are executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the information in the main RAM 74 in the state after the clearing process for reel control and the adjustment process of the return address are normal when resuming the supply of operating power. .

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the processing configuration for appropriately restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is resumed. is different from the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing stop operation determination processing executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the stop operation determination process is executed in step S207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S6101). The constant speed flag 74c mainly indicates whether or not the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled with the constant speed rotation started in all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the same manner as in the first embodiment. This is a flag for identification by the side MPU 72 . If the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" (step S6101: NO), the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is disabled, so the stop operation determination process is terminated.

When "1" is set in the constant speed flag 74c (step S6101: YES), "3" is set in the determination target counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S6102). The determination target counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R the processing of steps S6103 to S6109 is to be executed. When the value of the counter to be determined is "3", the left reel 32L is to be controlled, and when the value of the counter to be determined is "2", the middle reel 32M is to be controlled, and the value of the counter to be determined is "2". If it is "1", the right reel 32R becomes the control target.

After that, history data shift processing is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current determination target counter values (step S6103). In this embodiment, it is confirmed twice that the stop detection sensor 42a-44a corresponding to the one stop button 42-44 has received a detection signal corresponding to the non-operation of the one stop button 42-44. After continuously confirming the processing times of the stop operation determination process, it is determined that the detection signal corresponding to the operation of the one stop button 42 to 44 is received. When it is confirmed at the processing time of the processing, it is specified that the one stop button 42 to 44 has been operated to stop.

FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the history areas 181 to 183 provided in the main RAM 74 for specifying the stop operation as described above. As shown in FIG. 118, the main RAM 74 is provided with a left history area 181, a middle history area 182, and a right history area 183. FIG. The left history area 181 stores information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 42a corresponding to the left stop button 42, and the middle history area 182 corresponds to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 43a corresponding to the middle stop button 43. Information is stored, and information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 44a corresponding to the right stop button 44 is stored in the history area 183 for the right. These history areas 181 to 183 are provided with current areas 181a, 182a and 183a, previous areas 181b, 182b and 183b, and pre-previous areas 181c, 182c and 183c, respectively.

The current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a store information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) in the current processing cycle. stores information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) in the previous processing, and areas 181c, 182c, and 183c in the processing before the previous. Information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) is stored. When it is confirmed that a detection signal corresponding to the fact that the corresponding stop button 42-44 is not operated is received from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, "0" is displayed in the corresponding areas 181a-183c. When it is confirmed that a detection signal corresponding to the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is received from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the corresponding areas 181a to 183c are set to "1". is set. The stop detection sensors 42a-44a continue to output LOW level signals when the corresponding stop buttons 42-44 are not operated, and HI when the corresponding stop buttons 42-44 are operated. Continue to output the level signal. However, the relationship between these HI and LOW may be reversed.

Returning to the description of the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), in the history data shift process (step S6103), the history data is stored in the area one after the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the value of the current determination target counter. Executes the process of shifting the data to That is, if the value of the determination target counter is "3", each data is shifted in the left history area 181 so that the previous area 181b→previous area 181c and current area 181a→previous area 181b. If the value of the determination target counter is "2", each data is shifted in the middle history area 182 so that the previous area 182b→previous area 182c and current area 182a→previous area 182b. Also, if the value of the determination target counter is "1", each data in the right history area 183 is shifted from the previous area 183b→previous area 183c and the current area 183a→previous area 183b.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the current determination target counter have been operated (step S6104). Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal corresponding to operation of the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 is received from the stop detection sensor 42a to 44a corresponding to the current determination target counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, "1" is set in the current areas 181a, 182a and 183a of the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current determination target counter (step S6105). If a negative determination is made in step S6104, the current areas 181a, 182a and 183a of the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current determination target counter are cleared to "0" (step S6106).

When the process of step S6105 or step S6106 is executed, the areas 181c, 182c, 183c before the previous time and the areas 181b, 182b, 183b of the previous time of the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current judgment target counter are "0" and the current area It is determined whether 181a, 182a and 183a are "1" (step S6107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6107, the stop operation flag corresponding to the current determination target counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S6108). The stop operation flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the stop buttons 42-44. When the stop operation flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S803 of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Then, when affirmative determination is made in step S803 and stop control has not yet started for the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the stop operation flag, affirmative determination is made in step S804 and the relevant reel 32L is determined. , 32M and 32R.

The state where the stop operation flag is set to "1" is cleared to "0" regardless of whether the determination is affirmative or negative in step S804 of the reel control process (FIG. 27). be released. Further, in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), while the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the processes after step S6102 are executed, and when the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped, "0" is cleared and released. Therefore, even after the stop operation flag is set to "1" and the stop control is started for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop operation flag, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the stop operation flag are , the processing after step S6102 in the stop operation determination processing (FIG. 117) is executed. In this case, if the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not continued, all areas 181a to 183c of the history areas 181 to 183 are set to "0" until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped. state.

When a negative determination is made in step S6107 or when the process of step S6108 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determination target counter in the main RAM 74 (step S6109). If the value of the determination target counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S6110: NO), the process returns to step S6103. : YES), the stop operation determination process is terminated.

Next, rotation monitoring processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. The rotation monitoring process is executed at step S207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is normal (step S6201). Specifically, the main MPU 72 manages the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by the number of steps of the corresponding stepping motor 162. It is determined whether or not the ON signal is not received from the reel index sensor 164 of the relevant reel 32L, 32M, 32R even though the number of steps corresponding to one round is exceeded and the abnormal range is reached. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S6201, it means that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped or the rotation is unstable although the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is being performed. means. In this case, clear processing for reel control is executed (step S6202), and return address adjustment processing is executed (step S6203). The clearing process for reel control is the same as step S116 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the return address adjusting process is step S117 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment. is identical to

Specifically, in the reel control clearing process (step S6202), the constant speed flag 74c, the rotating flag 74d, the start setting completed flag, and the reel effect winning flag of the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S6203), if the return address for the normal process (FIG. 13) is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address for the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped or the like despite the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be accelerated again. Although detailed description is omitted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop completely before the re-acceleration is performed.

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In steps S6301 to S6315 and steps S6317 to S6321, the same processes as steps S101 to S115 and steps S118 to S122 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment are executed. After clearing the power outage flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" in step S6315, the current area 181a of each of the history areas 181 to 183 does not execute the clearing process for reel control and the adjusting process of the return address. , 182a and 183a are set to "1" (step S6316).

By setting "1" in the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a when the supply of the operating power is started in this way, the supply of the operating power is started while the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is continued. Even in the first stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), if step S6103 is executed for the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44, the previous area 181b of the history areas 181 to 183 is displayed. , 182b and 183b are set to "1". Therefore, the determination in step S6107 in the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117) of this processing time is not affirmative, and the stop operation flag is never set to "1". Furthermore, while the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, which has been performed before the supply of operating power is started, is continued, the affirmative determination is not made in step S6107. In contrast, the stop operation flag is not set to "1". As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating and the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the supply of the operating power is stopped when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Even if the buttons 42 to 44 are operated, it is possible to prevent the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which have just started rotating, from being stopped.

Further, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is abnormal, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are reaccelerated, so that the supply of operating power is resumed. It is possible to invalidate the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 by clearing the constant speed flag 74c to "0" in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not accepted. When the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" again, thereby validating the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not be normal if the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from being started under certain circumstances.

Further, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R can be achieved simply by executing a simple process of setting "1" to the current areas 181a, 182a and 183a of the history areas 181 to 183 in the main process (FIG. 120). It is possible to prevent the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R from being started in an abnormal situation.

The processing for setting "1" to the areas 181a, 182a, and 183a this time is not limited to the configuration executed in the main processing (FIG. 120), and is executed when the supply of operating power is stopped. It may be configured to be executed in the power failure processing.

Further, the main processing (FIG. 120) or power failure processing is not limited to the configuration in which only the current areas 181a, 182a and 183a are set to "1", and only the previous areas 181b, 182b and 183b are set to "1". or set "1" to the current areas 181a, 182a, 183a and the previous areas 181b, 182b, 183b. may be configured.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the direct-addition processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the direct-addition processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not any winning number of "4", "6", "8" and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination. When the affirmative determination is made in step S6401, the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S6402 to S6409 is executed, and when the negative determination is made in step S6401, step The processing of steps S6402 to S6409 is not executed. Winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV that give the same winning probability among set values "1" to "6".

In other words, in the lottery process of the role (FIG. 17), if the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" is won, the lottery of the role shown in steps S6402 to S6409 is performed. Execute the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the process (Fig. 17), and if the combination lottery process (Fig. 17) results in a loss or the winning probability is between the set values "1" to "6" If a different index value IV is won, the additional lottery process is not executed. In this way, step S6402 to step S6409 are performed under the condition that the winning index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). By adopting a configuration in which an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed, it is possible to predict a set value based on the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process. It is also possible to disallow it.

In the addition lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), first, the direct addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6402). The content of the direct addition table is the same as the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)) read in step S3102 of the direct addition processing (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment.

After executing the processing of step S6402, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S6403). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the direct addition process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is transferred from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

After that, the random number acquired in step S6403 is collated with the top-up table read out in step S6402 to determine whether or not the top-up winning is achieved (step S6404). If it corresponds to any of the number of additional games (step S6404: YES), an additional setting process is executed (step S6405). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 .

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S6406). In other words, it is determined whether or not the win is directly added in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the combination lottery process (FIG. 17) in the current game is executed. If "1" is set in the provisional setting flag 123 (step S6406: YES), an additional addition process is executed (step S6407). Specifically, after the addition of the number of games to be added in step S6405, the ART game number counter 121 is set to "10", which is the fixed number of games to be added that is selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). ” is added. Then, the temporary setting flag 123 is cleared to "0" (step S6408).

After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S6409). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded.

If a negative determination is made in step S6401 or if a negative determination is made in step S6404, it is determined whether "1" is set in the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S6410). In other words, it is determined whether or not the direct winning is achieved in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6410, an addition setting process is executed (step S6411). Specifically, the number of ART games counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 is added to the value of "10", which is the fixed number of additional games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S6412). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded. After that, the temporary setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6413).

According to the above configuration, in a situation in which the win is directly added in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the role is executed, the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the role In the case of direct addition winning in the addition lottery processing corresponding to the result of , not only the number of addition games selected in the addition lottery processing but also the number of addition games selected in the regular lottery processing (Fig. 63) is also given. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide an opportunity to be awarded a large number of additional games.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the direct-addition processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the process for direct addition in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not any winning number of "4", "6", "8" and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the current combination. When the affirmative determination is made in step S6501, the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S6502 to S6509 is executed, and when the negative determination is made in step S6501, step The processing of steps S6502 to S6509 is not executed. Winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV that give the same winning probability among set values "1" to "6".

That is, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), if the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" is won, the lottery of the winning combination shown in steps S6502 to S6509 is performed. Execute the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the process (Fig. 17), and if the combination lottery process (Fig. 17) results in a loss or the winning probability is between the set values "1" to "6" If a different index value IV is won, the additional lottery process is not executed. In this way, step S6502 to step S6509 are carried out under the condition that the winning index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). By adopting a configuration in which an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed, it is possible to predict a set value based on the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process. It is also possible to disallow it.

In the addition lottery process corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17), first, the direct addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6502). The content of the direct addition table is the same as the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)) read in step S3102 of the direct addition processing (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment.

After executing the processing of step S6502, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S6503). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. In the direct addition process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is transferred from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. Specifically, as already explained, random numbers "0" to "255" are generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. ) acquires the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when the affirmative determination is made in step S404 of step S404. It will be done.

After that, the random number acquired in step S6503 is collated with the top-up table read out in step S6502 to determine whether or not the top-up winning is achieved (step S6504). If it corresponds to any of the number of additional games (step S6504: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the temporary setting counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6505). In this embodiment, the number of additional games to be awarded when winning is directly added in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is not fixed to 10 games, but 10 games, 15 games, 20 games, 25 games, and more. It is one of 30 games. In this case, 10 games and 15 games are equal to or less than the minimum number of additional games set in the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)), but 20 games, 25 games and 30 games are The number of games is larger than the minimum number of additional games set in the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)). In the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), when the direct addition is won, the value of the number of additional games to be awarded is set in the temporary setting counter of the main side RAM74.

If the value of the temporarily set counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6505: YES), the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)) and the value of the temporarily set counter of the main RAM 74 value (step S6506). If a negative determination is made in step S6505 or if the process of step S6506 is executed, an addition setting process is executed (step S6507). In the addition setting process, when the value of the temporary setting counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0" or the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)) is the value of the temporary setting counter of the main side RAM 74. If it is equal to or greater than the value, the value of the number of additional games selected from the direct addition table (FIG. 64(b)) is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74 . On the other hand, if the value of the provisionally set counter of the main RAM 74 is greater than the value of the number of additional games selected from the add-on table (FIG. 64(b)), the value of the provisionally set counter of the main RAM 74 is set to the main side. It is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the RAM 74 .

After that, the value of the temporary setting counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6508). Also, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S6509). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded.

If a negative determination is made in step S6501, or if a negative determination is made in step S6504, it is determined whether or not the temporary setting counter value of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6510). In other words, it is determined whether or not the winning is directly added in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6510, an addition setting process is executed (step S6511). Specifically, the value of the temporarily set counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 . Thereafter, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S6512). Information on the number of additional games generated this time is set in the direct addition command, and information on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct add-on command, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the number of add-on games selected this time has been awarded. After that, the temporary setting counter value of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6513).

According to the above configuration, a plurality of types of the number of additional games to be awarded when winning in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is set, thereby diversifying the manner in which the number of additional games is awarded. becomes possible. In this case, in the situation where it is won directly in the lottery process (Fig. 63), if it is won in the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), The number of games to be awarded in the lottery process (Fig. 63) and the number of games to be awarded in the lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), which is the larger number of games. is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games to be awarded to the player from becoming excessively large, and to award the number of additional games to the player's advantage.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the chance state processing executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the chance state processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

First, by determining whether or not the high probability flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the current chance state ST7 is the high probability mode or the low probability mode (step S6601). . If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S6601: NO), the lottery table 112 for low probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6602). On the other hand, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S6601: YES), the lottery table 113 for high probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6603). The contents of the low-probability lottery table 112 are the same as the low-probability lottery table 112 (FIG. 50(a)) read in step S2102 of the chance state processing (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. The contents of the high-probability lottery table 113 are the same as the high-probability lottery table 113 (FIG. 50(b)) read in step S2103 of the chance state processing (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. be.

If the processing of step S6602 or step S6603 has been executed, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S6604). The contents of the random number acquisition process are the same as those of the first embodiment. In the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Specifically, since the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d updates the 7-bit random number in the same manner as in the first embodiment, random numbers from "0" to "127" are generated, and the start lever 41 is operated. The random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d at the timing of confirmation and affirmative determination in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13). The acquired random number is stored in an acquired random number counter 74 e provided in the main RAM 74 .

After that, a fixed value is added to the acquired random number counter 74e in which the random number acquired from the 16th latch register 103p is stored (step S6605). Specifically, the fixed value information has a data capacity of 8 bits, and is set to "128" in decimal and "10000000" in binary. This fixed value information is added to the acquired random number counter 74e. Since the random number updated by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written to the 16th latch register 103p has 7 bits as already described, it becomes a random number from "0" to "127". In this case, by uniformly adding a fixed value of "128" in step S6605, the possible random number values of the obtained random number counter 74e after the process of step S6605 are "128" to "255".

After that, the lottery value information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the combination in the current game is obtained from the lottery tables 112 and 113 read in step S6602 or step S6603 (step S6606). For example, in the low-probability mode, when the winning number "15" is selected in the winning lottery process (Fig. 17), "80" in decimal and "01010000" in binary are acquired as lottery value information. do. In addition, when the winning number "15" is selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode, the lottery value information is "255" in decimal and "11111111" in binary. get.

After that, addition processing is executed (step S6607). In addition processing, the lottery value information acquired from the low-probability lottery table 112 or the high-probability lottery table 113 is added in step S6606 to the obtained random number counter 74e after the fixed value is added in step S6605. Execute arithmetic processing to obtain the result obtained. In this case, in the process of addition, when the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are all "1" and further addition is performed and the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e become all "0", that is, the acquired random number When the numerical information of the counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, the carry flag 114 provided in the main side MPU 72 is set to "1", and when the update from the maximum value to the minimum value is not performed. , the state in which the carry flag 114 is set to "0" is maintained. Then, when the carry flag 114 is set to "1", it is determined that the result of addition exceeds all "1" and a carry has occurred.

If the result of the addition process exceeds all "1" and a carry occurs (step S6608: YES), the ART winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is assumed to have occurred as a transition to the ART state ST9. is set to "1" (step S6609). The ART winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that a transition to the ART state ST9 has been won at the start of the current game. is executed to shift to the preparation state ST8 at the end of the game. In other words, in the next game after the winning game, the game state shifts to the preparation state ST8, which is the previous stage to the ART state ST9.

The handling of numerical information when the lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 124(a1) to 124(a5), the case where the result of the addition process does not exceed all "1" will be described.

In the random number acquisition process (step S6604), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 124(a1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 124(a2). After that, the information of the fixed value "10000000" is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11100000" as shown in FIG. 124(a3).

124 (a4) as the lottery value information from the lottery table 112 for low probability because the winning number of "4" is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the role in the low probability mode this time. , the information "00010100" is obtained. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After that, by adding the lottery value information shown in FIG. 124(a4) to the acquired random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. 124(a3), the acquired random numbers The information of the counter 74e becomes "11110100". In this case, the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e are all "1", and further addition is performed, and the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e become all zero. to the minimum value, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won.

Next, the case where the result of the addition process exceeds all "1" will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the random number acquisition process (step S6604), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 124(b1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquisition random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 124(b2). After that, the information of the fixed value "10000000" is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11100000" as shown in FIG. 124(a3).

124 (b4) as the lottery value information from the lottery table 113 for high probability because the winning number "15" is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the role in the high probability mode this time. , the information of "11111111" is obtained. The lottery value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After that, by adding the lottery value information shown in FIG. 124(b4) to the obtained random number counter 74e in the state shown in FIG. The information of the counter 74e becomes "11011111". In this case, the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e are all "1", and further addition is performed, and the 8 bits of the obtained random number counter 74e become all zero. The carry flag 114 is set to "1" because an event occurs in which the value is updated from the minimum value to the minimum value. Therefore, the transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

As described above, the random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the bit number of 1 byte. A fixed value of “128” is uniformly added to the acquired random number. As a result, while using a common program as the lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9, a 1-byte lottery is generated in any situation in which a 100% winning situation and a situation that may result in a loss are caused. Value information can be used.

If the random number used is 8 bits, which is the same as the bit number of 1 byte, and the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for creating a 100% winning situation is 1 byte, after addition, all " 1” is not treated as a winning result, even if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% is used, the winning will not be 100%. On the other hand, if the situation where all "1" is obtained after the addition is treated as a winning result, it will be necessary to eliminate the acquisition of all "1" as random numbers. Therefore, if the random number to be used is 8 bits, which is the same as the bit number of 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to at least 100% as a number of bits larger than the bit number of 1 byte. put away. On the other hand, as described above, the random number used in the lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the bit number of 1 byte, so the lottery value corresponding to 100% 1-byte lottery value information can be used as information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the lottery value information.

In addition, a fixed value of "128" is uniformly added to the obtained random number, and the lottery value information is added to the random number after the addition of the fixed value, so a 7-bit random number is used. However, even if the lottery is performed using the addition method, it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery has been won by determining whether or not a carry has occurred in the 8-bit acquisition random number counter 74e.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In the advantageous section SC2, when winning a hand in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value, the transition lottery process for the false omen state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real omen state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 are executed. However, even if a winning combination with a winning probability fluctuates according to the set value is won, these transition lottery processes may not be executed. In this case, since the transition lottery process is executed only when a winning combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value is won in the advantageous interval SC2, the influence of the set value on the probability of transition to the ART state ST9 is minimized. can be reduced. Further, instead of this configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition lottery process is executed when a winning combination with a winning probability that varies according to a set value is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established.

(2) In the game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false omen state ST5, the transition lottery process of the real omen state ST6, and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 can be executed. The transition lottery process may not be executed in the game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2. As a result, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the transition to each of the game states ST5 to ST7 can be triggered by different games.

In addition, the transition lottery process for the advantageous interval SC2 is configured to be executed when winning a role in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value, but is not limited to this, and the winning probability depends on the set value. It may be configured to be executed when a winning combination that does not fluctuate is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established. It may be configured to be executed when winning a combination whose winning probability fluctuates according to a set value and winning a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established.

(3) In the event that a winner is won in the transfer lottery process for the advantageous interval SC2, the advantageous interval SC2 may be started from the game following the winning game. In this case, if the transition lottery process for the false portent state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real portent state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 can be executed under the condition that it is the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is made. Even if the game is won in the lottery process, the game is not in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, in the game in which the game is won in the transfer lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false portent state ST5 and the transition of the real portent state ST6 are performed. The lottery process and the lottery process for shifting to the chance state ST7 are not executed.

(4) When a shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the normal game state ST1, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are terminated each time the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling establishment of the first bell prize in the advantageous section SC2 is notified. A lottery process may be executed, and a transition to the normal section SC1 may be caused by winning the final lottery process in the end lottery process. In this case, it is possible to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R multiple times, which enables establishment of the first bell prize even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted to in the normal game state ST1. becomes.

(5) The number of notification times of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize necessary for generating the opportunity to end the advantageous section SC2 is not limited to one, but two. Multiple times, such as times, 3 times, or 4 times or more, may be sufficient.

(6) Instead of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize as a trigger for the end of the advantageous section SC2, instead of the first bell prize If there is a specific winning that is a winning that has a large number of game media to be awarded and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is in a predetermined order, the specific winning is established. The advantageous section SC2 may not end until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In other words, in this configuration, the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the winning with the maximum number of game media to be awarded among the winnings established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order. , 32M, and 32R are notified of the stop order a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section SC2 does not end. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not notified of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of a specific prize, even in the advantageous section SC2 to which the normal game state ST1 is shifted, a predetermined number of times. If a winning combination that enables the first bell to be won is won according to the stop order, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell to be won may be notified.

(7) The number of notification times of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize necessary for generating the opportunity to end the advantageous section SC2 is normal game state ST1, false portent state ST5, and A plurality of game states such as the chance state ST7 may be different. For example, by setting the required number of notifications to be greater in the false portent state ST5 than in the normal game state ST1, it is possible to make the false portent state ST5 a more advantageous game state than the normal game state ST1. .

(8) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize in the normal game state ST1 and in the advantageous section SC2 is notified, the notification is displayed on the combined display unit 66. It may be configured such that the image display device 63 does not perform the operation while the image display device 63 performs the operation. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize that triggers the end of the advantageous section SC2 can be inconspicuously notified.

(9) In the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display section 67 is in a light-emitting state (that is, in a display state), and the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. (that is, non-display state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display information corresponding to the type of abnormal state. In such a configuration in which the shared display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are collectively provided in the common display area 68, when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off, and the display corresponding to the type of abnormal condition is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, so that even when the same abnormal condition occurs, the Since the event that the display mode of the display area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(10) When the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 games or more, even if the number of games executed in the B loop is 22 games or more, an addition of 1000 games is notified as a special freeze effect. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games notified at once from becoming excessively large.

(11) If the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 measured by the main MPU 72 when the B loop is started is less than 20 games, the special freeze effect may not occur. In this case, in the situation where the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 is 20 games or more, if a B loop occurs and 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total By adopting a configuration for notifying the number of additional games, it is possible to perform the additional notification of 1000 games without assuming that the number of games provided in the B loop will be completed in the middle.

(12) A configuration may be adopted in which 20 games are added when the B loop is started. In this case, when 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total number of additional games is notified regardless of whether the B loop is continued or not, so that the number of games given in the B loop is reduced halfway. It is possible to execute the additional notification of 1000 games without assuming that the game will be completed at .

(13) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the ending effect is finished and the BB effect is started than when the BB effect is not started after the ending effect is finished. In this case, when the ending performance is finished and the BB performance is started, the lengthened period can be used to execute the BB start performance after executing the end performance of the ending performance.

(14) Bonus win announcement (No. 1 notification, 2nd notification) may be configured to be different. For example, for a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value, a bonus winning announcement is made when the winning is made during the ending effect, and for a bonus combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, the ending effect is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the bonus winning announcement is not performed even if the winning is won in the middle of . In the case of the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) corresponding to the latter bonus combination, the game section shifts to the advantageous section SC2 even if the game section is the normal section SC1, so the ending effect ends. Then, by generating a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination after the advantageous section SC2 ends, it is possible to immediately return to the advantageous section SC2 even if the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly ended.

(15) The ending effect may be executed on the condition that the total number of game media provided in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from being executed even though the amount of game media is not given to the player's satisfaction.

(16) When the ending effect is executed, a moving image effect is performed in increments of 5 games, and at the end, the end screen showing the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST9 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST9. may be displayed.

(17) If the bonus combination is won in a situation where the ending effect is being executed and the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is 1490 games or later, a bonus winning announcement (first announcement, second A configuration in which notification) is not performed may be adopted. In this case, in the bonus internal state ST2, the replay winning probability is higher than that in the normal game state ST1, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the ending effect is being executed in the ART state ST9 even when the ending effect is being executed in the bonus internal state ST2.

(18) The end roll may be reproduced in the ending effect, and the end timing of the ending effect and the end roll may be matched by changing the reproduction speed.

(19) When the ending effect is extended by entering a bonus state in the middle of the ending effect, an additional image such as a character introduction may be displayed in the extended game. Also, an image suggesting the setting value may be displayed in the extended game. In this case, when a bonus combination is won in the middle of the ending production, it is assumed that the ending production is extended by intentionally not realizing the bonus winning, and an image suggesting the set value is displayed. Therefore, if no bonus winning is established for, for example, five games or more after winning the bonus combination, the setting value suggestion image may not be displayed even if the ending effect is extended.

(20) When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, the bonus effect may be terminated and the ending effect may be started. The ending effect may be started after the state is ended, or the ending effect may be started when the transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 occurs after the bonus state is ended. .

In the configuration in which the ending effect is started after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending effect is delayed with respect to the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, in the ending effect, the moving image effect is basically performed in units of 5 games, whereas by performing the moving image effect in units of 3 games, all the effect contents can be displayed before the ending effect ends. You may do so. Further, when all the contents of the effect cannot be displayed by the final game of the ending effect, all the contents of the effect may be displayed by utilizing a freeze period that occurs when the ending effect ends.

As the ending effect, a plurality of types of effects such as effects for 30 games, effects for 40 games, and effects for 50 games are prepared, and the ending effects for the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 are started. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect corresponding to the timing is selected.

(21) The number of games played in the bonus state may be excluded from counting the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 from reaching the maximum number of games during the bonus state, and to prevent the ending effect from being started during the bonus state. becomes.

(22) If a bonus combination is won in a game other than the final game in the advantage maintenance section, the bonus type notification may be made immediately regardless of the type of the bonus combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of winning a bonus prize in the game before the final game in the advantage maintenance section.

(23) A lottery process for transition to ART state ST9 is executed instead of the configuration in which a bonus prize is established in the advantage maintenance interval and the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed in the advantageous interval SC2 in the start game in the bonus state. In addition, the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be higher than in other cases. Even in this case, it is possible to award a profit for the establishment of a bonus winning in the advantage maintenance section.

(24) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of continuous games in the advantage maintenance interval is fixed, and may be determined by lottery. However, even if it is decided by lottery, it is necessary to select the number of games within a range in which the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 does not exceed the upper limit number of games.

(25) In place of the configuration in which the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed when the starting game in the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2, the ART state ST9 is executed when the game in the middle of the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2. The transition lottery process may be executed, or the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 may be executed in the advantageous section SC2 in the final game in the bonus state. In this case, when the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2, the timing for ending the advantageous section SC2 may be determined by lottery. For example, in a configuration in which the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed when the final game in the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2, the content of until the final game in the bonus state ends is not selected as the trigger for ending the advantageous section SC2. As long as the bonus state is a trigger, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 will not be executed.

Further, in the above configuration, the timing of executing the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state. For example, if it is in a bonus state corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination, the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed in the start game, and if it is in a bonus state corresponding to a specific bonus combination, the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed in the final game. By adopting a configuration in which it is executed, it is possible to vary the probability of execution of the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 depending on the type of bonus combination.

(26) In the advantageous section SC2, when a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won, the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game. In this case, by informing the player that it is the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the bonus combination. Further, when winning a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game.

(27) The configuration of the offset table 111 for associating each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table with the winning number is limited to the configuration in the first embodiment. not. For example, instead of setting in the order of small role group→bonus role group→replay role group, the configuration may be set in the order of bonus role group→replay role group→small role group. .

(28) The offset table 111 is not commonly set for the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but the offset table is individually set corresponding to each lottery table. It is good also as a structure provided. For example, in the lottery table for the normal mode, a group of hands whose winning probability varies according to the set value and a group of hands whose winning probability does not vary according to the set value are grouped together. An offset table may be provided for grouping small wins, bonus wins, and replay wins. For the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the first RT mode lottery table, and an offset table may be provided for the second RT mode lottery table. In this case, the winning number of each offset table may be set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even with this configuration, the index value IV is set in each lottery table in a manner that facilitates design, and the winning numbers are set in each offset table in a manner that facilitates the handling of information on the winning hand in subsequent processing. can be set.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which the false portent state ST5 can be extended if the player wins the role that triggers the start of the false portent state ST5 in the false portent state ST5. Then, when the false portent state ST5 is extended, the advantageous section SC2 may be extended by that amount. As a result, the advantage interval SC2 is extended by extending the false portent state ST5, and thus the extension of the false portent state ST5 is more advantageous for the player.

(30) If notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is executed even in the middle of the false omen state ST5, the advantageous section SC2 ends and normal A configuration may be adopted in which the transition is made to the section SC1. As a result, even in the false portent state ST5, it is possible to create a situation in which the normal section SC1 is set.

(31) If a predetermined combination is won during the false portent state ST5, the shift lottery process of the ART state ST9 is executed, while if a predetermined combination is won during the actual portent state ST6, the ART state. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in ST9 is executed. In this case, not only is it advantageous for the player to have a longer number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5, but it is also advantageous to the player to have a longer number of continuous games in the actual precursor state ST6. Therefore, when a transition to the main precursor state ST6 is won in the middle of the fake precursor state ST5, the remaining number of continued games in the false precursor state ST5 at that time is added to the number of continued games in the main precursor state ST6. may be As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of games to be continued in this portent state ST6.

(32) The number of games to be continued in the false portent state ST5 is not limited to being determined by lottery, and may be fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 10 games).

(33) A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when a bonus prize is won in the situation of the false portent state ST5 and the advantage section SC2. In this case, the player expects that the bonus prize will be established in the situation where the false portent effect is being executed.

(34) If the chance state ST7 is entered in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent effect may be continued while an effect or notification indicating the chance state ST7 is executed. In this case, it is possible to make the player look forward to the chance state ST7 while enjoying the series of false portent effects.

(35) If the state shifts to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false portent state ST5, the false portent effect may be ended at that point and the chance effect may be started.

(36) Transition to ART state ST9 is won in chance state ST7 in the case of transition to chance state ST7 in a situation other than false portent state ST5 and in the case of transition to chance state ST7 in the middle of false portent state ST5. A configuration in which the probabilities are different may be adopted. For example, the probability that the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 is won is higher in the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in a situation that is not the false portent state ST5 than in the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false portent state ST5. may be configured to be high. Further, the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 is higher in the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false portent state ST5 than in the case of shifting to the chance state ST7 in a situation other than the false portent state ST5. may be configured to be high.

(37) In a situation where the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is not transferred to the display counter 126, a notification corresponding to the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 may be provided. . For example, a display area is set on the image display device 63 in which a color corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is displayed. If it is less than 500 and is 300 or more, it is displayed in green, if it is less than 300 and is 200 or more, it is displayed in yellow, and if it is less than 200 and is 100 or more, it is displayed in blue. may be displayed, and if it is less than 100, white may be displayed. This allows the player to predict the number of games set in the number-of-stock-games counter 127 .

(38) Although a plurality of special add-on effects are selected at one time, the number of special add-on effects selected at one time may be one. In this case, the execution frequency of the processing for selecting the special add-on effect is increased, but the area for storing the selected special add-on effect is not required.

(39) Although the configuration is such that the special additional effect is executed only when the A loop occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. A special addition effect may be executed as a kind of release effect executed when the value of 126 becomes "0". In this case, when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, the special additional effect is executed, so that it is possible to provide the player with surprise. .

(40) When the A loop is set in the main MPU 72, the expected effect is started, but the expected effect may not be executed. In this case, a special addition effect corresponding to the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 may be executed at the timing when a predetermined number of games has elapsed since the A loop was set. As a result, the special additional effect is suddenly generated, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

(41) When the A loop is set by the main MPU 72, the special addition effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may not be executed until the A loop ends. As a result, it is possible to execute a special additional effect in a situation where the value of the number-of-stocked-games counter 127 is large.

(42) In the main MPU 72, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not an additional number of games should be awarded. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect side MPU 92 determines at what timing the number of games is to be notified. In this case, since the processing pattern of the additional lottery process in the main MPU 72 is only one pattern, the processing load of the main MPU 72 can be reduced.

(43) When the value of the display counter 126 becomes "0" while the value of the number-of-stock-games counter 127 is "0", the lottery process for ending the ART state ST9 is executed in each game, and the game ends. The configuration may be such that the ART state ST9 ends when the player wins the prize. Alternatively, the ART state ST9 may be continued until the fall to the first RT mode occurs, and the ART state ST9 may end when the fall to the first RT mode occurs. The ART state ST9 may be continued until a fall occurs, and the ART state ST9 may end when a fall to the normal mode occurs. In this case, the same effect as the first release effect may be executed, or the effect different from the first release effect may be executed.

(44) ART state ST9 may be provided when the number of games executed without occurrence of bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) and ART state ST9 reaches the number of unlocked games. , a configuration in which a pseudo-bonus state as in the above-described second embodiment is provided.

(45) In the bonus internal state ST2, the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination may be prioritized in the stop control over the symbol corresponding to the combination that generates the award of the game medium. In this case, when the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified, A configuration may be adopted in which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning bonus combination is notified. When the notification is executed in this manner, the stop operation is performed at the timing of the stop operation that does not allow the establishment of the bonus prize and in the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize. Instead, it is possible to establish the first bell prize.

(46) Limited to a configuration in which a normal section SC1 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified as a game section and an advantageous section SC2 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified are set. Alternatively, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified in any of them, but a plurality of sections may be set in which the types of winning data to be notified of the stop order are different. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified, a plurality of sections may be set in which the frequency of notification of the stop order is different. Even in this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game section by giving a difference in the degree of advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in a plurality of sections.

(47) A configuration may be adopted in which notification for making the player aware of which game section is performed in a place other than the advantageous section display section 67 . For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is which. In addition to or in place of these configurations, information indicating which game section is being output may be configured to be output to the hall computer of the game hall.

(48) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous interval SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 may not be added to the total number of games in the advantageous interval SC2. good.

(49) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation should be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each setting value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the ratio for each set value.

(50) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times a predetermined combination is won and the total number of games to be drawn in the combination lottery process are stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined combination is calculated. good too. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is individually stored as history information, and the first predetermined combination is stored as history information. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games played may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media provided and the total number of games is stored as history information for each game state and the advantageous section SC2 individually, and the number of game media provided per unit number of games is calculated for each game. The configuration may be such that the calculation is performed separately for each of the state and the advantageous section SC2.

Also, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in the gaming state other than the bonus state may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the bonus state may be calculated.

(51) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous interval SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous interval SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the ending lottery process executed in the advantageous interval SC2 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1 in the case of an end winning result. The timing for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured such that the end lottery process is executed in each game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the end lottery process is executed at the end. On the condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the end lottery process is executed each time a lottery opportunity occurs, and when the result of the end lottery process is the end winning result. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and the normal section SC1 is entered.

Further, instead of the above configuration, when the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, and when the advantageous section SC2 continues, the total number of game media awarded is the upper limit. The advantageous section SC2 may end and the normal section SC1 may be entered when any one of the conditions for the number of media is satisfied. Also, either the case where the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the case where the net increase in the number of game media in the situation where the advantageous section SC2 continues reaches the upper limit number of mediums. The advantageous section SC2 may end and the normal section SC1 may be started when the condition of (1) is satisfied.

(52) In the advantageous section SC2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1 by increasing the number of game media provided when is established, and the number of game media required to start one game may be reduced. Thus, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

(53) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the combination display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are used. Alternatively, the credit display section 65 and the combined display section 66 may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results to be notified, the configuration may be such that each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed on the credit display section 65, and the calculation result of the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. A configuration in which corresponding information is displayed may be adopted. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

(54) A configuration may also be adopted in which the upper limit number of continuous games is set for the normal section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section SC1 continues until the maximum number of games is reached. In addition, by setting the upper limit number of games in the normal section SC1 to be the same among the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of games from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value. becomes possible.

(55) In place of the structure in which the return address adjustment process (step S117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, a structure in which the return address adjustment process (step S117) is not executed. good too. In this case, in the reel control clearing process (step S116) in the main process (FIG. 10), the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0", while the rotating flag 74d is not cleared to "0". In addition, before the process of step S119 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), in a situation where the rotating flag 74d is set to "1" and the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1", If the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" while the rotating flag 74d is set to "1", reel control processing is performed in step S119 (FIG. 27). to return to the starting address of Even with this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are invalidated when the supply of operating power is resumed. It becomes possible to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(56) The number of games selected in the constant lottery process (Fig. 63) is not limited to one type of number of games. In the case where the process (FIG. 63) results in an extra winning, one game number from the plurality of game numbers may be selected as the extra game number to be awarded. In this case, the number of games of each of the multiple types may be equal to or less than the minimum number of games that can be selected in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). Often, a part of the number of games of these multiple types is larger than the minimum number of games that can be selected in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). A certain configuration may be used. However, even in the latter case, the expected value of the number of additional games to be selected in the case of winning directly in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) corresponds to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 17). By making the configuration lower than the expected value of the number of added games selected when winning is directly added in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104), the lottery of the role is more than the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). It is possible to increase the advantage of the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the process (FIG. 17).

(57) The constant lottery process (Fig. 63) is not limited to the configuration that is executed before the winning lottery process (Fig. 17) is executed. 17) is executed. Even in this case, the lottery process (FIG. 63) is always executed regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17), so that the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) is the desired result. Even if the result is not the result, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of additional games will be awarded.

(58) When the number of games to be added is given as a result of winning directly in the regular lottery process (Fig. 63), the game after the game in which the regular lottery process (Fig. 63) was executed A configuration may be adopted in which the additional number of games is given to the player. In this case, even if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) in the predetermined game is not the desired result, it is possible for the player to expect that the additional number of games will be awarded in the subsequent game. .

(59) A case where the number of games to be added is given as a trigger of winning directly in the lottery process (Fig. 63), and an extra lottery process (step In S3102 to step S3104), the timing of executing notification of the addition of the number of games to be added is different from the case where the number of games to be added is given as a trigger of winning directly by winning in step S3102 to S3104. good too. For example, when the number of games to be added is given as a trigger of winning directly in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), the reel 32L , 32M, 32R, or before all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating, such as when some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating. When the number of games to be added is given as a trigger of winning directly in the lottery process (FIG. 63), the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are all stopped. The configuration is such that notification of the addition of the number of games to be added is executed later. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the number of additional games will be awarded both while the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are rotating and after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped.

(60) The constant lottery process (FIG. 63) may be executed in each game even in a game state other than the ART state ST9. For example, in the ART state ST9, the lottery processing (FIG. 63) is always executed to determine whether or not the number of games to be added is given in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Mode lottery processing for determining whether or not the lottery mode relating to the lottery processing for transition to state ST9 should be shifted from the low probability mode to the high probability mode may be executed in the regular lottery processing (FIG. 63).

(61) Instead of executing the lottery process for determining whether or not to give the number of additional games in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), the lottery mode for the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is changed from the low probability mode to the high probability mode. A mode lottery process may be executed to determine whether or not to shift to the probability mode. In this case, the mode lottery process is always executed in the lottery process (FIG. 63), and is also executed in the lottery process corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17). With regard to the transition to the above, the player will pay attention to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17), and even if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 17) is not the desired result, the player will be able to switch to the high-probability mode. It is possible to make the player expect the transition. Further, instead of the mode lottery process, the configuration described above may be used as a fall lottery process for determining whether or not to cause a fall to the low probability mode in the high probability mode.

(62) The number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is not limited to 7 bits, and any number of bits smaller than the number of bits of the acquisition random number counter 74e can be used. For example, if the acquisition random number counter 74e is 1 byte as in the first embodiment, the number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d may be 6 bits, 5 bits, or 4 bits or less. There may be. Further, when the acquisition random number counter 74e is 2 bytes, the number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is arbitrary as long as it is 15 bits or less.

(63) The lottery process executed using the obtained random number counter 74e and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d having a smaller number of bits than the obtained random number counter 74e is not limited to the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9. . For example, it may be configured to be used in promotion lottery processing or fall lottery processing in the lottery mode related to the transition lottery processing to ART state ST9, or may be configured to be used in lottery processing for giving the number of extra games in ART state ST9. good.

(64) The configuration is not limited to one in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate one by one in a predetermined order after execution of the reel effect. A plurality of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be configured to start rotating at the same time. In addition, the order in which the rotation starts is not limited to a fixed order, and the order in which the rotation starts may be changed according to a predetermined rule. It is good also as a structure determined irregularly by.

(65) When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating again after the reel effect is executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to sequentially start rotating, but the reel effect is not executed. Alternatively, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be rotated sequentially.

(66) A configuration is adopted in which a waiting period does not occur from the completion of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the start of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a waiting period is reliably generated. In this case, the waiting period lottery process (steps S1204 to S1206) determines the length of the waiting period by lottery.

(67) If a waiting period occurs from the completion of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the start of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next order, a certain waiting period is always set. A configuration in which a period occurs may be used. In this case, in the standby period lottery process (steps S1204 to S1206), it is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the fixed standby period.

(68) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(69) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is awarded when a minor win is established, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which some privilege is awarded to the player. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(71) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, as well as RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games.

(72) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. In addition, it is possible to compose a pattern by using light, color, etc., or by a three-dimensional shape, etc., or by combining them. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(73) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. setting means (function for executing winning probability setting processing in the main side MPU 72) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
State transition means for transitioning the game state between a plurality of types of game states with different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) function to perform processing) and
First section setting means for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1) (function for executing the processing of steps S1807, S1814 and S1821 in the main MPU 72);
A second section setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2);
with
In the second section, a specific privilege (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or in the second section, the player may be given a specific privilege more than in the first section. easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state among the plurality of types of game states, and configured to be able to stay in other game states among the plurality of types of game states. and
In this game machine, a predetermined event (setting of the 1st BB winning data, setting of the 2nd BB winning data, setting of the 2nd RB winning data) whose occurrence probability can vary according to the set value, or occurrence based on the occurrence of the predetermined event (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or the second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) occurs in the second section, the specific privilege is given to the player A gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a specific granting means for granting (a function of executing the processing of steps S2516 to S2520 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature A1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of levels corresponding to the player's advantage, the set value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In addition, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game intervals, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, since the second section is configured to be more likely to be given a specific privilege than the first section, and both the first and second sections are configured to be able to stay in the predetermined game state and other game states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second section in an advantageous game state.

In this case, the specific privilege is given to the player based on the fact that a predetermined event whose occurrence probability can vary according to the set value or a predetermined response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the predetermined event occurs in the second section. . As a result, the player expects that the predetermined event or the predetermined response situation will occur in the second section. In addition, according to the configuration, the probability of granting the specific privilege is affected by the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event. It is possible to indirectly vary the provision probability of , according to the set value.

Feature A2. Lottery means for executing lottery processing (function for executing lottery processing for a role in the main MPU 72),
The game according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process. machine.

According to feature A2, a player who expects to receive a specific privilege in the second section expects a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. Further, by varying the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process according to the set value, it is possible to indirectly vary the probability that the specific privilege is granted in the second section according to the set value.

Feature A3. a game executing means (a function for executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery process;
Means (for bonus processing in the main side MPU 72) for causing the predetermined correspondence situation to occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained, based on the result of the lottery processing becoming the predetermined lottery result. function) and
with
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific granting means grants the specific privilege to the player based on the predetermined correspondence situation in the second section.

According to the feature A3, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section becomes a predetermined lottery result, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery is performed in the game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. A specific privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation triggered by the result in the second section. As a result, a player who expects to receive a specific benefit not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also when the predetermined response situation occurs in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. is the second section or not. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the first section. game machine.

According to feature A4, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is granted based on the predetermined response status in the second section, in order to meet the predetermined response status in the second section, a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, and then Even if a predetermined response situation is reached in the game 1, it is necessary to be maintained in the second section. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation state of the second section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A5. The specific providing means generates a specific event (3rd BB winning data setting, 4th BB winning data setting, 1st RB winning data setting) whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or based on the occurrence of the specific event (BB state ST3 based on establishment of 3rd BB prize or 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on establishment of 1st RB prize) occurs in the second section, the specific privilege is given to the player The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it provides.

According to the feature A5, a specific privilege can be given to the player even when a specific event whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or a specific response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event occurs in the second section. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the influence of the setting value on the probability that the specific privilege is granted in the second section from becoming significant.

Feature A6. Lottery means for executing lottery processing (function for executing lottery processing for a winning combination in the main MPU 72),
The predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process,
The game according to feature A5, wherein the specific event is a specific lottery result (setting of third BB winning data, setting of fourth BB winning data, setting of first RB winning data) in the lottery process. machine.

According to feature A6, a player who expects to receive a specific privilege in the second section expects a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. Further, by varying the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process according to the set value, it is possible to indirectly vary the probability that the specific privilege is given in the second section according to the set value. To prevent the influence of the set value on the probability of giving the specific privilege in the second section from being significant by preventing the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the lottery processing from varying according to the set value. becomes possible.

Feature A7. a game executing means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery process;
Means (for bonus processing in the main side MPU 72) for causing the predetermined response situation to occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained based on the result of the lottery processing becoming the predetermined lottery result. function) and
Means (for bonus processing in the main MPU 72) for causing the specific response situation to occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery result was obtained, based on the result of the lottery processing being the specific lottery result. function) and
with
The specific giving means gives the specific privilege to the player based on the predetermined correspondence situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section, and the specific privilege in the second section. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the specific privilege is given to the player based on the specific response situation triggered by a lottery result.

According to the feature A7, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section becomes a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result, the specific privilege is not given, and the game that has the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result In the later game, a specific privilege is given based on occurrence of a predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result or a specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section. As a result, a player who expects to receive a specific privilege not only pays attention to a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result, but also receives a predetermined correspondence situation in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Alternatively, when the specific response situation is reached, attention is paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs in the first section, and does not set the second section if the specific response situation occurs in the first section. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that it is set to .

According to feature A8, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is granted based on the predetermined response status in the second section, in order to be in the predetermined response status in the second section, a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, and then Even if a predetermined response situation is reached in the game 1, it is necessary to be maintained in the second section. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation state of the second section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the first section, it is set to the second section as a trigger. Therefore, regardless of whether the game section is the first section or the second section, if the specific lottery result is the result of the specific lottery, the second section will be in a specific situation, and based on this situation, the specific privilege will be given to the player. granted to. Therefore, the player expects a specific lottery result.

Feature A9. The second section setting means sets the game section to the second section based on occurrence of a predetermined transition opportunity whose occurrence probability does not vary according to the set value. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A9, the transition probability of the second section does not change according to the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from significantly affecting the probability that the specific privilege is granted.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined corresponding situation is a special game state advantageous to the player.

According to the feature A10, the probability of transition to the special game state varies according to the set value, and the probability of granting the specific benefit also varies according to the set value in relation to the variation according to the set value of the transition probability. becomes. As a result, when the set value has a high probability of transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, the probability of giving the specific privilege is also high, and the player's expectation for the selection of a high set value is heightened. becomes possible.

Feature A11. setting means (function for executing winning probability setting processing in the main side MPU 72) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
State transition means for transitioning the game state between a plurality of types of game states with different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) function to perform processing) and
First section setting means for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1) (function for executing the processing of steps S1807, S1814 and S1821 in the main MPU 72);
A second section setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2);
with
In the second section, a specific privilege (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or in the second section, the player may be given a specific privilege more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state among the plurality of types of game states, and configured to be able to stay in other game states among the plurality of types of game states. and
In this game machine, a specific event (3rd BB winning data setting, 4th BB winning data setting, 1st RB winning data setting) whose probability of occurrence does not change according to the set value or occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event The specific privilege is granted to the player based on the fact that the specific correspondence situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize) occurs in the above-mentioned second section. A game machine characterized by comprising a specific granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2516 to S2520 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature A11, since the setting value to be used is set from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the setting value that is more advantageous to the player is used. It is expected that In addition, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game intervals, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, since the second section is configured to be more likely to be given a specific privilege than the first section, and both the first and second sections are configured to be able to stay in the predetermined game state and other game states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second section in an advantageous game state.

In this case, a specific privilege is given to the player based on the fact that a specific event whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value or a specific response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event has occurred in the second section. As a result, the player expects that the specific event or specific response situation will occur in the second interval. Moreover, according to the said structure, it becomes possible to have the outstanding effect already demonstrated, suppressing the influence of the setting value with respect to the provision probability of a specific privilege.

For the configuration of features A1 to A11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Section setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1); ,
Section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the main MPU 72) that ends the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
A pre-end effect (ending effect) is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second interval has reached the pre-end game number set as the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games. End effect execution means (function to execute the process of step S4205 in the main side MPU72, function to execute the process of step S4303 in the effect side MPU92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, the second section is terminated when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit of the number of games, so that the second section, which is advantageous to the player, continues excessively. It is possible to prevent it from being done. In this case, the pre-end effect is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the pre-end game number set as the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second section is nearing its end. In addition, by making the player want to confirm the performance before the end, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue the second section, and furthermore, the player is satisfied when the performance before the end is actually executed. It is possible to give a feeling. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. Characteristically characterized in that the number of games executed in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games based on the occurrence of an increase opportunity and the number of continuous games in the second section is increased. The gaming machine described in B1.

According to the feature B2, the pre-end effect is executed as a privilege when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the maximum number of games. This makes it possible to give satisfaction to the player when the pre-end effect is executed.

Feature B3. In a situation where the number of remaining continuous games in the second section is the number of games that allows the number of games executed in the second section to reach the upper limit number of games, The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of games executed in the second section becoming the number of pre-end games.

According to the feature B3, the pre-end effect is executed in a situation where it is confirmed that the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games, so the pre-end effect is executed. First, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the number of games executed in the second section does not reach the upper limit number of games.

Feature B4. There are a plurality of types of game states as game states that can be stayed in the second section,
The pre-end effect execution means determines the number of games executed in the second section in a predetermined game state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) advantageous to the player. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of games before the end.

According to feature B4, since the pre-end effect is executed in the second section and in a predetermined game state advantageous to the player, the player is given a sense of satisfaction when the pre-end effect is executed. becomes possible.

Feature B5. State generation means (function for executing bonus processing in the main side MPU 72) for generating a special game state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) advantageous to the player;
A special effect execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3520 and S4405 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a special effect (BB effect) in the special game state;
If the special game state occurs in the situation where the pre-end production is being executed, the production continuation means for continuing the pre-end production without starting the special production (the processing of steps S4409 and S4413 in the production side MPU 92 function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B5, when a special game state occurs in a situation where the pre-end performance is being executed, the continuation of the pre-end performance is prioritized over the start of the special performance, thereby ensuring the execution of the pre-end performance. It becomes possible to

Feature B6. The effect continuation means is a means for starting the special effect when the pre-end effect ends in a situation where the special game state has not ended. function).

According to feature B6, even if the continuation of the pre-end production is prioritized, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the special production.

Feature B7. The effect continuation means is means for continuing the pre-end effect (effect side MPU 92 A gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4409 in step S4409.

According to the feature B7, even if the second section advantageous to the player ends, the pre-end effect is continued when the special game state advantageous to the player is continued, thereby creating a situation advantageous to the player. It is possible to extend the performance before the end by using the continuing period. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the situation in which the special game state continues after the end of the second section is the situation in which the second section continues.

Feature B8. When the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games, progress stopping means (main MPU 72 in the A function to execute the processing of steps S4506 and S4509),
When the pre-end effect is continued because the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games in a situation where the special game state has not ended, the progress stopping means stops the progress. The game machine according to feature B7, characterized in that the game machine is not set to a stop state.

According to feature B8, when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the player can be made to clearly recognize that the second section is over by stopping the progress. becomes. In this case, when the special game state continues after the end of the second section and the pre-end effect is continued, the progress stop state does not occur at the end of the second section. Thereby, when the pre-end production is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the pre-end production from being hindered by the progress stop state. In addition, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the situation in which the special game state continues after the end of the second section is the situation in which the second section continues.

Feature B9. The production continuation means is
In a situation where the number of games assumed to be required until the end of the special game state is a relatively long number of games, if the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the end Means for starting the special effect after the previous effect is finished (function for making an affirmative determination in step S4404 in the effect-side MPU 92);
In a situation where the number of games assumed to be required until the special game state ends is a relatively short number of games, when the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games, the end Means for continuing the pre-rendering (function for executing the process of step S4409 in the MPU 92 on the production side);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B9, a situation in which the special effect is started after the pre-end effect ends and a situation in which the pre-end effect is continued are changed according to the number of games assumed to be required until the special game state ends. It is possible to generate

Feature B10. When the special game state is started or ended, the progress stopping means (steps S2414 and S2709 in the main MPU 72) for setting the progress stopping state where the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped function to execute processing),
Any of the features B5 to B9, characterized in that the progress stopping means does not set the progress stopping state when the special game state is started or ended in a situation where the pre-end effect is being executed. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic B10, when the special game state is started or ended, the progress stop state is set to make the player clearly recognize that the special game state is started or ended. becomes possible. In this case, when the special game state is started or ended in the situation where the pre-end performance is being executed, the flow of the pre-end performance is caused by the special game state by not setting the progress stop state. It is possible to avoid being hindered by the progress stop state.

Feature B11. State transition means for transitioning the game state between a plurality of types of game states with different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) function to execute processing),
In the second section, a specific privilege (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or in the second section, the player may be given a specific privilege more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state among the plurality of types of game states, and configured to be able to stay in other game states among the plurality of types of game states. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that:

According to the feature B11, there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game intervals separately, thereby making it possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, since the second section is configured to be more likely to be given a specific privilege than the first section, and both the first and second sections are configured to be able to stay in the predetermined game state and other game states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second section in an advantageous game state.

For the configuration of features B1 to B11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following problems can be solved according to the inventions of the feature group A and the feature group B.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information when an acquisition opportunity occurs (function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main side MPU 72);
Lottery information group (normal mode lottery table, first RT mode lottery table, second RT mode lottery table) corresponding to game situation and lottery information obtained by said obtaining means are used to determine winning. Determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S503 to S513 in the main MPU 72);
Winning correspondence control means (function for executing the processing of steps S410 and S411 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the winning correspondence control when the winning corresponding to the result of the winning determination is established;
with
The lottery information group corresponding to one game situation,
a plurality of identification information (index value IV);
Lottery correspondence information ( point value PV);
and
The winning determination means is
By using the lottery correspondence information, the first grasping means (the processing of steps S604, S607, S612 and S702 in the main MPU 72) for grasping the identification information corresponding to the lottery information in the predetermined lottery information group function) and
Second grasping means for grasping the winning information (winning number), which is information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means and is referred to in subsequent control (step S704 in the main MPU 72 function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, after grasping the identification information corresponding to the lottery information by using the lottery information group, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped, and after the winning judgment is made using the grasped winning information. is executed. As a result, in the lottery information group, it is possible to arrange the identification information in an appropriate manner when grasping the identification information, and to use the winning information that is easy to use in the control in the control after the winning determination. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform lottery processing suitably.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the winning information is set as serial number information.

According to the feature C2, since the winning information is set as serial number information, it is possible to suitably perform processing for grasping the result of the winning determination in the control after the winning determination.

Feature C3. Predetermined winning information among the winning information corresponds to a plurality of winning target information (winning data),
Characteristic C1 characterized in that in a situation where the predetermined winning information is grasped by the second grasping means, one of the winnings corresponding to each of the plurality of winning target information can be established. Or the gaming machine described in C2.

According to the feature C3, winning information different from the winning target information itself is used in the control after the winning determination, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the control.

Feature C4. A setting means (function for executing winning probability setting processing in the main side MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The predetermined lottery information group is a first aggregation range in which the identification information whose winning probability varies according to the set value is aggregated (index value IV = 17 to 22 in the case of the lottery table for normal mode, the first RT mode In the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, index values IV = 23 to 28, and in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, index values IV = 18 to 23). Second aggregation range (index value IV = 1 to 16 for the normal mode lottery table, index value IV = 1 to 22 for the first RT mode lottery table, index value IV = 1 to 22 for the second RT mode lottery table IV=1 to 17), and the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

According to feature C4, the predetermined lottery information group is divided into a first aggregation range and a second aggregation range depending on whether or not the winning probability varies according to the set value. It becomes easier to check the predetermined lottery information group at the stage of designing or using the game machine. In addition, even with the configuration in which the identification information is differentiated between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range in this way, by grasping the winning information corresponding to the identification information at the time of the winning determination, after the winning determination In the control of (1), it is possible to use winning information that has become a preferred mode in the control.

Feature C5. As the types of prizes, there are at least a type in which a game medium is awarded as the prize corresponding control and a type in which the game can be re-executed as the prize corresponding control,
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the identification information that enables the winning of a predetermined type exists in both the first integrated range and the second integrated range.

According to the feature C5, even in the configuration in which the identification information that enables a predetermined type of prize to be won in the predetermined lottery information group is set dispersedly in the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range, the winning As for the information, it is possible to collect information that enables a predetermined type of winning.

Feature C6. Information storage means (main side ROM 73) pre-stored with a correspondence information group (offset table 111) that defines the correspondence relationship between the identification information and the winning information,
Any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the second grasping means grasps the winning information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means by using the correspondence information group. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature C6, the correspondence relationship between the identification information and the winning information is preset in the correspondence relationship information group, so that the processing load for grasping the winning information from the identification information can be reduced.

Feature C7. The first identification information set in the lottery information group (normal mode lottery table) to be used in the first game situation (for example, the index value IV of the normal mode lottery table = 17) and the second game situation (first RT mode lottery table) set in the lottery information group to be used (for example, the index value IV=23 of the lottery table for the first RT mode) is different from the second identification information (for example, the index value IV=23 of the lottery table for the first RT mode), but can be established. is identification information for which the winning prize is the same,
The second ascertaining means, regardless of whether the first identification information is ascertained by the first ascertaining means or the second identification information is ascertained by the first ascertaining means, is the same The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein winning information (for example, a winning number of "5") is grasped.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to set the identification information in a preferable mode for each of the lottery information group corresponding to the first game situation and the lottery information group corresponding to the second game situation. In addition, even in the configuration in which the identification information is set in a preferable manner in each lottery information group as described above, the prizes that can be established in the lottery information groups are the same, but the different identification information is the same winning information. , it becomes possible to use the winning information that has become a preferable mode in the control in the control after the winning determination.

For the configuration of features C1 to C7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably perform the lottery, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Lottery means for executing lottery processing (function for executing lottery processing for a winning combination in the main MPU 72);
a game executing means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main side MPU 72) for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery process;
First section setting means for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1) (function for executing the processing of steps S1807, S1814 and S1821 in the main MPU 72);
Second section setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2);
Based on a predetermined lottery result (setting of the 1st BB winning data, setting of the 2nd BB winning data, setting of the 2nd RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game after the game with the predetermined lottery result Predetermined response means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to set a predetermined response state (BB state ST3 based on establishment of the first BB prize or second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) )and,
Specific giving means (main side MPU 72) for giving a specific benefit (transition to ART state ST9) to the player based on the predetermined correspondence situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section a function to execute the processing of steps S2516 to S2520 in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D1, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section is a predetermined lottery result, the specific privilege is not given, and the predetermined lottery is performed in the game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. A specific privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation triggered by the result in the second section. As a result, a player who expects to receive a specific benefit not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also when the predetermined response situation occurs in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. is the second section or not. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. Characteristic D1, characterized in that the second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the first section. game machine.

According to the characteristic D2, in the configuration in which the specific privilege is granted based on the predetermined response status in the second section, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section in order to meet the predetermined response status in the second section. Even if a predetermined response situation is reached in the game 1, it is necessary to be maintained in the second section. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation state of the second section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D3. Based on the specific lottery result (setting of the 3rd BB winning data, setting of the 4th BB winning data, setting of the 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process, in the game after the game with the specific lottery result Specific response means (function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to achieve a specific response state (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize) ),
The specific provision means provides the specific privilege based on the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second section setting means sets the second section in the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result.

According to the feature D3, when the specific response situation occurs based on the result of the specific lottery, the specific response status is the second section, and the specific privilege is given based on the specific response status in the second section. given to the player. As a result, the player not only expects a predetermined lottery result, but also expects a specific lottery result rather than a predetermined lottery result. Therefore, the target to be expected becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D4. The specific granting means provides the specific privilege to the player based on the start of the first game in the predetermined response situation in the second section triggered by the predetermined lottery result. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the feature D4, the specific privilege is given to the player based on the fact that the first game in the predetermined correspondence situation is started in the second section. The player expects that the predetermined response situation will occur early.

Feature D5. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
with
The game execution means starts the variable display of the pattern as the start of the one game when the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is established, and the game execution means starts the variation display of the pattern when the stop operation means is operated. controlling the pattern display means so as to stop the variable display of the pattern,
The predetermined response means, when the predetermined stop result corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed after the fluctuation display of the pattern when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process, the predetermined stop result is displayed. The predetermined response situation is started from the game following the displayed game,
The predetermined stop result is a stop result that is not displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means,
Characteristic D1 characterized in that when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process and the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the fact that the predetermined lottery result is obtained is carried over to the next game of the current game. The game machine according to any one of D4.

According to feature D5, even if a predetermined lottery result is obtained, the predetermined response situation is not started unless the stop operation is performed in an operation mode that enables display of the predetermined stop result. In this case, even if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, the specific privilege is not given, and the second section is in a predetermined response situation that is started in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Specific benefits are awarded on the basis of Therefore, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the player who can display the predetermined stop result at an early stage is more likely to experience the predetermined response situation in the second section, and the specific privilege is given accordingly. easier to grant. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained and the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the fact that the predetermined lottery result is obtained is carried over to the next game of the game. It is possible to prevent a player who cannot display a predetermined stop result from being excessively disadvantaged.

Feature D6. A second section effect control means (a function of executing an effect control process for an advantageous maintenance section in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a second section corresponding effect (advantage maintenance effect) in the second section,
The second zone effect control means is characterized in that when the predetermined lottery result is generated in the final game of the second zone, the effect corresponding to the second zone is not executed in the final game. The game machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

According to feature D6, even if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section and an opportunity for a predetermined response situation occurs, the second section is over in the predetermined response situation, so the specific privilege is not given. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the effect corresponding to the second section is not executed in the final game. As a result, the specified lottery result occurred in the situation where the second section corresponding production corresponding to the second section was being executed, and the specific privilege was not given despite the occurrence of the predetermined response situation. It becomes hard to give an impression to a player.

Feature D7. Based on the specific lottery result (setting of the 3rd BB winning data, setting of the 4th BB winning data, setting of the 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process, in the game after the game with the specific lottery result Specific response means (function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to achieve a specific response state (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize) ),
The specific provision means provides the specific privilege based on the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The second section setting means is configured not to set the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the first section, and the specific lottery result and the It is configured to be the second section in the specific response situation triggered by the fact that
The second zone effect control means is characterized by executing the second zone corresponding effect in the final game even if the specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery process in the final game of the second zone. The gaming machine according to feature D6.

According to the feature D7, when the specific response situation occurs based on the specific lottery result, the specific response status is the second section, and the specific privilege is given based on the specific response status in the second section. given to the player. As a result, the player not only expects a predetermined lottery result, but also expects a specific lottery result rather than a predetermined lottery result. Therefore, the target to be expected becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the effect corresponding to the second section is executed in the final game. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the chances of giving a specific privilege by generating a chance of becoming a specific correspondence situation in a situation where the second section correspondence performance is being executed, and attracting attention of the players to the second section correspondence performance. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the predetermined corresponding situation is a special game state advantageous to the player.

According to the feature D8, the specific privilege is granted based on the fact that the second section is in the special game state, so that when a special game state advantageous to the player occurs, the specific privilege can be further granted. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the special game state in the second section.

Feature D9. State transition means for transitioning the game state between a plurality of types of game states with different advantages (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) function to execute processing),
In the second section, a specific privilege (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or in the second section, the player may be given a specific privilege more than in the first section. Easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined game state among the plurality of types of game states, and configured to be able to stay in other game states among the plurality of types of game states. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized by:

According to feature D9, there are a plurality of types of game states, and a plurality of types of game sections are present separately, thereby making it possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, since the second section is configured to be more likely to be given a specific privilege than the first section, and both the first and second sections are configured to be able to stay in the predetermined game state and other game states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in the second section in an advantageous game state.

For the configuration of features D1 to D9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Section setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1); ,
The first state setting means (the processing of step S2014 in the main MPU 72) is set to the first expected state (main precursor state ST6) in which a privilege (transition to ART state ST9) is given after the end of a plurality of games. function) and
a second state setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2024 in the main MPU 72) that sets a second expected state (false portent state ST5) in which the privilege is not given after the end of a plurality of games;
Expectation effect control means (in the effect side MPU 92) for performing an expectation effect that enables the player to expect that the privilege will be granted in each game of the first expectation state and the second expectation state a function of executing the processes of steps S2204, S2205, S2210 and S2223;
with
The gaming machine characterized in that the interval setting means comprises means for setting the second interval in the second expected state (function for executing the processing of steps S1302 and S1307 in the main MPU 72). .

According to the feature E1, since the second section is more advantageous than the first section, the player plays the game expecting that the game section will be the second section. In addition, by executing an expected effect that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game by entering the first expected state or the second expected state, the player who confirmed the expected effect can Since the user expects to receive a privilege, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition to the first expected state in which a benefit is granted after the end, there is also a second expected state in which the benefit is not granted after the end. Since the performance is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the game section is set to the second section in the second expectation state. As a result, even if the game is in the second expected state in which no benefit is given after the game ends, the second section is more advantageous to the player than the first section with respect to the game section. Therefore, even in the second expected state in which no privilege is given after the end, it is possible to make the game state substantially advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Feature E2. Characteristic E1 characterized in that the section setting means includes means for setting the second section in the first expected state (function for executing the processing of steps S1302 and S1307 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E2, since the second interval is set in either the first expected state or the second expected state, if the expected effect is performed over a plurality of games, the first interval is set. is the second interval, which is more advantageous than Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the expected effect will be performed over a plurality of games.

Feature E3. The first state setting means is a first starting means (step S2014 in the main MPU 72, step S2016 and a function to execute the processing of step S2017),
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first starting means starts the first expected state based on occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity in the second expected state.

According to the feature E3, the first expected state is started based on the occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity in the second expected state, so the player can understand that the first predetermined opportunity will occur in the second expected state. It will be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second expectation state.

Feature E4. Means (main The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S1309 to S1319 in the side MPU 72.

According to the feature E4, since the privilege or another privilege is granted to the player based on the occurrence of the advantage granting opportunity in the second section, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section. . In this case, since the configuration of feature E1 is provided and the second expected state is set to the second interval, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the second expected state, and makes it possible for the player to expect the occurrence of the opportunity to give the advantage.

Feature E5. Advantageous transition to shift the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) that is advantageous to the player and maintains the second section based on the fact that the advantage granting opportunity occurs in the second section. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2001 to S2022 in the main MPU 72);
Section ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the main MPU 72) that ends the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
with
The section ending means, when a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expected state, determines that the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state is The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the second section is ended when the upper limit number of games is reached.

According to feature E5, the second interval is terminated when the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games. It becomes possible to In this case, when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expected state, the sum of the number of games played in the second expected state and the number of games played in the advantageous gaming state becomes the maximum number of games. If so, the second interval is terminated. As a result, while the advantage of the second interval is obtained in the second expected state, the second expected state continues as a demerit with respect to the upper limit number of games in the second interval. becomes possible.

Feature E6. If the advantageous event occurs a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, the second interval is ended when the second expected state ends, and the advantageous event occurs even if the second expected state ends. Any one of features E1 to E5, characterized by comprising means for continuing the second section (a function of executing the processing of steps S1812 to S1815 in the main MPU 72) until the event occurs the predetermined number of times 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature E6, if the advantageous event has occurred a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, the second interval ends when the second expected state ends. is completed, the second interval is continued if the advantageous event has not occurred the predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to secure the advantageous degree of the second section by ensuring the occurrence of a predetermined number of advantageous events in the case of the second section. , it is possible to diversify the end timing of the second section with respect to the end timing of the second expected state.

Feature E7. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Lottery means for executing the lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means (function for executing the processes of steps S501 to S508 in the main side MPU 72);
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop operation means is operated, the pattern is stopped to be displayed in a variable manner. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72);
After the variable display of the pattern, when the stop result corresponding to the winning result of the lottery process is displayed, the corresponding execution of control corresponding to the winning result as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning result means (function for executing the process of step S410 in the main MPU 72);
with
The corresponding execution means performs a granting process when a granting winning result (winning number = 1 to 3) is obtained in the lottery process and a granting stop result corresponding to the granting winning result is displayed after the variation display of the pattern is displayed. Giving a predetermined number of game media to the player as a result of winning a prize,
The grant correspondence stop result is a result displayed when the stop operation means is operated in the grant correspondence mode when the grant winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
In the game machine, when the grant winning result is obtained in the lottery process in the second section, means for notifying the grant correspondence mode (function of executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72, notification in the effect side MPU 92 A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for processing.

According to the feature E7, in the second section, the game medium corresponding to the establishment of the award corresponding to the award is awarded by notifying the award correspondence mode when the award winning result is obtained. This makes it possible to make the second section an advantageous section.

For the configuration of features E1 to E7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Section setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1); ,
Advantageous setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2008, S2021 and S2808 in the main MPU 72) for allowing the player to stay in an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) in the second section;
Section ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the main MPU 72) that ends the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
with
The advantageous setting means terminates the advantageous gaming state when the second interval ends based on the number of games executed in the second interval reaching the upper limit number of games,
The interval setting means continues a second interval in which the second interval continues after the advantageous gaming state ends before the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games. A game machine characterized by comprising section continuation means (a function of executing the processing of step S3408 in the main side MPU 72) for making a situation (advantage maintenance section).

According to the feature F1, the second section is terminated when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, thereby excessively continuing the second section advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being done. In addition, when the second interval ends based on the number of games executed in the second interval reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous gaming state also ends. It is possible to make a game state in which the player can stay.

In this case, if the advantageous gaming state ends before the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games, the second interval continues even after that. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the second section will continue even after the advantageous game state ends, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the section continuation means terminates the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation state reaches the number of continuation end games.

According to the feature F2, it is possible to make the trigger for ending the second section continuation state clear for the player.

Feature F3. The interval continuation means is based on the end of the advantageous gaming state in a situation where the number of games executed in the second interval is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, which is set as the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games. , the gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the second section continuation state is established.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the second section continuation situation from occurring even though the number of games executed in the second section is close to the maximum number of games.

Feature F4. The section continuation means terminates the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation state reaches the number of continuation end games,
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein a difference between the number of games that can be continued and the upper limit number of games is equal to or greater than the number of games that can be continued.

According to feature F4, it is possible to make clear to the player the trigger for ending the second interval continuation situation, and the number of games executed in the second interval during the second interval continuation situation is the upper limit game. It is possible to avoid reaching the number.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on occurrence of an advantageous transition opportunity in the second interval continuation state.

According to the feature F5, since the transition to the advantageous game state occurs again based on the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity in the second interval continuation state, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the second interval continuation state. becomes.

Feature F6. When the advantageous gaming state ends and the second interval continuation situation occurs, and the second interval continuation situation causes a transition to the advantageous gaming state again, the interval ending means When the sum of the number of games executed in the second section until the transition occurs and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state due to the second transition reaches the upper limit number of games, the second The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized by ending the section.

According to the feature F6, the second section is prevented from continuing excessively even in a configuration in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made again based on the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation state. becomes possible.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, wherein the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity is the occurrence of a transition to a special game state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) advantageous to the player.

According to the feature F7, when a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player occurs in the second section continuation situation, a second transition to the advantageous game state also occurs. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the special game state will occur in the second section continuation state.

Feature F8. Lottery means for executing lottery processing (function for executing lottery processing for a winning combination in the main MPU 72);
Based on a predetermined lottery result (setting of the 1st BB winning data, setting of the 2nd BB winning data, setting of the 2nd RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game after the game with the predetermined lottery result Predetermined response means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to set a predetermined response state (BB state ST3 based on establishment of the first BB prize or second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on establishment of the second RB prize) )and,
with
The advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on the predetermined response situation in a situation where the second section is continued due to the second section continuation situation. Features F5 to The gaming machine according to any one of F7.

According to the feature F8, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section continuation state becomes the predetermined lottery result, the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur again, and the game is more likely than the game with the predetermined lottery result. In a later game, a transition to the advantageous game state occurs again based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section due to the second section continuation state. As a result, the player who expects to return to the advantageous game state not only pays attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also the predetermined correspondence situation in the game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained. In this case, attention is paid to whether or not it is the second segment due to the second segment continuation situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F9. The advantageous setting means shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on the start of the first game of the predetermined response situation in a situation where the second section continues due to the second section continuation situation. The gaming machine according to feature F8.

According to the feature F9, since the first game of the predetermined correspondence situation is started in the second section by the second section continuation state, the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again. When the lottery result is obtained, the player expects that the predetermined response situation will occur at an early stage.

Feature F10. A second section effect control means (a function of executing an effect control process for an advantageous maintenance section in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a second section corresponding effect (advantage maintenance effect) in the second section continuation situation,
The second zone effect control means is characterized in that, when the predetermined lottery result is generated in the final game of the second zone continuation situation, the second zone corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. The gaming machine according to feature F8 or F9.

According to the feature F10, even if a predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second interval continuation state and an opportunity to enter the predetermined response state occurs, the second interval has ended in the predetermined response state. transition does not occur. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section continuation state, the second section corresponding effect is not executed in the final game. As a result, the predetermined lottery result is generated in the situation where the second section corresponding performance corresponding to the second section continuation situation is being executed, and the advantageous game state is re-entered despite the occurrence of the opportunity to become the predetermined correspondence situation. This makes it difficult for the player to have the impression that no transition has occurred.

For the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Grant expectation setting means (function for executing the process of step S2002 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the grant expectation state (chance state ST7) that continues over a plurality of games;
Giving corresponding lottery means (chance state processing in main side MPU 72) for executing grant corresponding lottery processing whether to grant a privilege (transition to ART state ST9) when a grant corresponding opportunity occurs in the grant expected state function) and
a correspondence granting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2008 in the main MPU 72) that grants the privilege based on the fact that the grant correspondence lottery process has won the grant correspondence;
Grant expectation effect control means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2214 and S2222 in the effect side MPU 92) for performing the grant expectation effect (chance effect) in each game in the grant expectation state; ,
with
When the grant expectation setting means sets the grant expectation state in a situation where a specific performance (false omen performance) is being executed, the grant expectation performance control means controls the execution of the grant expectation performance to the execution of the grant expectation performance. (In the first embodiment, the function of making affirmative determination in step S2213 in the production side MPU 92, in the sixth embodiment, the function of making a negative judgment in step S5705 in the production side MPU 92) is provided. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the feature G1, the grant corresponding lottery process is executed by the occurrence of the grant corresponding opportunity in the grant expected state, and the privilege is granted based on the grant corresponding lottery winning in the grant corresponding lottery process. As a result, the player expects to be set in the grant expected state, and expects that the grant corresponding opportunity is generated in the grant expected state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by performing the grant expectation effect in each game in the grant expectation state, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's sense of expectation for the grant expectation state.

In this case, when the expected state of granting is set in a situation in which the specific performance is being executed, the execution of the specific performance being executed takes precedence over the execution of the expected granting performance. As a result, if the expected effect to be granted is started when the expected state of granting is set, the specific effect can be left as it is in the case where the player feels uncomfortable due to the relationship with the content of the specific effect so far. It is possible to continue. In addition, even if the specific effect is continued without execution of the expected effect, the game state is in the expected state of granting. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while keeping it from being put away.

Feature G2. Predetermined expectation setting means (function for executing the processing of step S2024 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined expectation state (false portent state ST5) that continues over a plurality of games;
A specific effect control means (step S2204 in the effect side MPU 92) for performing the specific effect that enables the player to expect the award or another benefit in each game in the predetermined expectation state , a function of executing the processes of steps S2205, S2210 and S2223);
The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G2, a specific effect is executed that enables the player to expect the awarding of a privilege in each game when the predetermined expectation state is established, so that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can receive the privilege. Since the provision is expected, the amusement of the game is improved. In this case, having the configuration of the feature G1, when the provision expectation state is set in the situation where the specific performance is being executed, the execution of the specific performance being executed is given priority over the execution of the provision expectation performance. As a result, if the expected effect to be granted is started when the expected state of granting is set, the specific effect can be left as it is in the case where the player feels uncomfortable due to the relationship with the content of the specific effect so far. It is possible to continue.

Feature G3. As the predetermined expected state, there is a first predetermined expected state (main precursor state ST6) in which the privilege or another privilege is given after the end of a plurality of games, and There is a second predetermined expected state (false precursor state ST5) in which another privilege is not granted,
The performance priority means, when the grant expectation setting means sets the grant expectation state in a situation in which the specific performance corresponding to the second predetermined expectation state is being executed, causes the execution of the specific performance to be performed according to the grant expectation. The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized in that priority is given to execution of presentation.

According to the feature G3, even in a situation where the specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state in which no benefit is given after the end is being executed, the specific effect being executed is executed with respect to the setting of the provision expected state. is given priority over the execution of the granted expectation effect. As a result, even if the specific effect corresponds to the second predetermined expected state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution contents of the effect.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the privilege imparted by the correspondence imparting means and the privilege imparted after the end of the first predetermined expected state are the same.

When the execution of the specific performance is continued even if the grant expectation state is generated in the middle of the second predetermined expectation state, the prize corresponding to the grant is won in the grant corresponding lottery process while the specific performance is being executed. is assumed. On the other hand, according to feature G4, since the benefit granted in that case is the same as the benefit granted after the end of the first predetermined expected state, the specific effect being executed corresponds to the first predetermined expected state. It is possible to make the player think that it is a specific effect to be played.

Feature G5. Means (effect function of executing the process of step S2314 in the side MPU 92).

According to the feature G5, in a situation where the execution of the specific effect is prioritized, when the grant corresponding lottery process wins for the grant, the corresponding performance is executed, so the execution of the specific effect is given priority. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the privilege is given even in the situation where the player is present.

Feature G6. The specific effects include a first specific effect (false precursor effect not to be canceled in the sixth embodiment) and a second specific effect (false precursor effect to be canceled in the sixth embodiment),
The performance priority means prioritizes execution of the first specific performance over execution of the expected grant performance when the grant expectation state is set by the grant expectation setting means in a situation where the first specific performance is being executed. is a priority,
When the grant expectation state is set by the grant expectation setting means in a situation in which the second specific performance is being executed, the grant expectation performance control means terminates the second specific performance and executes the grant expectation performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by comprising a means for starting (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S5705 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to the feature G6, depending on the type of the specific effect, there are cases where the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized and where the new start of the expected effect to be given is prioritized. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect in a preferable mode in each situation.

Feature G7. The expected given effect control means controls the expected given effect when the specific effect ends in a situation in which the expected given effect is given priority over the execution of the expected given effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, further comprising post-end starting means (a function of executing the process of step S2307 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to the feature G7, since the expected effect to be provided is started after the specific effect is finished, it is possible to provide an opportunity to execute the expected effect to be provided.

Feature G8. When the number of games executed in the grant expected state without winning the grant corresponding to the grant corresponding lottery process becomes the end reference number of games, means for terminating the grant expected state (step in the main side MPU 72 S2010 to step S2012) is provided,
The post-end starting means starts the expected granting effect when the specific performance ends in a situation in which the expected granting effect is given priority over the execution of the expected granting performance. The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that the game can be continued until the end reference number of games are played.

According to the feature G8, even if the expected given effect is started after the specific effect is finished, the expected given effect can be continued until the end reference number of games are executed, so the specific effect is executed. It is possible to execute the grant expectation performance in the same mode as when the grant expectation state is reached in the situation where the grant expectation state is not set.

Feature G9. The expected given effect control means controls the given expected effect even if the specific effect ends in a situation in which the given expected effect is in a state in which the execution of the specific effect is given priority over the execution of the expected given effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that it does not start the

According to the feature G9, it is possible to prevent the expected effect to be given from being executed following the specific effect.

For the configuration of features G1 to G9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. special setting means (function for executing pseudo-bonus start processing in the main side MPU 72) for setting to a special game state (pseudo-bonus state);
The total number of games given to the player at least either at the start of the special game state or during execution of the special game state (the value of the number of continuous games counter 131) is the reference number of games awarded (the value of the transition condition number of games counter 132). value) or the number of games equal to or greater than the granting reference number of games, which grants a privilege (transition to ART state ST9) to the player based on the satisfaction of the condition for the number of games (mainly a function of executing the processing of step S5205 in the side MPU 72);
a reference lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5004 and S5005 in the main MPU 72) for determining the given reference number of games by lottery;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, when the number-of-games condition is satisfied by the total number of games given to the player in the special game state exceeding the given reference number of games or becoming equal to or more than the given reference number of games, the player In the configuration in which a privilege is awarded, the number of games to be awarded is determined by lottery. As a result, when a special game state is entered, the player expects that a smaller number of games will be given as a reference number of games, which makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature H2. A game number awarding means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5103 to S5113 in the main side MPU 72) for awarding the number of games to the player when the special award condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized by:

According to the feature H2, the number of games is awarded to the player even during execution of the special game state, even if the condition for the number of games is not satisfied at the stage when the number of awarded reference games is determined by lottery. , the number-of-games condition can be satisfied. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the special game state.

Feature H3. If the number-of-games condition is not met after the number-of-games award is granted by the number-of-games granting means, the number-of-games granted to the player is consumed in the special game state (the process of step S5107 in the main MPU 72). A gaming machine according to feature H2, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature H3, in a situation where the number-of-games condition is not satisfied, it is possible to increase the number of continuous games in the special game state as the special granting condition is satisfied.

Feature H4. When the condition for the number of games is met after the number of games is given by the number of games giving means, the number of games given this time by the number of games giving means is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to feature H2 or H3, characterized by comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of step S5109 in the main side MPU 72) to be digested in (ART state ST9).

According to feature H4, when the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the number of games that triggered the establishment of the number-of-games condition is also consumed in the advantageous game state after the end of the special game state, so the advantageous game state continues. It becomes easy to increase the number of games.

Feature H5. The number-of-games awarding means assigns the number of games to the player before the number-of-games condition is established, in a manner of determining the number of games when awarding the number of games to the player after the number-of-games condition is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H4, wherein the number of games is determined in a manner different from that of the number of games in each case.

According to the feature H5, the mode of determining the number of games in the case where the number of games is awarded in response to the establishment of the special granting condition changes depending on whether or not the condition for the number of games is satisfied. It is possible to diversify the mode while relating it to whether or not the number-of-games condition is met.

Feature H6. The privilege granting means is configured to transition to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player after the special game state ends as the grant of the privilege,
The number-of-games giving means includes:
When the number of games is given to the player before the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the means for determining the number of games to be given in accordance with the determination mode corresponding to the special game state (the processing of steps S5103 to S5105 in the main MPU 72 function) and
When the number of games is awarded to the player after the condition for the number of games is established, means for determining the number of games to be awarded according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (the processing of steps S5110 to S5112 in the main MPU 72 is function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature H6, before the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the number of games to be awarded to the player can be determined in a manner suitable for the special game state, and after the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the advantageous game state is reached. It is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded to the player in a suitable decision mode.

Feature H7. Any one of the features H1 to H6, wherein the privilege granting means shifts to an advantageous game state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player after the special game state ends as the grant of the privilege. game machine.

According to the feature H7, when the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the state shifts to an advantageous game state after the end of the special game state. Become.

Feature H8. It is characterized by having means for determining the number of initial continuous games of the special game state by lottery when the special game state is started (function of executing the processing of steps S5001 to S5003 in the main side MPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7.

According to the feature H8, not only the number of given reference games but also the number of initial continuation games in the special game state is determined by lottery. Become.

Feature H9. Means (main side MPU 72) for allowing the initial number of continuous games to be completed in the special game state even if the condition for the number of games is satisfied by the number of initial continuous games set when the special game state is started. A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S5003 in .

According to feature H9, even if the number of games condition is satisfied at the stage when the number of initial continuous games is determined, the initial number of continuous games is consumed in the special game state, so the number of games condition is satisfied at the start of the special game state. Even if it does, it is possible to finish the game to some extent in the special game state.

For the configuration of features H1 to H9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. special setting means (function for executing pseudo-bonus start processing in the main side MPU 72) for setting to a special game state (pseudo-bonus state);
A game number granting means for granting the number of games to the player when the special granting condition is satisfied in the special game state (function for executing the processing of steps S5103 to S5113 in the main side MPU 72);
When the special game state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is established, advantageous transition means (in the main MPU 72) for shifting to an advantageous game state (ART state ST9) that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends a function to execute the processing of step S5205);
with
The number-of-games giving means includes:
means for increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the special game state when the special grant condition is established in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not established (function for executing the process of step S5107 in the main MPU 72);
means for increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the advantageous gaming state when the special award condition is established in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is established (function for executing the processing of step S5109 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I1, when the special game state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the special game state because the transition to the advantageous game state occurs after the special game state ends. The player expects this, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In this configuration, when the special granting condition is established in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not established, the number of remaining continuous games in the special game state is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the advantageous transition condition is established in the special game state. On the other hand, if the special granting condition is met in a situation where the advantageous transition condition has already been met, the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the game in the special game state is delayed due to the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the special game state even though the advantageous transition condition has already been established. In addition, it is possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state.

Feature I2. The number-of-games giving means gives the number of games to the player before the favorable transition condition is established, in a manner of determining the number of games when the number of games is awarded to the player after the favorable transition condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the mode of determining the number of games is different from that of the case.

According to feature I2, the mode of determining the number of games in the case where the number of games is awarded in response to the establishment of the special granting condition changes depending on whether or not the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. It is possible to diversify the aspect while relating it to the presence or absence of establishment of the advantageous transition condition.

Feature I3. The number-of-games giving means includes:
When the number of games is given to the player before the advantageous transition condition is established, the means for determining the number of games to be given by the determination mode corresponding to the special game state (the processing of steps S5103 to S5105 in the main side MPU 72 function) and
When the number of games is awarded to the player after the advantageous transition condition is established, the means for determining the number of games to be awarded according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (the processing of steps S5110 to S5112 in the main MPU 72 is function) and
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature I3, it is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a determination mode suitable for the special game state before the advantageous transition condition is established, and after the advantageous transition condition is established, the advantageous game state is entered. It is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded to the player in a suitable decision mode.

Feature I4. Characteristic features I1 through I1, characterized in that the game number award mode after the advantageous transition condition is established is more advantageous to the player than the game number award mode before the advantageous transition condition is established. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to the feature I4, it is advantageous for the player if the advantageous transition condition is established early in the special game state, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the advantageous transition condition is established. .

Feature I5. The advantageous transition condition is satisfied when the number of games given to the player in the special game state exceeds the given reference number of games (the value of the transition condition game number counter 132) or exceeds the given reference number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized by:

According to feature I5, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the number of games given to the player in the special game state.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the special game state and the advantageous game state have the same or substantially the same expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games.

According to feature I6, since the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is the same or substantially the same in the special game state and the advantageous game state, the number of games awarded to the player is the special game state and the advantageous game state. It is possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage from being consumed in any of the game states.

For the configuration of features I1 to I6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Predetermined setting means (function for executing the process of step S2808 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the predetermined game state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state (the value of the ART game number counter 121) becoming 0 games in the predetermined game state a function to execute the processing of S2703);
Number-of-games informing means (effect) for informing the number of games so that the player can recognize the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state. A function of executing the processing of steps S3506 and S3510 in the side MPU 92);
A special corresponding effect (special additional effect) corresponding to the number of non-informed target games (the value of the stock game number counter 127), which is the difference between the number of the reported target games and the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state, is executed. Special response execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S3718, S3916 and S3920 in the production side MPU 92) to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, the number of games to be notified among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state is notified to the player by the number of games notification, but the number of non-notified games that is not the number of games to be notified is Players are not notified. Then, a special effect corresponding to the number of non-reported games is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. game number increasing means for increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the predetermined game state when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state (function for executing additional processing in the main MPU 72);
When the game number increasing means increases the number of games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state, means for adding at least a part of the number of games to be increased to the number of games to be non-informed (step S3710 in the effect side MPU 92) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature J2, since the number of non-reported games is added during the predetermined game state, it is possible to execute a special response effect as a result of the addition.

Feature J3. a notification addition means (function for executing the process of step S3904 in the production side MPU 92) for adding the number of games to be transitioned, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, to the number of games to be notified;
The feature J1 or J2, wherein the special response execution means executes, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the number of games to be transitioned to the number of games to be notified. The game machine described.

According to feature J3, when at least part of the number of non-reported games is added to the number of reported games, a corresponding effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of games to be notified.

Feature J4. The notification addition means is configured to determine whether the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of games to be notified and the number of games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state, is the same as the number of games to be played. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the number of games to be shifted is selected from a plurality of types of numbers of games within a range not exceeding the number.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of transition target games is generated, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the special response executing means can execute different types of special response effects even in a situation where the number of games to be shifted is the same.

According to the feature J5, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J6. The notification addition means adds the transition target game number to a range not exceeding the non-report target game number, which is the difference between the notification target game number and the remaining game number in the predetermined gaming state, in one game number selection process. Multiple selection means (function for executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3803 in the production side MPU 92) for multiple selections at the time of processing is provided,
The special response execution means is means for adding the number of transition target games selected by the multiple selection means to the number of notification target games in the special response performance executed at different timings ( A function of executing the processing of steps S3721 and S3916 in the production side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J6, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special handling effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J7. The special response execution means is provided with a number of games for each of a plurality of games as one of the special response effects, and the transition target game in which the total number of games provided is the trigger for executing the addition response effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, characterized in that it executes an effect that becomes a number.

According to feature J7, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature J8. game number increasing means for increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the predetermined game state when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state (function for executing additional processing in the main MPU 72);
When the predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the situation where the special response effect is being executed, the number of games added to the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state due to the satisfaction of the predetermined granting condition is the number of games to be notified. A means (function for executing the processing of step S3608 in the effect side MPU 92) for additionally performing the effect corresponding to the addition to the special response effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature J8, even in a situation where a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect from the increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

For the configuration of features J1 to J8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to each of the inventions of the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G, the feature group H, the feature group I, and the feature group J, the following problems can be solved. be.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A first control means (main side MPU 72) that manages the progress of the game;
A second control means (effect side MPU 92) that controls the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
Predetermined setting means (function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the predetermined game state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state (the value of the ART game number counter 121) becoming 0 games in the predetermined game state function to execute the processing of S3403);
Game number increasing means for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state (function for executing the processes of steps S3105, S3201 and S3301 in the main side MPU 72) and,
A first transmission means (a function of executing the processing of step S2809 in the main side MPU 72) that transmits first transmission information (ART start command) corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state;
When the number of remaining continuous games is increased by the number-of-games increasing means, second transmission information corresponding to the increased number of games (direct addition command, A loop addition command, B loop addition command) is transmitted. a second transmitting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3106, S3202 and S3303 in the main MPU 72);
with
The second control means is
Predetermined effect start means (function for executing the processing of step S3511 in the effect side MPU 92) for starting the effect corresponding to the predetermined game state based on the reception of the first transmission information;
Receiving response means (effect side MPU 92) for executing a reception response process for subsequently executing an effect corresponding to an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state based on the reception of the second transmission information a function of executing the processes of steps S3607, S3608, S3710 and S4002 in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K1, the first control means executes a process for increasing the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state, and the second control means executes an effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games. Processing is performed. As a result, the processing load of the first control means is increased even if the effect corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games is performed in a complicated manner while the progress control of the predetermined game state is collectively performed by the first control means. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform control regarding the predetermined game state.

Feature K2. The first control means sets an increase state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined rush opportunity in the predetermined game state, and increases state setting means ( a function to execute the processing of steps S2922 and steps S3304 to S3315 in the main MPU 72),
The number-of-games increasing means is configured to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state by a predetermined number of additional games each time the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the state of increase,
The second control means is a total notification means for notifying the player of information to be notified corresponding to the increase in the predetermined number of games that has occurred in the increase state (executing the process of step S4004 in the effect-side MPU 92). function).

According to the characteristic K2, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the predetermined increased number of games each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied by entering the increasing state, so the player expects to be in the increasing state. It will happen. In addition, since the information to be notified corresponding to the multiple increments of the predetermined increased number of games that occurred in the increasing state is notified to the player, it is possible to notify at once that a large number of games have been awarded. Become.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the total notifying means notifies the player of information to be notified corresponding to the number of games awarded in the increasing state based on the end of the increasing state.

According to the feature K3, when the increase state occurs, the information to be notified corresponding to the number of games given in the increase state is notified to the player based on the termination of the increase state. It is possible to notify at once that the number of games has been awarded.

Feature K4. The total notifying means notifies the player of the information to be notified in a situation where it is possible to notify the number of games given in the increasing state equal to or greater than a specific reference number of games,
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the specific reference number of games is a number of games that is a multiple or more of the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature K4, when the information to be notified is notified to the player, it is notified at once that the number of games that is more than multiple times the predetermined number of increased games has been awarded. It is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

Feature K5. The first control means is
Means (in the main MPU 72) for setting a standby state for waiting the progress of the game based on the player's operation when the increasing state ends after the increase in the predetermined number of increased games has been established for a specific reference number of times or more in the increasing state. a function to execute the processing of step S3313);
a third transmitting means (function for executing the process of step S3314 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting the third transmission information corresponding to the setting of the standby state;
with
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the total notification means notifies the player of the information to be notified based on the reception of the third transmission information.

According to the feature K5, since the notification target information is notified to the player in a state where the progress of the game based on the player's operation is on standby, the degree of attention of the player to the notification of the notification target information is increased. can be increased.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is a value greater than a quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games.

According to the feature K6, when the notification target information is notified, it is possible to notify the player that the specific reference number of games or more has been awarded. It is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. Further, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games, the number of games awarded in the increased state is consumed during the execution of the increased state. Even if the number of games is increased, the number of games not notified to the player at the timing when the increase state ends can be made equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.

Feature K7. The reception corresponding means is
notification means for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of games to be notified in order to allow the player to recognize the number of games (function for executing the processing of steps S3603 and S3605 in the production side MPU 92);
non-notification means for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of non-notification target games that are not allowed to be recognized by the player (function for executing the processes of steps S3710 and S4002 in the production side MPU 92);
The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K7, when the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is increased in the main control means, there are cases where the number of games to be increased is immediately notified and cases where it is not notified. . As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of notification of the increase in the remaining number of continuous games, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the control for diversifying the notification timing is performed by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means while achieving the excellent effects described above.

Feature K8. The first control means comprises continuous game number storage means (ART game number counter 121) for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state,
The number-of-games increasing means increases the number of games to be reported by the means for reporting and the number of games to be non-reported by the means for non-reporting. The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the number of games awarded based on establishment of a predetermined award condition is added to the number-of-continued-games storage means.

According to the feature K8, the first control means determines the number of games awarded based on the establishment of the prescribed granting condition regardless of how the notification of the increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state is performed. Since it is only necessary to add the number to the continuous game number storage means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K9. The second control means controls the special response execution means (processes of steps S3718, S3916 and S3920 in the MPU 92 on the presentation side) for executing a special response effect (special additional effect) corresponding to the number of non-reported games. A gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to feature K9, the number of games to be notified among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state is notified to the player by the number of games notification, but the number of non-notification target games that is not the number of games to be notified is Players are not notified. Then, a special effect corresponding to the number of non-reported games is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K10. The second control means includes notification adding means for adding the transition target game number, which is at least a part of the non-notification target game number, to the notification target game number (the function of executing the process of step S3904 in the production side MPU 92). prepared,
Characteristic feature K9, wherein the special response execution means executes, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the addition of the number of games to be transitioned to the number of games to be notified. game machine.

According to the characteristic K10, when at least part of the number of non-reported games is added to the number of reported games, a corresponding effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of games to be notified. In addition, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K11. The notification addition means is configured to determine whether the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of games to be notified and the number of games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state, is the same as the number of games to be played. The gaming machine according to feature K10, wherein the number of games to be shifted is selected from a plurality of types of numbers of games within a range not exceeding the number.

According to the feature K11, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of transition target games is generated, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the control for diversifying the number of games to be shifted is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K10 or K11, wherein the special response executing means can execute different types of special response effects even in a situation where the number of games to be shifted is the same.

According to the feature K12, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special handling effect, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the control for diversifying the execution mode of the special response effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Become.

Feature K13. The notification addition means adds the transition target game number to a range not exceeding the non-report target game number, which is the difference between the notification target game number and the remaining game number in the predetermined gaming state, in one game number selection process. Multiple selection means (function for executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3803 in the production side MPU 92) for multiple selections at the time of processing is provided,
The special response execution means is means for adding the number of the transition target games selected by the multiple selection means to the number of the notification target games in the special response performance executed at different timings ( A function of executing the processing of steps S3721 and S3916 in the production side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K12, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K13, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special response effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for increasing the execution frequency of the special response effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K14. The special response execution means is provided with a number of games for each of a plurality of games as one of the special response effects, and the transition target game in which the total number of games provided is the trigger for executing the addition response effect. The game machine according to any one of features K10 to K13, characterized in that it executes an effect that becomes a number.

According to the feature K14, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K15. The second control means, when the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, the game added to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state due to the establishment of the predetermined grant condition. A means (a function of executing the processing of step S3608 in the MPU 92 on the effect side) is provided for additionally performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the number to the number of games to be notified to the special response effect. The game machine according to any one of features K10 to K14, characterized by:

According to the feature K15, even in a situation where a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect from the increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified. In addition, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

For the configuration of features K1 to K15, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the execution of the predetermined game state, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Predetermined setting means (function for executing the process of step S2808 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the predetermined game state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state (the value of the ART game number counter 121) becoming 0 games in the predetermined game state function to execute the processing of S3403);
increasing state setting means for setting an increasing state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined entry opportunity in the predetermined game state and continuing the increasing state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S3301 in the main side MPU 72) for increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state by a predetermined increase game number each time a predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the increase state;
a special effect processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3313 in the main MPU 72) that executes a special effect process based on the fact that the increase in the number of games to be increased is equal to or greater than a specific reference number in the increasing state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature L1, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the predetermined increased number of games each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied by entering the increasing state, so the player expects to be in the increasing state. It will happen. In this case, since the special effect processing is executed based on the fact that the increase in the number of games to be increased in the increasing state is equal to or greater than the specific reference number of times, if the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state is increased, It is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein even if the increasing state is set, an effect corresponding to the increasing state is not executed until the special effect processing is executed.

According to the feature L2, the special performance process is suddenly executed in a situation where the player does not recognize the increase state, so that it is possible to give an unexpected feeling.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the special effect process executing means sets a standby state in which progress of the game based on the player's operation is on standby as the special effect process.

According to the feature L3, when a large number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state are awarded, the progress of the game based on the player's operation is put on standby. It is possible to emphasize that

Feature L4. Characteristic L1 characterized in that the special effect processing executing means executes the special effect processing when the increasing state ends after the increase in the predetermined number of games to be increased in the increasing state is equal to or greater than the specific reference number of times in the increasing state. The gaming machine according to any one of L3 to L3.

According to the feature L4, when the increase state occurs, the special effect processing is executed based on the end of the increase state, so the special effect processing is executed under the condition where a large number of games are awarded. At the same time, it is possible to inform the player that the increased state has been set and that the increased state has ended due to the execution of the special effect processing.

Feature L5. When the special effect process is executed, a total notification means (a function of executing the process of step S4004 in the effect side MPU 92) for notifying the player of the information target information corresponding to the total number of games given in the increasing state is provided. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature L5, it is possible to notify at once that a large number of games have been awarded.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is a value greater than a quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature L6, the special effect processing is executed when the number of games equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games is awarded in the increasing state, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the special effect processing. . Further, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games, the number of games awarded in the increased state is consumed during the execution of the increased state. Even if the number of games is increased, it is possible to execute the special effect processing in a situation where the number of games given in the increasing state and the number of games that have not yet been completed is equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.

For the configuration of features L1 to L6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. Predetermined setting means (function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the predetermined game state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state (the value of the ART game number counter 121) becoming 0 games in the predetermined game state function to execute the processing of S3403);
non-report target storage means (stock game number counter 127) for storing the number of non-report target games not reported to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state;
Specific increase state setting means (main side MPU 72 in a function to execute the processing of steps S2912 to S2914);
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S3201 in the main MPU 72) for increasing the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state by a specific increase game number each time a specific grant condition is satisfied in the specific increase state;
When the specific increase state is set, the specific corresponding effect control means (the effect side MPU 92 executes the processing of steps S3704 and S3705) for executing the specific corresponding effect (expected effect) over the number of specific effect games. function) and
Non-informed object adding means for adding the specific increased number of games increased by the game number increasing means to the non-informed object storage means (the process of step S3710 in the production side MPU 92) function) and
When the specific correspondence effect is executed over the specific effect game number, the special correspondence corresponding to the game number stored in the non-report object storage means even in a situation where the specific increase state is not finished. A special response execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3718, S3916 and S3920 in the production side MPU 92) for executing the production (special additional production),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature M1, when the specific increase state occurs in the predetermined game state, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state is increased by the specific increase game number each time the specific grant condition is satisfied. We expect it to increase. In addition, while the number of games given in the specific increase state is temporarily given as the number of non-reported games, when the specific increase state is set, the specific corresponding effect is executed over the number of specific effect games. , it is possible for the player to expect how much the number of non-informed target games has increased in the situation where the specific correspondence effect is being executed. In addition, when the specific corresponding effect is executed over the number of specific effect games, the special corresponding effect corresponding to the number of non-informed games at that time is executed even if the specific increasing state is not finished. . As a result, the player expects the contents of the special correspondence effect to be executed after the execution of the specific correspondence effect. Moreover, it becomes possible to start the special correspondence performance earlier than the structure in which the special correspondence performance is not executed until the specific increase state ends.

Feature M2. The specific increase state setting means terminates the specific increase state when the specific end condition is satisfied even before the specific effect game number is completed after the specific increase state is set. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature M1.

According to the feature M2, it is possible to create a situation in which the specific increasing state ends before the specific corresponding performance is completed and a situation in which the specific increasing state continues even after the specific corresponding performance is completed.

Feature M3. The special response execution means converts the number of games to be transitioned, which is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-report target storage means, into the number of games to be notified to the player as the special response effect. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, characterized in that an effect corresponding to the addition is executed.

According to feature M3, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to adding the number of games to be transitioned, which is at least a part of the number of games to be notified, to the number of games to be notified is executed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player.

Feature M4. Multiple selection means for selecting a plurality of the number of transition target games in one process of the game number selection process within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means (in the production side MPU 92 A function to execute the processing of steps S3802 and S3803),
The special response execution means is means for adding the number of the transition target games selected by the multiple selection means to the number of the notification target games in the special response performance executed at different timings ( The gaming machine according to feature M3, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S3721 and S3916 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to the feature M4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special response effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M5. The special response execution means is provided with a number of games for each of a plurality of games as one of the special response effects, and the transition target game in which the total number of games provided is the trigger for executing the addition response effect. The gaming machine according to feature M3 or M4, characterized in that it executes an effect that becomes a number.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature M6. a game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main side MPU 72) for increasing the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
When the predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the situation where the special response effect is being executed, the number of games added to the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined gaming state due to the satisfaction of the predetermined granting condition is the number of games to be notified. A means (function for executing the processing of step S3608 in the effect side MPU 92) for additionally performing the effect corresponding to the addition to the special response effect,
The game machine according to any one of features M3 to M5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature M6, even in a situation where a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect from the increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

Feature M7. The special response execution means can execute a different special response effect even in a situation where the number of non-reported target games stored in the non-reported target storage means is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, characterized by:

According to the feature M7, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M8. The special response execution means converts the number of games to be transitioned, which is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-report target storage means, into the number of games to be notified to the player as the special response effect. The effect corresponding to the addition is executed, and even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-report target storage means is the same number of games, the number of games is the same. The gaming machine according to feature M7, wherein the transition target game number is selected from among a plurality of types of game numbers within a range not exceeding the non-notification target game number.

According to the feature M8, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of transition target games is generated, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

For the configuration of features M1 to M8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. Predetermined setting means (function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the predetermined game state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined ending means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined game state (the value of the ART game number counter 121) becoming 0 games in the predetermined game state function to execute the processing of S3403);
Number-of-games informing means for informing the number of games (effect A function of executing the processing of steps S3506 and S3510 in the side MPU 92);
non-report target storage means (stock game number counter 127) for storing the number of non-report target games not reported to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state;
In a situation where the number of non-informed target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-informed target storage means, when the number of reported target games becomes 0, the number of games is stored in the non-informed target storage means. When the number of non-notification target games is larger than the reference number of games at the end (first release reference value, second release reference value), the predetermined game state is changed in a different manner from the case where the number of games is smaller than the end reference game number. a continuous effect execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4106, S4110 and S4114 in the effect-side MPU 92) for executing continuous effects (first release effect, second release effect, third release effect); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature N1, since the number of games to be notified is not notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state, even if the number of games to be notified is 0 games, the predetermined number of games is not notified. It is possible to make the player expect that the game state will be continued. In this case, if the number of games to be notified is 0 in a situation where the number of games to be not notified is one or more, the difference depends on whether the number of games to be not notified is equal to or greater than the reference number of games at the end. A continuation effect of a predetermined game state is executed in a mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the continuous effect according to the number of non-notification target games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature N2. When the number of non-informed target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-informed target storage means, the continuous effect executing means controls the non-informed target when the number of the reported target games becomes zero. When the number of non-notification target games stored in the storage means is larger than the reference number of games at the end, the number of games that is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is used as the continuous effect. A game number notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4110 and S4114 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing effects (second release effect, third release effect) to be added to the number is provided. The gaming machine according to feature N1.

According to feature N2, when the number of games to be notified is 0 and the number of non-notification games is equal to or greater than the reference number of games at the end, the predetermined game state continues to some extent. In such a case, by notifying the player of at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, it is possible to give the player a sense of security for the continuation of the predetermined game state.

Feature N3. The continuous production execution means is
When the number of non-informed target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-informed target storage means and the number of reported target games becomes 0, the non-informed target game number is stored in the non-informed target storage means. When the number of non-reported games is smaller than the reference number of games at the end, an effect (second release effect) of adding the entire number of non-reported games to the number of reported games is executed as the continuous effect. First continuous effect execution means (function for executing the process of step S4110 in the effect side MPU 92);
When the number of non-informed target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-informed target storage means and the number of reported target games becomes 0, the non-informed target game number is stored in the non-informed target storage means. If the number of non-notification target games is greater than the reference number of games at the end, as the continuous effect, the number of transition target games, which is part of the number of non-notification target games, is added to the number of notification target games (second 3 release effect), a second continuous effect executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3414 in the effect-side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature N3, when the number of games to be notified becomes zero, at least a part of the number of games to be notified is not notified to the player, thereby giving the player a sense of security that the predetermined gaming state will continue. be able to give. In this case, if the number of non-reported games is greater than the reference number of games at the end, only a part of the number of non-reported games is reported to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the continuation performance of the predetermined game state, and to make the player expect that the predetermined game state will still continue even if the number of games to be notified approaches zero. becomes possible.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the second continuous effect executing means selects the transition target game number from among a plurality of types of game numbers within a range not exceeding the non-informed target game number.

According to feature N4, it is possible to diversify the number of transition target games.

Feature N5. When the number of non-informed target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-informed target storage means, the continuous effect executing means controls the non-informed target when the number of the reported target games becomes zero. When the number of non-reported games stored in the storage means is less than the reference number of games at the end, the predetermined number of games remaining in the predetermined game state is not notified to the player as the continuous effect. Features N1 to N4 characterized by comprising means for executing an effect (first release effect) for consuming the remaining number of continuous games in the gaming state (function for executing the process of step S4106 in the effect side MPU 92) 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature N5, when the number of games to be notified is 0 and the number of non-notification target games is smaller than the reference number of games at the end, the player is not notified of the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined game state. By doing so, it is possible not to lower the player's expectation for the continuation of the predetermined game state.

For the configuration of features N1 to N5, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature group L, the feature group M, and the feature group N, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. a first lottery means for executing the first lottery process using numerical information when the first lottery opportunity occurs (for example, a function of executing the transition lottery process for the false portent state in the main MPU 72);
a second lottery means (for example, a function of executing a transition lottery process for chance state in the main side MPU 72) that executes the second lottery process using numerical information when the second lottery opportunity occurs;
predetermined storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) in which numerical information is updated when an update opportunity occurs;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the numerical information stored in the predetermined storage means may be obtained by the first lottery means and may be obtained by the second lottery means.

According to feature O1, the numerical information updated in the predetermined storage means is used in the first lottery process and used in the second lottery process. This makes it possible to reduce the number of means for storing updated numerical information, thereby simplifying the configuration.

Feature O2. A plurality of numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) whose numerical information is updated, including the predetermined storage means,
This game machine is
Reference information storage means (random number pointer of main side RAM 74) for storing identification reference information referred to in order to identify the numerical information storage means from which numerical information is to be acquired;
When the numerical information storage means corresponding to the reference information for identification becomes the acquisition target of the numerical information, the reference information for identification is updated so that the acquisition target of the numerical information is the numerical information storage means in the next order. (a function for executing the processing of steps S509 to S511 in the main MPU 72);
with
The first lottery means acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information when the first lottery opportunity occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information when the second lottery opportunity occurs.

According to the characteristic O2, since numerical information is acquired from a plurality of numerical information storage means in a predetermined order, it is possible to prevent numerical information from being acquired from one numerical information storage means. It becomes possible. Further, since the configuration is such that numerical information is acquired from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information, the processing configuration for specifying the numerical information storage means to be acquired from the numerical information should not be complicated. It becomes possible to

Feature O3. A plurality of numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) whose numerical information is updated, including the predetermined storage means,
There are a plurality of acquisition target lottery means, including the first lottery means and the second lottery means, for acquiring numerical information from the plurality of numerical information storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the number of acquisition target lottery means is greater than the number of numerical information storage means.

According to feature O3, since the number of lottery processes for obtaining numerical information from a plurality of numerical information storage means is greater than the number of numerical information storage means, the number of numerical information storage means is suppressed from increasing. It is possible to increase the number of lottery processes.

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to feature O3, wherein the number of the numerical information storage means is equal to or greater than the maximum number of the acquisition target lottery means to be executed in one game.

According to feature O4, the number of numerical information storage means is equal to or greater than the maximum number of acquisition target lottery processes to be executed in one game, so that a plurality of numerical information storage means are stored in a plurality of acquisition target lottery processes. In the jointly used configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information in the same numerical information storage means from being used in a plurality of lottery processes in one game.

Feature O5. a separate numerical information storage means (first dedicated random number circuit 102a) provided separately from the predetermined storage means, in which numerical information is updated when an update trigger occurs;
another lottery means (function of executing steps S601 to S613 in the main MPU 72) for executing another lottery process using the numerical information acquired from the different numerical information storage means when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs; ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O5, numerical information is obtained from separate numerical information storage means provided separately from predetermined storage means in the separate lottery process. This makes it possible to strictly perform the separate lottery process.

Feature O6. Numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) for updating the numerical information when the numerical information is acquired in each of the first lottery means and the second lottery means and an update opportunity occurs. a plurality of including the predetermined storage means,
The game machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein all of the plurality of numerical information storage means have the same number of bits.

According to feature O6, since all of the plurality of numerical information storage means used jointly in a plurality of lottery processes have the same number of bits, even if any of the numerical information storage means is used in one lottery process, It becomes possible to acquire and use numerical information of the same number of bits.

Feature O7. The first lottery means acquires numerical information from one of the numerical information storage means when the first lottery opportunity occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature O6, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from a plurality of the numerical information storage means when the second lottery opportunity occurs.

According to feature O7, even a lottery means that uses numerical information of different numbers of bits in lottery processing can share a plurality of numerical information storage means with other lottery means.

For the configuration of features O1 to O7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1. A first specific lottery means (the number in the main MPU 72) that executes lottery processing (additional lottery processing) by collating numerical information acquired when an acquisition opportunity occurs with a first lottery information group (first addition table 141). 1 function to execute the addition lottery process using the addition table 141);
A second specific lottery means (the number in the main MPU 72) that executes lottery processing (additional lottery processing) by collating numerical information acquired when an acquisition opportunity occurs with a second lottery information group (second addition table 142). 2 a function of executing an addition lottery process using the addition table 142);
with
The first lottery information group is
a plurality of identification information (superimposed index); and
Lottery correspondence information (the number of winning random numbers) that is set in association with the identification information and that enables the first specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. and,
and
The second lottery information group is
a plurality of identification information (superimposed index); and
Lottery correspondence information (the number of winning random numbers) that is set in association with the identification information and enables the second specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. and,
and
The same information is set as the plurality of identification information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group,
In the first lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information among the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery processing of the first specific lottery means. has been
In the second lottery information group, the lottery corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means,
This game machine is
information storage means (main-side ROM 73) for storing a correspondence information group (index correspondence table 145) in which lottery result information (additional game number) is set in association with each of the plurality of identification information;
Information grasping means for grasping the lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected by the first specific lottery means or the second specific lottery means from the corresponding information group (executing the process of step S5408 in the main MPU 72 function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic P1, when the first lottery information group is referred to, the predetermined identification information is not selected in the lottery processing of the first specific lottery means, but the predetermined identification information is included in the first lottery information group. A plurality of pieces of identification information are set so as to be the same as the second lottery information group. Further, a corresponding information group in which lottery result information is set corresponding to each of the plurality of identification information is stored in the information storage means, and the lottery processing of the first specific lottery means or the lottery process of the second specific lottery means. Lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected in is grasped from the corresponding information group. With this configuration, it is not necessary to store the corresponding information groups corresponding to the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group in the information storage means. It is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature P2. The plurality of pieces of identification information are set to be serial numbers,
In the lottery process, determination processing (processing of steps S5504 to S5506 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether each identification information is to be selected as a lottery result according to the numerical order of the plurality of identification information is executed. The gaming machine according to feature P1.

According to the feature P2, the lottery process can be favorably performed because the identification information is set with serial numbers. In this case, if the identification information is treated as different information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the corresponding information group is generated corresponding to the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, respectively. need to prepare. On the other hand, since the same identification information is set in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group with the configuration of the feature P1, the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group It is possible to share the correspondence information group.

Feature P3. In the second lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery processing of the second specific lottery means. has been
In the first lottery information group, the lottery corresponding information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature P1 or P2.

According to the feature P3, although the identification information that is not selected in the lottery process is different between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the same identification information is set. It is possible to share the correspondence information group between the lottery information group and the second lottery information group.

Feature P4. The information storage means stores first compressed information (first compressed data 146) corresponding to the first lottery information group,
This game machine has means for generating the first lottery information group by executing the decompression process for the first compressed information (function for executing the processing of steps S5402 to S5404 in the main side MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, wherein the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is not set in the first compressed information.

According to feature P4, even if predetermined identification information that is not selected in the lottery process is set in the first lottery information group, the first compressed information corresponding to the first lottery information group does not have the predetermined identification information. The corresponding lottery support information is not set. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the information necessary for using the first lottery information group.

For the configuration of features P1 to P4, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the above feature group O and feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the lottery to be favorably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. History storage execution means (main MPU 72) for storing game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event in the execution of a game in history storage means (total game number counter 74a, advantageous game number counter 74b) a function to execute the processing of steps S4701 to S4704;
information derivation means (function for executing the process of step S4707 in the main MPU 72) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Information display control means (step S4708 in main MPU 72) for controlling display of information display means (combined display section 66, advantageous section display section 67) so as to perform display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means function) and
with
The information display control means is an end control means (the main MPU 72 executes the process of step S4710) for ending the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means based on the occurrence of the end trigger. function).

According to feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using this managed information. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the termination trigger. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being displayed by the information display means in situations where it is not necessary to display the mode information.

Feature Q2. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the termination timing.

According to the characteristic Q2, since there are a plurality of types of termination triggers, it is possible to improve the operability when terminating the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means.

Feature Q3. The information display control means executes the processing of step S4708 in the main side MPU 72 so that the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is started based on the occurrence of the start opportunity. function),
The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the start timing is one type.

According to the feature Q3, since there is only one type of start trigger, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means from being unintentionally started.

Feature Q4. The end control means controls corresponding events (output of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, output of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, output of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, wherein it is specified that the termination opportunity has occurred based on the occurrence of ON signal output from ∼ 49a.

According to the feature Q4, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of the target event that can occur when the game is started, so the mode information is displayed on the information display means. It is possible to prevent the game from being played unattended.

Feature Q5. Predetermined output means (start detection sensor 41a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a) that enter a predetermined output state when a corresponding event occurs;
Means for executing effective response control based on the predetermined output state of the predetermined output means in the effective state (function for executing the process of step S402 in the main MPU 72, affirmative determination in step S404 in the main MPU 72 function) and
with
According to any one of features Q1 to Q4, wherein the termination control means determines that the termination opportunity has occurred based on the fact that the predetermined output means has entered the predetermined output state in the non-effective state. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature Q5, even if the status is not valid, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means ends when the predetermined output means enters the specified output state. It is possible to terminate the display corresponding to the mode information.

For the configuration of features Q1 to Q5, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group Q, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group R>
Feature R1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern;
A pattern that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the occurrence of the variation start opportunity, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
with
The pattern display control means determines that the variation start trigger does not occur when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the variable display of the pattern is being performed and when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Resume handling means for starting the variable display of the pattern (in the first embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in steps S103 and S112 in the main MPU 72; in the tenth embodiment, steps S6303 in the main MPU 72 and A function to make a negative determination in step S6312),
In the game machine, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while at least the variable display of the pattern is being executed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means is performed. Stop regulation means for regulating execution (function for executing the processing of steps S116 and S117 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, execution of the processing in step S6316 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the feature R1, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the variable display of the pattern is being executed, the pattern is displayed even if the fluctuation start trigger does not occur when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Variable display is started. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the variable display of the pattern from being invalidated by the stoppage of the supply of the operating power. Further, when the variable display of the pattern is newly started at the time of resuming the supply of the operating power, the execution of the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means is regulated. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is resumed while the stop operation means is being operated, the stop control of the pattern is executed immediately after the variable display of the pattern is started. It is possible to prevent it from being done. If the pattern stop control is executed immediately after the start of the pattern variable display, the pattern variable display may not be performed normally. By doing so, it is possible to prevent such events from occurring.

Feature R2. The pattern display control means includes:
Acceleration means for generating an acceleration period when the variable display of the pattern is started (function for executing acceleration processing in the main MPU 72, function for executing the processing of steps S1103 to S1108 in the main MPU 72);
means for setting constant speed correspondence information in the constant speed correspondence storage area (constant speed flag 74c) when the acceleration period ends (function for executing the process of step S918 in the main MPU 72);
Means for generating a constant speed period so that the pattern is variably displayed at a constant speed when the constant speed correspondence information is set in the constant speed correspondence storage area (function for executing the processing of step S1110 in the main MPU 72) )and,
When the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area, the constant speed correspondence information is stored in the constant speed correspondence storage area without executing stop control even if the stop operation means is operated. is set, a means for executing stop control based on the operation of the stop operation means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S801 in the main side MPU 72 and executing the processing after step S803); ,
with
The stop regulation means, when a trigger for stopping the supply of operating power occurs in a situation in which the constant-speed correspondence information is set in the constant-speed correspondence storage area, causes the above-mentioned The constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding storage area,
The acceleration means generates the acceleration period when the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding storage area in a situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed. The gaming machine described in R1.

According to the feature R2, when the variable display of the pattern is started, the acceleration period first occurs, and then the constant speed period occurs. Then, the operation of the stop operation means is validated by setting the constant speed support information during the constant speed period. As a result, the pattern stop control is executed in a situation where the pattern is being variably displayed at a constant speed, so that the pattern stop control can be performed appropriately. In this case, if the operating power supply stop opportunity occurs while the constant speed support information is set, the state where the constant speed support information is not set in the situation after the supply of the operating power is restarted It has become. Then, when the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed, the acceleration period is entered. As a result, by using the constant-speed corresponding information, it is possible to operate the stop operation means when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the variable display of the pattern is being executed and when the supply of the operating power is restarted. can be invalidated, and the variable display of the pattern can be newly started.

Feature R3. information storage means (main-side RAM 74) having the constant-speed storage area and storing various information;
Information erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means on the basis that erasing conditions are satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (the processing of steps S104 and S113 in the main MPU 72 is function) and
with
The stop regulation means erases the information when a trigger to stop the supply of operating power occurs in a situation where the constant-speed support information is set in the constant-speed support storage area, or when the supply of operating power is restarted. Even if the information is not erased by means, the constant-speed correspondence information is not set in the constant-speed correspondence storage area in a situation after the supply of operating power is restarted. The gaming machine according to feature R2, characterized by:

According to feature R3, when the supply of operating power is interrupted in a situation where the constant-speed support information is set, the information in the information storage means is erased by the information erasing means when the supply of operating power is started. is not erased, the constant speed support information is not set. Then, when the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed, the acceleration period is entered. As a result, by using the constant-speed corresponding information, it is possible to operate the stop operation means when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the variable display of the pattern is being executed and when the supply of the operating power is restarted. can be invalidated, and the variable display of the pattern can be newly started.

Feature R4. The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, characterized in that the stop control means sets a state in which the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area when the supply of operating power is started. .

According to feature R4, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the constant-speed support information is set, the constant-speed support information is not set when the supply of operating power is resumed. be. As a result, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to ensure that the constant speed correspondence information is not set.

Feature R5. The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the stop control means sets the constant speed correspondence information to a state in which the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area when the supply of operating power is stopped. .

According to feature R5, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the constant speed correspondence information is set, the constant speed correspondence information is not set at that time. As a result, it is possible to set the constant-speed support information to a state in which the constant speed support information is not set when the supply of operating power is resumed without executing a special process when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature R6. The pattern display control means includes:
Confirmation means for executing confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the stop operation means is operated based on the occurrence of the confirmation opportunity (executing the stop operation determination process of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) function) and
History storage execution means (step S6103 to step function to execute the processing of S6106);
Based on confirmation that the stop operation means is operated in the confirmation process in a situation where the predetermined history information is information corresponding to a confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means is not operated , a means (a function of executing the processing of step S6108 in the main side MPU 72) that makes it possible to stop the variable display of the pattern;
with
The stop restricting means executes the confirmation process after the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where at least the variable display of the pattern is being executed and the supply of operating power is restarted. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined history information is information corresponding to a confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means is being operated under certain circumstances.

According to the feature R6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed, the predetermined history information is stopped when the supply of the operating power is restarted and the confirmation process is executed. It is information corresponding to the confirmation result indicating that the means is being operated. Stop control of the variable display of the pattern based on confirmation processing that the stop operation means is being operated in a situation where predetermined history information indicating that the stop operation means is not operated is stored. is executed, if the predetermined history information indicating that the stop operation means is operated is stored when the confirmation process is executed as described above, the stop operation means is operated. Even if it is confirmed in the confirmation process that the pattern is present, the stop control of the variable display of the pattern is not executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described simply by adjusting the content of the predetermined history information.

Feature R7. The pattern display control means includes:
Acceleration means for generating an acceleration period when the variable display of the pattern is started (function for executing acceleration processing in the main MPU 72, function for executing the processing of steps S1103 to S1108 in the main MPU 72);
means for setting constant speed correspondence information in the constant speed correspondence storage area (constant speed flag 74c) when the acceleration period ends (function for executing the process of step S918 in the main MPU 72);
Means for generating a constant speed period so that the pattern is variably displayed at a constant speed when the constant speed correspondence information is set in the constant speed correspondence storage area (function for executing the processing of step S1110 in the main MPU 72) )and,
When the constant speed correspondence information is not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area, the constant speed correspondence information is stored in the constant speed correspondence storage area without executing stop control even if the stop operation means is operated. is set, a means for executing stop control based on the operation of the stop operation means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S801 in the main side MPU 72 and executing the processing after step S803); ,
Means (in the main MPU 72) for setting the constant speed corresponding information to the constant speed corresponding storage area when it is specified that the variable display of the pattern is not performed normally. a function to execute the processing of step S6202);
with
The acceleration means generates the acceleration period when the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding storage area in a situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed. The gaming machine described in R6.

According to the feature R7, when the variable display of the pattern is started, the acceleration period first occurs, and then the constant speed period occurs. Then, the operation of the stop operation means is validated by setting the constant speed support information during the constant speed period. As a result, the pattern stop control is executed in a situation where the pattern is being variably displayed at a constant speed, so that the pattern stop control can be performed appropriately. Further, when it is specified that the variable display of the pattern is not performed normally, the constant speed correspondence information is not set, and the constant speed response is performed in the situation where the variable display of the pattern should be executed. If the information is not set, it becomes the acceleration period. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state where the constant speed support information is set, if the supply of the operating power is restarted, the stop operation means will not be operated when the subsequent confirmation process is executed. Since the predetermined history information indicating that the stop operation means is stored, the operation of the stop operation means is substantially invalidated. Then, in a situation where the operation of the stop operation means is invalidated, it is possible to set the constant speed support information to a state in which it is not set, and to start the acceleration period anew. becomes.

For the configuration of features R1 to R7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group R, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section. Also, in a pachinko game machine, there is known a configuration in which a display device or a rotator is used to carry out variable display of patterns.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, thereby starting the variable display of the pattern, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the symbols after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform the variable display of patterns, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern;
a winning lottery executing means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
The pattern display controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the start operation means is operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop trigger is generated. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
Winning correspondence control means (in the main MPU 72) for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the result of the stopping of the symbols corresponds to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. a function to execute the process of step S410);
a first predetermined lottery executing means (a function of constantly executing the lottery processing in the main side MPU 72) for executing the first predetermined lottery processing regardless of the result of the lottery processing for the combination;
Predetermined privilege awarding means (in the first embodiment, step S3109 in the main side MPU 72) for awarding a prescribed privilege (addition of the number of games to be added) to the player based on the winning result in the first prescribed lottery process a function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S6411 in the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S6511 in the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature S1, the winning lottery process is executed based on the operation of the start operation means and the variable display of the pattern is started, and the result of the winning lottery process when the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Winning response control is executed based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to is the result of stopping. Therefore, the player plays the game while paying attention to the stop result of the variable display of the pattern. In this case, the first predetermined lottery process is executed irrespective of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination, and a predetermined benefit is provided based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined privilege is granted in a manner that does not depend on the result of the winning lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined privilege will be granted even if the result of the winning lottery process is not the desired result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Feature S2. The combination lottery execution means executes the lottery process of the combination using the numerical information acquired based on the operation of the start operation means,
The feature S1 is characterized in that the first predetermined lottery executing means executes the first predetermined lottery process using numerical information acquired based on the operation of the start operation means. The game machine described.

According to the feature S2, even if the first predetermined lottery process is executed irrespective of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the lottery process of the winning combination is executed when the acquisition of the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process is triggered. It is possible to share the operation of the start operation means in the same way as the acquisition timing of the numerical information used in the process. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without complicating the acquisition timing of numerical information.

Feature S3. Numerical information updating means (first dedicated random number circuit 102a, third dedicated random number circuit 102c) different from the numerical information used in the winning lottery process and the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein the numerical information is updated by.

According to the feature S3, the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process is updated by the numerical information updating means different from the numerical information updating means for updating the numerical information used in the winning lottery process. . This makes it possible to make the result of the first predetermined lottery process completely independent of the result of the winning combination lottery process.

Feature S4. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3, wherein the first predetermined lottery executing means executes the first predetermined lottery process in each game at least in a specific situation (ART state ST9).

According to the feature S4, since the first predetermined lottery process is executed in each game at least in the specific situation, the predetermined privilege is given in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process of the role at least in the specific situation. It is possible to make people expect

Feature S5. Second predetermined lottery execution means for executing the second predetermined lottery process in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6402 to S6404 in the main MPU 72, and in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6504 in the main MPU 72),
The predetermined privilege granting means grants the predetermined privilege based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process, and the predetermined privilege based on the winning result in the second predetermined lottery process The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S4, wherein a privilege is given.

According to the feature S5, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined privilege is awarded regardless of the result of the winning lottery process, and a situation in which the prescribed privilege is awarded in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process. becomes. As a result, the player expects that the predetermined privilege will be given according to the result of the lottery process for the role, and expects that the predetermined privilege will be given regardless of the result of the lottery process for the role. .

Feature S6. The advantage of the predetermined privilege given based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process is the predetermined advantage given based on the winning result in the second predetermined lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature S5, characterized in that the degree of advantage is lower than or tends to be lower than the advantage of the privilege.

According to the feature S6, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the lottery process for the role in regard to the granting of the predetermined privilege, and to grant the predetermined privilege even if the result of the lottery process for the role is not the desired result. can be expected by the player.

Feature S7. When the predetermined privilege is granted based on the winning result in the second predetermined lottery process, the predetermined privilege granting means is configured to provide the predetermined privilege even if the winning result is the first predetermined lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature S5 or S6, characterized in that the predetermined privilege is not given on the basis of the winning result.

According to the feature S7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while preventing the predetermined privilege from being excessively granted.

Feature S8. A setting means (function for executing the processing of step S105 in the main side MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The second predetermined lottery execution means performs the second predetermined lottery process based on the winning of a specific combination having the same winning probability regardless of the setting value of the plurality of stages in the lottery process of the combination. The game machine according to any one of features S5 to S7, characterized by executing

According to the feature S8, it is possible to give a predetermined privilege while making it difficult to predict the set value.

For the configuration of features S1 to S8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the group of features S, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section. Also, in a pachinko game machine, there is known a configuration in which a display device or a rotator is used to carry out variable display of patterns.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, thereby starting the variable display of the pattern, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the symbols after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. random number updating means (fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d) for updating specific random number information;
Random number acquisition means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S2104 in the main MPU 72; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6604 in the main side MPU 72);
Information updating means for updating the lottery value information in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S2106 in the main MPU 72; in the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main MPU 72);
numerical value information corresponding to a result after the numerical value information in the lottery storage area is changed from one of a minimum value and a maximum value to the other by updating the lottery value information in the lottery storage area; Winning response execution means for executing winning response processing when the winning response is true (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2107 and S2108 in the main MPU 72; in the thirteenth embodiment, steps S6608 and a function to execute the processing of step S6609);
with
The lottery storage area is an area of a predetermined number of bits,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific random number information has a specific number of bits smaller than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the feature T1, by updating the lottery value information in the lottery storage area, it corresponds to the result after the numerical value information in the lottery storage area is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other. In the configuration in which the winning handling process is executed when the numerical value information is such that the lottery storage area has a predetermined number of bits, the specific random number information has a specific number of bits less than the predetermined number of bits. ing. As a result, in order to create a situation in which the lottery handling process is executed 100%, it is sufficient to use numerical information having a value larger than the maximum value of the specific number of bits as the lottery value information. It is possible to keep the number of bits within the range of the predetermined number of bits. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the lottery process.

Feature T2. The information updating means derives numerical information obtained by subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area,
The winning correspondence executing means converts the numerical information of the result derived by the information updating means to the result after the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by subtraction of the lottery value information. The gaming machine according to feature T1, characterized in that the winning handling process is executed when corresponding numerical information is obtained.

According to feature T2, in the configuration in which the numerical information is updated in a subtractive manner at the time of the lottery, the specific random number information is set to a specific number of bits smaller than the predetermined number of bits. It is possible to create a situation in which the winning handling process is executed 100% only by using numerical information having a value greater than the value.

Feature T3. As the lottery value information, the first lottery value information ("9" to "14" in the lottery table 112 for low probability) that is the information of the predetermined number of bits and has a value larger than the maximum value of the specific number of bits Lottery value information corresponding to the winning number, lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers "9" to "16" in the high-probability lottery table 113), and information of the predetermined number of bits, which is based on the specific number of bits. Second lottery value information that is equal to or less than the maximum value (lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery table for high probability lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8" in 113).

According to the feature T3, by using the first lottery value information, it is possible to execute the winning handling process 100%, and by using the second lottery value information, the lottery is won according to the specific random number information. It is possible to cause both a situation in which the countermeasure process is executed and a situation in which it is not executed.

Feature T4. The game machine according to any one of features T1 to T3, wherein the specific bit number is one bit less than the predetermined bit number.

According to the feature T4, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while maximizing the numerical range that can be taken as the specific random number information.

Feature T5. The game machine according to any one of features T1 to T4, wherein the predetermined number of bits is a number of bits corresponding to a predetermined number of bytes.

According to the feature T5, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while enabling handling of numerical information in units of bytes.

Feature T6. The information updating means is
Numerical information obtained by adding predetermined specific numerical information (fixed value) to the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored is derived. A first derivation means (a function of executing the processing of step S6605 in the main side MPU 72),
Second derivation means for deriving numerical information as a result of adding the lottery value information to the numerical information derived by the first derivation means (function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main MPU 72 )and,
with
The winning correspondence executing means is configured so that the numerical information derived by the second deriving means is the result after the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by adding the lottery value information. The game machine according to any one of features T1 to T5, wherein the winning handling process is executed when the numerical information corresponding to .

According to feature T6, since the configuration is such that the numerical information obtained by adding the lottery value information to the numerical information obtained by adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information is derived, the specific random number information has a predetermined number of bits. Even with a configuration in which the number of specific bits is smaller than the number of bits, it is possible to realize a lottery based on an additive formula.

Feature T7. The specific numerical information is such that the numerical information as a result of derivation by the first deriving means is such that the numerical information in the lottery storage area changes from the maximum value to the minimum value, regardless of whether the specific random number information is any numerical information. The gaming machine according to feature T6, wherein the setting is such that the numerical information does not correspond to the result after the change.

According to feature T7, it is possible to prevent the numerical information corresponding to the winning result from being derived simply by adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information.

Feature T8. A plurality of types of the lottery value information are set,
The specific numerical information is the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means, regardless of the type of the lottery value information, the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value. The game machine according to feature T6 or T7, characterized in that it is set so as to be numerical information corresponding to the result after being played.

According to feature T8, it is possible to derive numerical information corresponding to the winning result regardless of which type of lottery value information is used.

For the configuration of features T1 to T8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group U>
Features U1. random number updating means (fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d) for updating specific random number information;
Random number acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S6604 in the main MPU 72) that stores the specific random number information in the lottery storage area (acquired random number counter 74e) when an acquisition opportunity occurs;
Numerical information obtained by adding predetermined specific numerical information (fixed value) to the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area after the specific random number information is stored is derived. A first derivation means (a function of executing the processing of step S6605 in the main side MPU 72),
Second derivation means for deriving numerical information as a result of adding the lottery value information to the numerical information derived by the first derivation means (function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main MPU 72) and,
The numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means becomes numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by adding the lottery value information. A winning response execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S6608 and S6609 in the main side MPU 72) that executes the winning response processing in the case of
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature U1, the numerical information obtained by adding the lottery value information to the numerical information obtained by adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information is derived, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery storage area. is numerical information corresponding to the result after changing from the maximum value to the minimum value, the winning handling process is executed. As a result, even if the number of bits of the specific random number information is smaller than the number of bits of the memory area for lottery, it is possible to properly perform the lottery based on the addition formula. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the lottery process.

Feature U2. The lottery storage area is an area of a predetermined number of bits,
The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the specific random number information has a specific number of bits smaller than the predetermined number of bits.

According to feature U2, the lottery storage area has a predetermined number of bits, whereas the specific random number information has a specific number of bits less than the predetermined number of bits. As a result, in order to create a situation in which the lottery handling process is executed 100%, it is sufficient to use numerical information having a value larger than the maximum value of the specific number of bits as the lottery value information. It is possible to keep the number of bits within the range of the predetermined number of bits. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the lottery process.

Feature U3. As the lottery value information, the first lottery value information ("9" to "14" in the lottery table 112 for low probability) that is the information of the predetermined number of bits and has a value larger than the maximum value of the specific number of bits Lottery value information corresponding to the winning number, lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers "9" to "16" in the high-probability lottery table 113), and information of the predetermined number of bits, which is based on the specific number of bits. Second lottery value information that is equal to or less than the maximum value (lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery table for high probability Lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8" in 113).

According to the feature U3, by using the first lottery value information, it is possible to execute the winning handling process 100%, and by using the second lottery value information, winning is possible according to the specific random number information. It is possible to cause both a situation in which the countermeasure process is executed and a situation in which it is not executed.

Feature U4. The gaming machine according to feature U2 or U3, wherein the specific bit number is one bit less than the predetermined bit number.

According to the feature U4, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while maximizing the numerical range that can be taken as the specific random number information.

Feature U5. The gaming machine according to any one of features U2 to U4, wherein the predetermined number of bits is a number of bits corresponding to a predetermined number of bytes.

According to the feature U5, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while enabling handling of numerical information in units of bytes.

Feature U6. The specific numerical information is such that the numerical information as a result of derivation by the first deriving means is such that the numerical information in the lottery storage area changes from the maximum value to the minimum value, regardless of whether the specific random number information is any numerical information. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U5, wherein the setting is such that numerical information does not correspond to the result after the change.

According to feature U6, it is possible to prevent the numerical information corresponding to the winning result from being derived simply by adding the specific numerical information to the specific random number information.

Feature U7. A plurality of types of the lottery value information are set,
The specific numerical information is the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means, regardless of the type of the lottery value information, the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U6, characterized in that it is set so as to be numerical information corresponding to the result after being played.

According to feature U7, it is possible to derive numerical information corresponding to the winning result regardless of which type of lottery value information is used.

For the configuration of features U1 to U7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the characteristic T group and the characteristic U group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section. Also, in a pachinko game machine, there is known a configuration in which a display device or a rotator is used to carry out variable display of patterns.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, thereby starting the variable display of the pattern, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the symbols after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform the lottery process favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variable display of patterns;
generating an acceleration period for the variable display of the pattern in one variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas, and after the acceleration period ends, generating an acceleration period for the variable display of the pattern in the next variable display area; Acceleration means to be generated (the function of executing the processing of steps S1103 to S1108 and the processing of steps S1210 to S1211 in the main MPU 72);
determining at least one of presence/absence of a waiting period and a length of the waiting period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area. period determining means (function for executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1207 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature V1, after the acceleration period in one variable display area ends, the variable display of the pattern may start so that the acceleration period in the next variable display area starts. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the sequential start of the variable display of the patterns. In this case, the period from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area may vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the starting mode when the variable display of patterns is sequentially started. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the variable display of the pattern.

Feature V2. pattern display control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) for starting the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of the variable display areas based on the occurrence of the variation start opportunity;
As the variation start opportunity, there are a first variation start opportunity (situation where the reel performance winning flag is not set to "1") and a second variation start opportunity (situation where the reel performance winning flag is set to "1"). exists and
The pattern display control means includes:
First pattern display control means for performing variable display of the pattern in the plurality of variable display areas without causing the period determining means to determine the waiting period based on the occurrence of the first variation start trigger. (a function of executing the processing of steps S904 to S907 in the main MPU 72);
Second pattern display control means for performing variable display of the pattern in the plurality of variable display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination of the waiting period by the period determination means based on the occurrence of the second variation start trigger. (The function of executing the processing of steps S908 to S911 in the main MPU 72, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S916 in the main MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature V1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature V2, when the first variation start opportunity occurs, the pattern is variably displayed in the plurality of variation display areas without making a decision regarding the waiting period, and when the second variation start opportunity occurs. , the pattern is variably displayed in a plurality of variably display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination regarding the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the variable display of the pattern is executed.

Feature V3. The second pattern display control means causes the pattern display means to perform a specific variable display (reel effect) based on the pattern based on the occurrence of the second variation start trigger, and after the specific variable display is completed. , The gaming machine according to feature V2, wherein the pattern is variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination of the waiting period by the period determining means.

According to feature V3, when the second variation start trigger occurs, the pattern variation display is started again after the specific variation display is performed. As a result, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the manner in which the variable display of the pattern is executed. Further, when the pattern variable display is restarted after the specific variable display is performed, the pattern variable display is performed in the plurality of variable display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination regarding the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the pattern variable display is executed when the pattern variable display is restarted after the specific variable display is performed.

Feature V4. When the acceleration period in the one variable display area is started, the period determining means determines whether or not there is a waiting period until the acceleration period in the one variable display area is started in response to a predetermined start trigger, and waits. at least one of the lengths of the periods is determined, and when starting the acceleration period in the next-order variation display area, the next-order variation after the end of the acceleration period in the one variation display area; The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein at least one of presence/absence of a waiting period and length of the waiting period until the acceleration period in the display area is started is determined.

According to feature V4, when the variable display of the pattern in one variable display area is started, the period from the predetermined start trigger to the start of the acceleration period in one variable display area can vary. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the next variable display area is started, the period from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area is set. Duration may vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the one variable display area and the next variable display area, and as a result, when the variable display of patterns is started sequentially. It is possible to diversify the starting mode in

Feature V5. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4, wherein the period determination means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the standby period and the length of the standby period by standby lottery processing.

According to feature V5, since at least one of the presence or absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery, it is possible to make the manner of determining the waiting period irregular.

Feature V6. Predetermined numerical value updating means (random number counter) for updating predetermined numerical value information,
The period determining means is
First obtaining means for obtaining the predetermined numerical information when starting the acceleration period in the one variable display area (when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "3", the process of step S1205 is executed function) and
Presence or absence of a waiting period and length of the waiting period until the acceleration period in the one variable display area is started with respect to a predetermined start opportunity by using the predetermined numerical information obtained by the first obtaining means. a first determining means for determining at least one of them by lottery (a function of executing the process of step S1206 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "3");
A second obtaining means for obtaining the predetermined numerical information when starting the acceleration period in the next-order variable display area (when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "2", the processing of step S1205 function) and
Using the predetermined numerical value information acquired by the second acquiring means, from the end of the acceleration period in the one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area. A second determining means for determining at least one of the presence or absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period by lottery (the function of executing the process of step S1206 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "2" )and,
The game machine according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature V6, when the variable display of the pattern in one variable display area is started, the period from the predetermined start trigger to the start of the acceleration period in one variable display area can vary. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the next variable display area is started, the period from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area is set. Duration may vary. As a result, it is possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the one variable display area and the next variable display area, and as a result, when the variable display of patterns is started sequentially. It is possible to diversify the starting mode in In addition, since at least one of the presence or absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery, it is possible to make the manner of determining the waiting period irregular. In addition, a common predetermined numerical value update means is used in determining either the waiting period for one variable display area or the waiting period for the next variable display area. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the configuration.

Feature V7. The feature V6 is characterized in that the period required for updating the predetermined numerical value information by the predetermined numerical value updating means to complete one round is shorter than the period required for completing the acceleration period in the one variable display area. The game machine described.

According to feature V7, in a configuration in which a common predetermined numerical value update means is used regardless of whether the waiting period for one variable display area or the waiting period for the next variable display area is determined, A lottery for each waiting period can be performed independently.

For the configuration of features V1 to V7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1-I6, features J1-J8, features K1-K15, features L1-L6, features M1-M8, features N1-N5, features O1-O7, features P1-P4, features Q1-Q5, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations among R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group V, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section. Also, in a pachinko game machine, there is known a configuration in which a display device or a rotator is used to carry out variable display of patterns.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, thereby starting the variable display of the pattern, and the stop button is pressed during the rotation of the reel. When operated, rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result of the symbols after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to diversify the manner in which the variable display of patterns is executed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

10... slot machine, 31... reel unit, 41... start lever, 41a... start detection sensor, 42 to 44... stop button, 45a... inserted token detection sensor, 47a to 49a... credit insertion detection sensor, 72... main side MPU, 73 Main side ROM 74 Main side RAM 74a Total game number counter 74b Advantageous game number counter 74c Constant speed flag 74e Obtained random number counter 92 Effect side MPU 93 Effect side ROM 94... Production side RAM 101a to 101l... 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 102a... 1st dedicated random number circuit 102c... 3rd dedicated random number circuit 102d... 4th dedicated random number circuit 111... Offset table 112... Lottery table for low probability 113 Lottery table for high probability 121 ART game number counter 126 Display counter 127 Stock game number counter 132 Transition condition game number counter 141 First addition table , 142 .

Claims (1)

a first control means for managing the progress of a game;
a second control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
Lottery means for executing lottery processing;
a game executing means for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery process;
a first section setting means for setting the game section to the first section;
A second section setting means for setting the game section to a second section;
Predetermined response means for causing a predetermined response situation to occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained based on the predetermined lottery result in the lottery process;
means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section;
means for updating the predetermined reference information stored in the predetermined storage means to the side closer to the predetermined end information based on the fact that the game is executed in the advantageous gaming state and the update opportunity is generated;
a predetermined update means for updating the predetermined reference information to a side away from the predetermined end information when a predetermined grant condition is established in the advantageous gaming state;
a predetermined transmitting means for transmitting predetermined transmission information corresponding to the updated information when the predetermined reference information is updated by the predetermined updating means so as to move away from the predetermined end information;
means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means so as to be closer to the specific end information based on the fact that the game is executed in the second interval and the update trigger is generated;
Section termination means for terminating the second section based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the second section;
means for terminating the advantageous gaming state on the basis that the predetermined reference information becomes the predetermined end information before the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the second section and in the advantageous gaming state; ,
means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the second interval ends based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the advantageous gaming state;
with
The second control means executes a reception response process for executing an effect corresponding to the update of the predetermined reference information to a side away from the predetermined end information based on the reception of the predetermined transmission information. Equipped with means for receiving,
The second interval setting means is configured such that, in the second interval, the continuation criterion information is located between the specific information that the continuation criterion information can reach before reaching the specific end information and the initial information of the continuation criterion information. A section continuation means for continuing the second section after the end of the advantageous gaming state in a situation that is information included in the range,
The reception corresponding means is
notification means for updating the continuation information to be notified so that the player can recognize the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information in the game;
Post-notification means for updating the continuation information to be notified post-notification in order to prevent the player from recognizing the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information in the game;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images